Intermec CK30, CV60, Oracle-Ready CK31, TE 2000 Programmer's Manual

PDF

Documento

Anúncio

Programmer's Guide

TE 2000

3270

Terminal Emulation

Intermec Technologies Corporation

Corporate Headquarters

6001 36th Ave. W.

Everett, WA 98203

U.S.A.

Technical Communications Department

550 Second Street SE

Cedar Rapids, IA 52401

U.S.A.

www.intermec.com

The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec.

Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation.

The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, CrossBar, Data Collection Browser, dcBrowser,

Duratherm, EasyCoder, EasyLAN, Enterprise Wireless LAN, EZBuilder, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), InterDriver, Intermec Printer Network Manager, IRL, JANUS, LabelShop, Mobile Framework,

MobileLAN, Nor*Ware, Pen*Key, Precision Print, PrintSet, RoutePower, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, UAP,

Universal Access Point, and Virtual Wedge are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec

Technologies Corporation.

Throughout this manual, trademarked names may be used. Rather than put a trademark ( ™ or ® ) symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement.

There are U.S. and foreign patents pending.

Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

ii TE 2000 t 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Document Change Record

This page records changes to this document. The document was originally released as Revision A.

Revision

Date

04/2003

10/2003

04/2004

03/2005

Description of Change

Added Direct Connect port number. Added Define Origin option. Revised duration errors. Added 700 Series information. Added 2435A 48-key keypad information. Added

2435A 31/32 column bar code information. Added Magnetic Card Reader external command.

Written for software version 7.26 or greater. Updated the Key Press Sequences table for

Encoded Code 39. Revised Barcode Parms information for 700 Series Computer. Revised Radio Comm information for Trakkar Antares terminals. Added Allow Alias, Security Opts, and SIP Toggle parameters. Revised 700 Computer sereen size information.

Added 5055 .NET, CK30 Handheld Computer, and CV60 Data Collection PC information. Expanded the Binary to EBCDIC table and added information about implementing color attributes.

Written for version 7.39 or greater. Added screen sizes and bar codes to Trakker Antares terminals. Modified 248X, 700 Series, CK30, and CV60 screen size information. Added an option to the Scan Options parameter. Added Software Input Panel information to

700 Series and CV60 Terminals. Added Session Name option to Sessions parameter.

Added information about CV60 dialog boxes. Updated applicable parameters to include

Session 3 and Session 4 for 700 Series and CV60 Terminals. Removed references to

“5055 .NET” and changed “5055 DOS” references back to “5055.” Added screen captures of dialogs from the CV60 Terminal. Added Disconnect Val option to Radio Comm parameter.

Written for TE 2000 version 8.00 or greater. Updated the 700 Series Auxiliary Keys and revised the Forward Tab key and added Back Tab key for 2435A keyboards, corrected the Clear key information for the CK30 terminal in Chapter 3, “ Using the Terminal’s

Keybaord .” Added two VT/ANSI protocol options, revised the 2475, 2481, and 2486 terminal screen sizes, and revised the Code Page option in Chapter 4, “ Using the Terminal Emulation Menu .” Added TE_SETTINGS.INI settings and updated remapping information in Chapter 5, “ Customizing Your Configuration .” Changed “DCS 300” references to “Intermec Application Server” and “CV60 Data Collection PC” references to

“CV60 Vehicle Mount Computers.” Added information for the CK31 Handheld Computer.

TE 2000 t 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide iii

iv TE 2000 t 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Contents

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Do not repair or adjust alone

First aid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Resuscitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Energized equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Global Services and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii xvii xvii xvii xvii xvii xviii xviii

Warranty Information

Web Support

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Telephone Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Who Should Read this Guide?

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xviii xviii xix xix

Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Getting Started

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Understanding Network Protocol Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the Terminal and the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting the TE 2000 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Becoming Familiar With 3270 Terminal Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performing a Quick Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring the TE 2000 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unsupported Commands and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Terminal Emulation Applications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3270 Serial Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide v

Contents

Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415 Paging Keys

2415 Tab Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2425 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2425 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2425 Paging Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2425 Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2425 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2425 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2425 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2435A Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2435A Cursor Keys

2435A Paging Keys

2435A Tab Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2435A Standard Keys

2435A Function Keys

2435A 3278 SNA Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2435A AID-Generating Keys

2435A Auto-Login Restart

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2435A 3270 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2455 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2455 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2455 Paging Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2455 Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2455 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2455 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2455 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2475 and 248X Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2475 and 248X Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2475 and 248X Paging Keys

2475 and 248X Tab Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2475 and 248X 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2475 and 248X AID-Generating Keys

2475 and 248X Auto-Login Restart

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide vi

Contents

6400 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the 41-Key Keyboard

6400 Cursor Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6400 Paging Keys

6400 Tab Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6400 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6400 AID-Generating Keys

6400 Auto-Login Restart

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020 Data Collection PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the 5020 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020 Cursor Keys

5020 Paging Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020 Standard Keys

5020 3278 SNA Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020 Top-Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020 Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5055 Data Collection PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5055 Cursor Keys

5055 Paging Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5055 Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5055 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5055 AID-Generating Keys

5055 Auto-Login Restart

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59XX Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59XX Cursor Keys

59XX Paging Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59XX 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59XX AID-Generating Keys

59XX Auto-Login Restart

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17XX Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37-Key Keyboard

17XX Cursor Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17XX Paging Keys

17XX Tab Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17XX 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17XX AID-Generating Keys

17XX Auto-Login Restart

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide vii

Contents

11XX Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11XX Cursor Keys

11XX Paging Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11XX Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11XX 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11XX AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11XX Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Software Input Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Cursor Keys

700 Series Paging Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Function Keys

700 Series Editing Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 Handheld Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 Paging Keys

CK30 Standard Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 3270 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK31 Handheld Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK31 Cursor Keys

CK31 Paging Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK31 Standard Keys

CK31 Function Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK31 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK30 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK31 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CK31 3270 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

66 viii TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Contents

CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characters on the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CV60 Software Input Panels

CV60 Keyboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CV60 Cursor Keys

CV60 Paging Keys

CV60 Tab Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CV60 3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CV60 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CV60 Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shift Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Y (“Yes”) Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Up and Down Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Number Keys [0] through [9]

Display Annunciators

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Position 0

Display Position 1

Display Position 2

Display Position 3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Position 4

Display Position 5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Position 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Positions 1 through 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Positions 4 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Positions 4 through 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Positions 4 through 8

Display Positions 5 through 8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuration Menus (700 Series, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring TE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key Sequence to Open Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Opening the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Menus

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Menus

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide ix

Contents

1) Set-up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1) LCD Contrast (59XX, 17XX)

2) Screen Size (blank for 2480, 2485)

3) Screen Mode

6) Key Uppercase

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4) Annunciators (blank for 17XX, 11XX)

5) Backlight (59XX, 17XX)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7) Scroll Window (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7) More (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3) Beeper Setup (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK30, CK31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4) Tests

1) Key Click

2) Error Tone

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3) Beeper Select (6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1) Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2) Barcode Parms (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020) . . . . . . . . . .

2) Barcode Parms (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,

CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3) Protocol Opts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4) Display Opts (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020, 6400,

104

59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4) Display Opts (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118

120

5) Radio Comm (Blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, and for 2415,

2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals without either an 802.1x Supplicant Radio Driver or UDP Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123

6) Cold Start (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6) Exit TE2000 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

125

126

7) More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2) LCD Parms (Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126

128

129

136

137

138

139

144

145

146

147

1) Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2) Converters (59XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3) Memory View (6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4) Packet Driver (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5) Numbers (blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6) Timed Numbers (blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) . . . . . . . . . . .

5) Version Info (Information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6) Exit Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

147

150

151

152

153

7) More (Main Menu 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

154

1) Keyboard Opts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2) Save Parms (Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

154

3) Cloning Opts (59XX, 17XX, 11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

155

4) Session Menu (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with WTP, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60 with TCP/IP, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX,

11XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157

Restarting Terminal Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

158 x

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Contents

6400 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Opening the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160

161

5055 Data Collection PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programs to Create Terminal Emulation Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Opening the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161

162

Customizing Your Configuration

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163

Using the Auto-Login Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Developing Auto-Login Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Search Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading the Auto-Login Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals

5020 Data Collection PC

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6400, 5055 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals

Disabling the Auto-Login Feature

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6400, 5055 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sample Auto-Login Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

173

Creating a Custom Parameter Set-Up File

CONFIG.DAT Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONFIG.DAT Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONFIG.DAT Parameter Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verifying Your CONFIG.DAT Configuration

CONFIG.DAT Parameters and Qualifiers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TE_SETTINGS.INI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Upgrading from CONFIG.DAT Configuration

TE_SETTINGS.INI Configuration

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameter Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameters and Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174

175

176

197

198

199

Changing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

212

Preinitializing the 3270 TE Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xi

Contents

Remapping the Terminal’s Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remapping a Key or Two-Key Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating a Macro

Nesting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remapping Keys for Each Session

Key Code Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

215

216

Remapping Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

219

Implementing ITCCOLOR.DAT Attribute Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

220

Substituting National Characters

Creating the File

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EBCDIC to ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

222

225

226

Downloading Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals

6400, 5055 Terminals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reprogramming Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prerequisites for INTERLNK Flash Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INTERLNK Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INTERLNK and INTERSVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using CHECKCFG to Compile and Decompile Custom Configurations . . . . . . . . . .

Converting Files from ASCII to Binary

Converting Files from Binary to ASCII

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Listing Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using FLSHCONV.EXE to Build Customized HEX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Locating and Appending .EXE Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appending Data Files To Intel-Hex Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downloading a Hex File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

230

231

232

233

234

Data Stream Commands

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

Screen Design Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

236

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

236

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xii

Contents

3270 Data Stream Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Erase All Unprotected Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Erase/Write Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Erase/Write Alternate Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Read Buffer (RB) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Read Modified Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Read Modified All Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Services Control Point (SSCP) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Write Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Write Control Character

3270 Data Stream Format

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238

239

240

236

237

238

Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EUA Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Insert Cursor (IC) Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program Tab (PT) Order

Repeat Address (RA) Order

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

/Sttt Scanner (SCN) Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Buffer Address (SBA) Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start Field (SF) Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto-Forward Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242

243

244

245

247

248

249

250

Sending Data to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

250

3270 AID Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

251

Extended Commands

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

253

Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port (#F)

Flow Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return AID Key Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Transmit and Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example of Transmit and Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

254

256

257

258

259

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port (#P)

Flow Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Transmit Only

Example of Transmit Only

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260

261

262

263

Receive Only On RS-232 Port (#G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Receive Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example of Receive Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

264

265

266

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xiii

Contents

Set Parameters (#H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Set Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example of Set Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

268

269

Return Version (#V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270

Tone (#T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

271

Scan (#S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CC Byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CC Byte 2

CC Byte 3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bar Code Length

UPC

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EAN Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 39

Plessey

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 11

Code 93

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Scan Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example of Scan Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

272

273

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

Get Optical Inputs (#I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

284

Relay (Set, Reset, Read) Commands (#R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285

Magnetic Card Reader (#M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Extended Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Magnetic Card Reader

Magnetic Card Reader CAB File

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

287

288

Bar Code Scanning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

289

DK, Display Column Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2415 and 2425 Terminal Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Columns

12 Columns

17 Columns

20 Columns

22 Columns

26 Columns

32 Columns

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

291

292

293

294

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xiv

Contents

2435A Terminal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 or 10 Columns

12 Columns

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 or 20 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 Columns

26 Columns

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31 or 32 Columns

2455 Terminal Display

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 Columns

33 Columns

40 Columns

53 Columns

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2475 and 248X Terminal Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Columns

12 Columns

17 Columns

20 Columns

22 Columns

26 Columns

32 Columns

40 Columns

53 Columns

64 Columns

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

303

304

305

306

307

301

302

303

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

301

Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

308

Paging Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

308

Tab Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

3278 SNA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310

Auto-Login Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

3270 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

Encoded Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Escape Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overriding Auto Tab Scan and Auto Enter Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

314

316

317

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xv

Contents

Bar Code Symbologies

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

Bar Code Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

UPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

321

EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

322

Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

322

Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

322

Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

324

Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

324

I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

326

S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

326

Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

327

MSI Code (Variant of Plessey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

327

Conversion Tables

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

329

Decimal to Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330

Binary to EBCDIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

333

Terminal Font Set Table

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

337

Index

General Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

348

Files Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

370

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xvi

Before You Begin

Before You Begin

This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information.

Safety Summary

Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec

R equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions.

Do not repair or adjust alone

Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety.

First aid

Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.

Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.

Resuscitation

Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing.

Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.

Energized equipment

Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xvii

Before You Begin

Safety Icons

This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this manual. You may also see icons that tell you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions for handling optical parts.

A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment.

Avertissement: Un avertissement vous avertit d’une procédure de fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit

être strictement respecté pour éviter l’occurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant l’équipement.

A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data.

Attention: Une précaution vous avertit d’une procédure de fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit

être strictement respecté pour empêcher l’endommagement ou la destruction de l’équipement, ou l’altération ou la perte de données.

Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances.

Global Services and Support

Warranty Information

To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support . The Intermec

Global Sales & Service page appears. From the Service & Support menu, move your pointer over Support , and then click Warranty .

Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided “as is with all faults.” All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Web Support

Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor.

Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product.

xviii TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Before You Begin

Telephone Support

These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation.

Service

Factory Repair and

On-site Repair

Technical Support

Service Contract

Status

Schedule Site Surveys or Installations

Ordering Products

Description

Request a return authorization number for authorized service center repair, or request an on-site repair technician.

Get technical support on your

Intermec product.

Inquire about an existing contract, renew a contract, or ask invoicing questions.

Schedule a site survey, or request a product or system installation.

Talk to sales administration, place an order, or check the status of your order.

In the U.S.A. and Canada call 1-800-755-5505 and choose this option

Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact .

Who Should Read this Guide?

This guide provides you with information about the TE 2000 3270 application, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot the application.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide xix

Before You Begin

Getting Started

This chapter introduces the TE 2000 t 3270 application.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 1

Chapter 1 — Getting Started

Understanding Network Protocol Options

TE 2000 applications for the Enterprise Wireless LAN t system use one of the following network protocol options:

S UDP Plus

The terminal communicates with the host computer through the

Intermec

Application Server and an access point.

S TCP/IP

The terminal communicates through an Intermec access point, which is directly connected to the host computer on an Ethernet or a token ring network.

S WTP

The terminal communicates with the host computer through the Intermec Application Server, Intermec access point, or other Intermec gateways.

For network configuration options, refer to your terminal’s user manual.

Setting Up the Terminal and the Network

Before you can start using the TE 2000 application on your terminal, you need to do the following:

1 Set up your terminal.

Set-up includes charging and installing the battery pack and turning on the terminal for the first time. For instructions, refer to your terminal’s user manual.

Note : Battery packs do not apply to all terminals. Vehicle mount and stationary terminals are powered via an external source.

2 Configure your terminal and the network.

To use RF communications on the terminal, you need to: a Configure the Intermec Application Server (UDP Plus or WTP), other Intermec gateways (WTP), or host (TCP/IP).

b Configure the access point.

This does not apply to the 2480/2481 Terminal, which contains an Ethernet NIC instead of a radio.

c Configure the network parameters on the terminal.

For instructions, refer to your terminal’s user manual.

3 Verify that your terminal is communicating correctly with the access point, Intermec Application Server, or host.

To verify that your terminal is communicating correctly, refer to the terminal’s user manual for instructions.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 1 — Getting Started

Starting the TE 2000 Application

You are ready to start your application once the terminal is set up, the terminal and the network are configured, and communications are established with the gateway and access point or host.

To start your application:

Turn on the terminal. Wait a few seconds while the initialization screens

(below) clear and the application starts.

COPR. 1991-2005

INTERMEC. ALL

RIGHTS RESERVED

V <version number>

<release date>

TE 2000(TM)

<program name> <version>

Host: <host name>

<emulation type>

<program name> <version>

<emulation type>

Host: <host name>

<program name> <version>

Session: <current session number>

<session name>

<emulation type>

Host: <host name>

<device name>

For Version 7.26 or greater For Version 8.00 or greater

Note : If your application does not start after a few seconds, you may not have configured the terminal correctly. See your terminal’s user manual.

You can now do one of the following:

S Become familiar with TE 2000 3270 if you have not previously used it.

S Perform a quick configuration.

S Configure your TE 2000 application.

S Customize your TE 2000 application.

Becoming Familiar With 3270 Terminal Emulation

If you have not previously used the TE 2000 3270 application, see Chapter 2 , “ Using Terminal Emulation Applications ,” to understand 3270 commands. See Chapter 3, “ Using the Terminal’s Keyboard ,” to become familiar with your terminal’s keyboard and the keys you need to press to perform

3270 commands.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 3

Chapter 1 — Getting Started

Performing a Quick Configuration

Note : For Terminal Emulation Version 6.60 or greater, the default data stream is “VT/ANSI.”

1 Change the data stream to “3270.” The default data stream is “Native” for the 6400 (WTP), 5055 (WTP), 11XX, 17XX, and 59XX Terminals.

The default data stream for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, and IP terminals is “3270.” a Access the terminal emulation configuration menus by pressing the following keys, then choose 1) Set-up Parms from the Main Menu.

Terminal

2415

2425

2435A

2455, 2475, 248X

6400

5055

59XX

17XX, 11XX

Key Sequence

) !

(55-key keyboard)

( 5 (37-key keyboard)

( !

r l (57-key keyboard)

[Green] > [Orange] > (48-key keyboard) r l (39-key function numeric keyboard)

( ¡

[Gold] [Blue]

[Blue] [M] or [ALT] [M]

[Brown] [Space]

[Gold] [Black]

Note: Press a number to select a menu option, then press [Enter] to return to a previous menu.

b At the Enter Password prompt, enter cr52401 .

On 17XX (37-key) Terminals, the password is: F12 F11 5 2 4 0 1 c From the Set-up Parms menu, select 3) Protocol Opts ,

2) Data Stream , then 2) 3270 .

2 Extended commands transmit or receive data over the terminal’s

RS-232 port, send information to an RS-232 device, or collect data. Enable the Extended Cmds option if your host computer is configured to send extended commands to the terminal.

It is disabled by default.

From the Protocol Opts menu, select 3) Extended Cmds , then

1) Enabled .

3 From the Main Menu , select 7) More , then 2) Save Parms .

4 At the Enter Password prompt, type cr52401 , then press enter.

On 17XX (37-key) Terminals, the password is: F12 F11 5 2 4 0 1

5 From the Main Menu , select 6) Exit Menus .

Note : For WTP devices, you should also set a terminal number.

6 Log in to a TE session, then use the terminal to collect/transmit data.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 1 — Getting Started

Configuring the TE 2000 Application

You can use the terminal’s TE 2000 configuration menus to configure site-specific operational parameters, including UDP Plus, WTP, or TCP/

IP communications, terminal emulation options, and the Main Menu password. For information about configuring the terminal, see Chapter 4,

“ Using the Terminal Emulation Menus .”

Using Advanced Features

You can customize the standard TE 2000 program to do the following:

For more information, see Chapter 5, “ Customizing Your Configuration .”

S Use the auto-login feature to send the same login information each time you login to the host.

S Create a custom parameter set-up file.

S Change the text of terminal emulation configuration menus or system messages.

S Preinitialize the TE 2000 3270 terminal emulation program.

Unsupported Commands and Functions

The TE 2000 application for the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and

248X Terminals does not support the following commands and functions, which were supported in previous versions.

End (viewport)

Erase Field

Moved the viewport to the end of the last line shown on the TE screen.

Erased all characters in the field where the cursor was positioned.

Erase Last Word Erased all characters from the cursor back to the start of a word or a space on the screen.

Fast Cursor Right or Left Moved the cursor two positions to the right or left rather than one.

Home (viewport)

Reshow

Moved the window or viewport to the top left corner of the

TE screen.

Resent a screen image from the locally maintained host buffer to refresh the terminal screen.

Status

Status line messages

Dual sessions

Toggled the terminal’s screen between the status line display and the normal field input display.

Reported the operating status of the terminal and host system.

Not supported in Trakker Antares UDP Plus or TCP terminals.

If you scan the bar code for an unsupported command, the bar code data is read into the terminal. If you press the key sequence for the command, the sequence is ignored.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 5

Chapter 1 — Getting Started

Program Names

The following chart lists TE options and program names.

Note : The TE 2000 application does not support SST (Spread Spectrum

Transmission) or regular UHF. “S-UHF” is synthesized UHF.

Model Option

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/WTP/802.11

TE/UDP Plus/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/UDP Plus/802.11

TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/IP/802.11

Program Name

FWP240H0

6400

5020

5055

59XX

17XX

11XX

700 Series

CK30, CK31

CV60

TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/WTP/802.11

TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon

TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/IP/802.11

TE/UDP Plus/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/UDP Plus/802.11

TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/IP/802.11

TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/WTP/802.11

TE/IP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/IP/802.11

TE/WTP

TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon

TE/WTP/S-UHF

TE/WTP

TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon

TE/WTP/S-UHF

TE/WTP

TE/WTP/2.4 GHz OpenAir

TE/WTP/900 MHz Falcon

TE/WTP/S-UHF

TE/IP/802.11

TE/UDP Plus/802.11

TE/IP/802.11

51-key keyboard 41-key keyboard

FWP640H0 FWP640H4

FWP640H0

FWP64TH0

FWP640H4

FWP64TH4

FWP502H0

FWP650H0

FWP65TH0

FWP592H0

FWP594H0

FWP598H0

FWP596H0

FWP591H1

57-key keyboard 37-key keyboard

FWP170H0

FWP174H0

FWP170H3

FWP174H3

FWP178H0

FWP176H0

FWP171H0

FWP178H3

FWP176H3

FWP171H3

FWP110H0

FWP114H0

FWP118H0

FWP116H0

FWP111H0

FWP700H0

FWPCK3H0

FWPCV6H0

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Using Terminal Emulation

Applications

This chapter describes how to use the TE 2000 t 3270 application for your particular terminal. For this application, Intermec Technologies emulates an IBM-3278-2 terminal.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 7

Chapter 2 — Using Terminal Emulation Applications

Annunciators

3278 SNA Keys

The terminal’s display reserves a location for annunciators (icons) that help you monitor RF and network communications, or alert you of a condition that requires action. Following are TE 2000 3270 annunciators.

Input inhibited

X The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field. The “key-ahead” feature stores keystrokes after the

“input inhibited” annunciator appears. These are saved for the next field.

The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.

Insert mode

For information about annunciators that indicate battery condition and general operational status, refer to the terminal’s user manual.

The following describes 3278 SNA keys.

Clear Erases from the cursor to the current unprotected end-of-field.

Clr

Del

Erases the current unprotected field. Also sets the MDT bit and does a reverse tab. A beep means the field is protected and cannot be erased.

Deletes the character over the cursor in the current unprotected field. Data to the right of the cursor shifts left one position. A beep indicates the character is in a protected field and cannot be erased.

Delete Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Data to the right of the cursor shifts left one position.

Enter Transmits all modified data fields to the host.

EOF Erases all data from the position of the cursor to the end of the unprotected field. The cursor remains in the same location. A beep indicates that the field is protected.

Home Sends the cursor to the unprotected field in the display buffer. The first unprotected field is determined by the Insert Cursor order.

Insert Toggles between insert mode and normal mode. In insert mode, characters are inserted instead of overwritten.

Reset Resets from an error condition.

Return Moves cursor to first position on the next line.

To enter an SNA Key :

Press the keys listed in the chapter for the terminal. Or, scan the bar codes in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning .”

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 2 — Using Terminal Emulation Applications

AID-Generating Keys

The terminal emulates all of the following Attention Identification (AID) keys on the IBM terminal.

Clear

Programmable function keys F1–F24 These keys send modified input fields and AID key values to the host. The keys lock the keyboard until the host unlocks it. The function keys are used exclusively for 3270 AID key emulation.

When you press a programmable function key or scan its bar code, you send the data on the screen to the host, and the function you specified is performed on this data. Each function is determined by the application you use with your system. Refer to your application’s user manual for details on the functions.

Program Access (PA) keys 1–3

This key clears the data buffer but leaves the keyboard unlocked. It sends the

Clear AID key value to the host.

PA1, PA2, and PA3 send the AID key value to the host but leave the keyboard unlocked. When an operator presses a PA key, one of the following

AID codes is returned along with the current cursor address on the normal

LU-LU (logical unit) flow. No data is returned to the AS/400 system with any PA key.

S PA AID X6C

S PA AID X6E

S PA AID X6B

To enter an AID Key :

Press the keys listed in the chapter for the terminal. Or, scan the appropriate bar code in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning .”

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 9

Chapter 2 — Using Terminal Emulation Applications

3270 Serial Scanning

The following instructions explain how to set serial scanning options.

These instructions apply to the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X

Terminals.

1 Connect your terminal to a serial scanner.

2 Open the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System.

3 From the Main Menu, choose Configuration Menu >

Communications Menu > Serial Port , then configure the serial port parameters. See the terminal’s user manual for help.

Note : The baud rate, data bits, stop bits, and parity for the serial scanner and the serial port must match.

Do the following to set the RS232 Stream option:

1 Open the TE configuration menus. For the correct key sequence, see

Chapter 1, “ Getting Started .”

2 From the Main Menu , select 1) Set-up Parms , then enter cr52401 at the Enter Password prompt.

3 Select 3) Protocol Opts , 5) 3270 , then 7) More .

4 Enable or disable the 6) RS232 Stream option.

10 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Using the Terminal’s

Keyboard

Your terminal has a special keyboard that contains most of the keys available on your 3270 terminal keyboard. Use the keyboard to enter data in the TE 2000 screens.

The keys on the keyboard have their main character or operation marked directly on the key itself. To access that character or operation, just press the key.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 11

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2415 Terminal

Function

Left Key

Your 2415 Terminal has either a 55-key or a 37-key keyboard. For help with using the keyboard, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 241X Hand-Held

Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 069538).

55-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard

Function

Right Key

Function

Left Key

Function

Right Key

Control Key Shift Key

Shift Key Control Key

This illustration shows both a 55-key (left) and a 37-key (right) keyboard for the 2415 Terminal.

2415 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

Press the Keys

( >

( =

2415 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

Press the Keys

( 9

( 3

( 6

( 4

2415 Tab Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

Press the Keys

( ;

;

12 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2415 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

Press the Keys

55-Key Keyboard

) T

( .

\ or [

) 6

( 7

( 0

) Q

) Y

37-Key Keyboard

( $

( .

\ or [

( 1

( 7

( 0

( g

( i

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 13

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2415 AID-Generating Keys

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F11

F12

F13

F14

F10

To Enter

Clear

) G

) H

) I

) J

) K

) L

) M

) N

) O

) P

( 8

( 5

( 2

( #

( $

) A

) B

) C

) D

) E

) F

55-Key Keyboard

) 9

( !

( @

Press the Keys

$ b

37-Key Keyboard

? =

@ c d

? $

? b

? c

? d

? e

? f

? g

? h e f g h i

? !

? @

? #

? i

( !

( @

( #

2415 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

14 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2425 Terminal

For help with using the keyboard, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 064024).

Function Left

(FnL) Key

Function Right

(FnR) Key

Control Key

Shift Key

This illustration shows the keyboard for the 2425 Terminal.

2425 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

2425 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

2425 Tab Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Press the Keys

) [

) {

) }

) ]

Press the Keys

) 9

) 3

) 6

) 4

Press the Keys

) <

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2425 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

Press the Keys

( Y

) .

; or y or z

( O

( V

) 0

( P

( d

16 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2425 AID-Generating Keys

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F11

F12

F13

F14

F10

To Enter

Clear

( F

( G

( H

( I

( J

( K

( L

( M

( N

) 8

) 5

) 2

) !

) @

) #

) $

) %

( A

( B

( C

( D

( E

Press the Keys

( W

2425 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press ( % or scan the following bar code

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 17

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2435A Terminal

For help with using the keyboard, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 243X

Hand-Held Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 071791-001).

57-Key Keyboard 48-Key Keyboard 39-Key Keyboard

Your 2435A Terminal has either a 57-key (left), a 48-key (middle), or a 39-key (right) keyboard as shown in this illustration.

Characters on the Keyboards

The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:

[Orange] Press Orange > plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in orange on the overlay.

[Green] Press Green > plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in green on the overlay.

2435A Cursor Keys

Press the Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

57-Key Keyboard l u l d l b l a

48-Key Keyboard

Orange > , A

Orange > , B

Orange > , F

Orange > , E

39-Key Function

Numeric Keyboard l u l d l b l a

18 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2435A Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

2435A Tab Keys

57-Key Keyboard r u r d r b r a

Press the Keys

48-Key Keyboard

Green > , Q

Green > , V

Green > , W

Green > , U

39-Key Function

Numeric Keyboard r u r d r b r a

To Enter

Forward Tab

Back Tab

57-Key Keyboard l b

Not applicable

Press the Keys

48-Key Keyboard

39-Key Function

Numeric Keyboard l b

Not applicable

2435A Standard Keys

To Enter

0–9

Symbols

2435A Function Keys

Press the Keys

57-Key Keyboard 48-Key Keyboard

39-Key Function

Numeric Keyboard

0 – 9 0 – 9 0 – 9 w plus corresponding key ?

plus corresponding key w plus corresponding key

To Enter

Backspace

Caps Lock

Return

Shift

Space bar

57-Key Keyboard n l r v w s

Press the Keys

48-Key Keyboard

Orange > , ^

;

39-Key Function

Numeric Keyboard n l r v w s

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 19

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2435A 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

57-Key Keyboard r 4 l n v r 9 r 7 r 5 r x r 6

Press the Keys

48-Key Keyboard

Green > , P

Green > , D

;

Green > , O

Green > , H

Green > , I

Orange > , ;

Green > , R

39-Key Function

Numeric Keyboard r 4

4 n v r 9 r 7 r 5 x or ; r 6

20 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

F24

Clear

PA1

PA2

PA3

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F12

F13

F14

F15

F10

F11

F16

F17

F18

To Enter

2435A AID-Generating Keys

r H r I r J r K r L r M r N r O r P r Q r R r 8 r 1 r 2 r 3

57-Key Keyboard g h i j k o r A r B r C r D r E r F r G

Press the Keys

48-Key Keyboard

Orange > , 1

Orange > , 2

Orange > , 3

Orange > , 4

Orange > , 5

Orange > , 6

Orange > , 7

Orange > , 8

Orange > , 9

Orange > , 0

Green > , 1

Green > , 2

Green > , 3

Green > , 4

Green > , 5

Green > , 6

Green > , 7

Green > , 8

Green > , 9

Green > , 0

Orange > , :

Green > , :

Orange > , _

Green > , _

Green > , C

Green > , X

Green > , Y

Green > , Z r h r i r j r k r o r m r p r q r [ r \ r ] r 8 r 1 r 2 r 3

39-Key Function

Numeric Keyboard g h i j k o m p q

[

] r g

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 21

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2435A Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press r v on the 57-key keyboard and

39-key function numeric keyboards; press Green > , ; on the 48-key keyboard, or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code

Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

2435A 3270 Additional Functions

To access the TE configuration menus, press r l on the 57-key keyboard and 39-key function numeric keyboards, or press Green

Orange > on the 48-key keyboard.

22 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2455 Terminal

For help with using the keyboard, refer to the TRAKKER Antares 2455

Vehicle-Mount Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 067358).

Note : You must use the 2455 keyboard (P/N 067028) with the TE applications.

Backspace

Key

Shift

Key

Control

Key

Function

Left Key

This illustration shows the keyboard for the 2455 Terminal.

2455 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

Press the Keys

) [

) {

) }

) ]

2455 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

Press the Keys

) 9

) 3

) 6

) 4

2455 Tab Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Press the Keys

) <

Function

Right Key

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2455 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

Press the Keys

( Y

) .

;

( O

( V

) 0

( P

( d

24 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2455 AID-Generating Keys

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F11

F12

F13

F14

F10

To Enter

Clear

( F

( G

( H

( I

( J

( K

( L

( M

( N

) 8

) 5

) 2

) ¡

) ¢

) £

) §

) ¶

( A

( B

( C

( D

( E

Press the Keys

( W

2455 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press ( ¶ or scan the following bar code

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 25

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2475 and 248X Terminals

For help with using the keyboard, refer either to the Trakker Antares 2475

Vehicle-Mount Terminal User’s Manual (P/N: 072383) or the TRAKKER

Antares 248X Stationary Terminal User’s Manual (P/N 066960).

Control

Key

Backspace

Key

Shift Key

Function

Left Key

Function

Right Key

This illustration shows the keyboard for the 2475 and 248X Terminals.

2475 and 248X Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

Press the Keys

) ¥

) †

) ª

) –

2475 and 248X Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

Press the Keys

) 9

) 3

) 6

) 4

2475 and 248X Tab Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

Press the Keys

) ø

26 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2475 and 248X 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

Press the Keys

( O

) .

; or Enter

( I

( W

) 0

( A

( d

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 27

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

2475 and 248X AID-Generating Keys

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F11

F12

F13

F14

F10

To Enter

Clear

( C

( V

( B

( N

) 8

) 5

) 2

Press the Keys

) b

) ¡

) ¢

) £

) §

) ¶

( F

( G

( H

( J

( K

( L

( r

( [quotation mark]

( Z

( X

2475 and 248X Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press ( ¶ or scan the following bar code

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

28 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

6400 Computer

For help with the keyboard, see the PEN*KEY Model 6400 User’s Guide

(P/N 961-047-093).

51-Key Keyboard

41-Key Keyboard

EOF

Unlabeled Key Colors:

Blue

Gold

Your 6400 Computer has either a 51-key (left) or a 41-key (right) keyboard as shown.

Characters on the Keyboards

The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:

[Green] The Green [SHFT] puts the keyboard into green shift mode.

[Gold] Press [Gold] plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

[Blue] Press [Blue] plus a key to do operations printed in blue on the overlay.

The 51-key keyboard has two gray, unlabeled keys in the bottom row.

These are the keys’ functions when they are unshifted (in primary plane):

Gray key with “Z” printed above it is the letter Z.

Gray key with “SP” printed above it is the Space key ( [SP] ), which types one space.

The 41-key keyboard has four gray, unlabeled keys near the bottom row.

Following are the key’s functions when they are in the primary plane:

Gray key with “CLR” printed above it is the Clear key.

Gray key with “HOME” printed above it is the Home key.

Gray key with “PA1” printed above it is the PA1 key.

Gray key with “PA2” printed above it is the PA2 key.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 29

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

Note : The keyboard does not have keys for the “Not” symbol (¬) and the

“cent” symbol (¢). To enter these symbols, scan the following bar codes

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Cent (¢)

*/ECENT*

*%CENT*

Not (¬)

*/ENOT*

*%NOT*

Using the 41-Key Keyboard

The 41-key keyboard has numeric keys and user-defined PF AID keys in its primary plane. It has alphabetic keys, special characters, and function keys in its secondary plane.

Because a 6400 Computer with a 41-key keyboard does not have alphabetic keys, follow these procedures to change passwords and cold-start the computer:

S Press [Blue] [3] or [F12] [3] to enter a “C,” [Blue] [F8] or [F11] [3] to enter an “R,” then press “52401” to enter the password for the Set-up

Parms in the terminal emulations menu.

Note that these are not case-sensitive.

S Press [Blue] [PA1] to initiate the COLD START? menu option.

You can use one of two methods to type letters on the 41-key keyboard: standard mode or alpha lock mode. When engaged, alpha lock mode switches the alphabetic keys with the function keys. That is, it moves lowercase alphabetic keys from their normal Blue plane to the primary plane. It moves uppercase alphabetic keys from their standard [SHFT]

Blue plane to the [SHFT] plane. Alpha lock provides a faster way to type a series of letters because it reduces the number of key combinations.

Note : Alpha lock mode moves only the alpha keys to the primary plane.

To engage alpha lock mode press [Blue] , [Gold] . Then, to type a series of letters, press the correct key combination. The keyboard stays in alpha lock mode until you press [Blue] , [Gold] to unlock it.

6400 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

Press the Keys

[Gold]

[ Y ]

[Gold] [ B ]

[Gold] [ " ]

[Gold] [ A ]

30 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

6400 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

Press the Keys

[Blue] [ Y ]

[Blue] [ B ]

[Blue] [ " ]

[Blue] [ A ]

6400 Tab Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

Press the Keys

[Gold] [ B ]

[Gold]

[

]

6400 3278 SNA Keys

This chart describes 3278 SNA keys in standard (nonalpha-lock mode).

To Enter

Clear

Clr

Home

Delete

Del

Enter

EOF

Insert

Reset

Press the Keys

51-Key Keyboard 41-Key Keyboard

[Blue] [7]

[Gold] [ Í ]

[Blue] [9]

[ Í ]

[Blue] [ Í ]

[ENT]

[Blue] [2]

[Blue] [3]

Î | (Forward tab)

[Gold] [8]

[CLR]

[HOME]

[ Í ]

[Blue] [ Í ]

[ENT]

[Gold] [J]

[Gold] [ Í ]

Î | (Forward tab)

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 31

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

6400 AID-Generating Keys

To Enter

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F12

F13

F14

F15

F10

F11

Clear

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

Press the Keys

[Blue] [7]

[Blue] [A]

[Blue] [B]

[Blue] [C]

[Blue] [D]

[Blue] [E]

[Blue] [F]

[Blue] [G]

[Blue] [H]

[Blue] [I]

[Blue] [J]

[Blue] [K]

[Blue] [L]

[Blue] [M]

[Blue] [N]

[Blue] [O]

[Blue] [P]

[Blue] [Q]

[Blue] [R]

[Blue] [S]

[Blue] [T]

[Blue] [U]

[Blue] [V]

[Blue] [W]

[Blue] [X]

[Blue] [1]

[Blue] [4]

No key available. Scan the bar code in Appendix

A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”.

When alpha lock mode is engaged on the 41-key keyboard, it switches the function keys with the alphabetic keys. That is, function keys normally in the primary plane ( [F1] through [F12] ) move to the Blue plane. Function keys normally in the Shift plane ( [F13] through [F24] ) move to the Shift,

Blue plane.

32 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

The following chart describes how to do function operations when the

41-key keyboard is in standard mode or alpha lock mode.

To Enter

F13

F14

F15

F16

F10

F11

F12

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

Standard Mode

[F1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

[F5]

[F6]

[F7]

[F8]

[F9]

[F10]

[F11]

[F12]

[SHFT] [F1]

[SHFT] [F2]

[SHFT] [F3]

[SHFT] [F4]

[SHFT] [F5]

[SHFT] [F6]

[SHFT] [F7]

[SHFT] [F8]

[SHFT] [F9]

[SHFT] [F10]

[SHFT] [F11]

[SHFT] [F12]

Press the Keys

Alpha Lock Mode

[Blue] [F1]

[Blue] [F2]

[Blue] [F3]

[Blue] [F4]

[Blue] [F5]

[Blue] [F6]

[Blue] [F7]

[Blue] [F8]

[Blue] [F9]

[Blue] [F10]

[Blue] [F11]

[Blue] [F12]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F1]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F2]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F3]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F4]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F5]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F6]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F7]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F8]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F9]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F10]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F11]

[SHFT] [Blue] [F12]

To engage alpha lock mode, press [Blue] , [Gold] . Then press the correct key combinations in the chart. The keyboard stays in alpha lock mode until you press [Blue] , [Gold] again to unlock it.

6400 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 33

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

5020 Data Collection PC

For help with using the keyboard, refer to the 5020 Data Collection PC

User’s Manual (P/N 068975-002).

55-Key Keyboard 43-Key Keyboard

Your 5020 Data Collection PC has either a 55-key (left) or a 43-key (right) keyboard as shown.

Characters on the 5020 Keypad

Characters, symbols, and functions are printed in four places on or above the keys and are also color-coded to make key combinations.

Position on Keypad

Printed on key

Printed in orange on left side above key

Printed in lime and centered above key

Printed in green on right side above key

Press the Keys

Press the key

A , then the key

B , then the key

C , then the key

34 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

5020 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

5020 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

5020 Standard Keys

5020 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Numbers

Symbols

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Home

Delete

Enter

EOF

Insert

Reset

}

{

Press the Keys

55-Key Keyboard

[

]

43-Key Keyboard

[

]

}

{

Press the Keys

55-Key Keyboard

C [

C ]

C }

C {

43-Key Keyboard

C [

C ]

C }

C {

Press the Keys

0 – 9

A , B , or C , plus corresponding key.

55-Key Keyboard

C 4

A {

A t b or e

C t

C 5

Press the Keys

43-Key Keyboard

C 4

A {

A t b or

C t

C 5

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 35

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

5020 Top-Row Function Keys

Note : Intermec

R tion.

Application Servers do not support the F5 (Break) func-

F12

F13

F14

F15

F10

F11

To Enter

F5 (Break)

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F16

F17

F18

F19

C [K]

C [L]

C [M]

C [N]

C [Q]

C [P]

C [Q]

C [R]

C [S]

C [T]

C [U]

C [V]

C [W]

C [X]

55-Key Keyboard

C [A]

C [B]

C [C]

C [D]

C [E]

C [F]

C [G]

C [H]

C [I]

C [J]

Press the Keys

B k

B l

B m

B n

B o

B p

B D

B E

B !

B c j k l m

43-Key Keyboard g h i n o p

B g

B h

B i

B j

36 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

5020 Caps Lock

To type all alphabetic characters as uppercase letters, either press u before typing each letter or enable the Caps Lock feature.

To enable Caps Lock :

Press u until a tone is emitted, or press B ?

with the 43-key keyboard or C u with the 55-key keyboard. The Caps Lock icon will appear in the Notification Tray and remain enabled until you disable it.

To type a lowercase letter while Caps Lock is enabled :

Press u A and an alphabetic character key. For example, press u

A 6 to type a lowercase letter “f.”

To disable Caps Lock :

Press u until a tone is emitted, or press B u with the 43-key keyboard or C u with the 55-key keyboard.

5020 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press C r or scan the following bar code

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 37

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

5055 Data Collection PC

For help with using the keyboard, refer to the 5055 Data Collection PC

User’s Guide (P/N 961-054-017).

Unlabeled Key Colors:

Blue

Gold

This illustration shows the keyboard for the 5055 Data Collection PC.

Characters on the Keyboard

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are as follows.

[Shift]

[Blue]

Press [Shift] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.

The blue (Ctrl) key puts the keyboard into blue shift mode. Press [Blue] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in blue, or to send a control character.

[Gold] The gold (Alt) key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in gold.

[NumLock] The green (number lock) key puts the keyboard into NumLock mode.

Press [NumLock] plus a keyboard key to type a number or character printed in green.

Note : The following keys are not supported: Fn, Setup, SysReq, Pause,

Break, End, ScrLk, PgDn, and PgUp. The keyboard does not have keys for the “Not” symbol (‘) and the “cent” symbol (¢). To enter these symbols, scan the following bar codes (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Cent (¢)

*/ECENT*

*%CENT*

Not (¬)

*/ENOT*

*%NOT*

38 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

5055 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

5055 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

5055 Tab Keys

5055 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

To Enter

Clear

Clr

Home

Delete

Del

Enter

EOF

Insert

Reset

Press the Keys

[Blue]

[ Ï ]

[Blue] [ Ð ]

[Blue] [ Î ]

[Blue] [ Í ]

Press the Keys

[Gold] [ Ï ]

[Gold] [ Ð ]

[Gold] [ Î ]

[Gold] [ Í ]

Press the Keys

| Í

Î |

Press the Keys

[Gold] [C]

[Blue] [C]

[HOME]

[ Í ]

[Del]

[Enter]

[Gold] [F]

[Ins]

Î | (Forward tab)

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 39

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

5055 AID-Generating Keys

To Enter

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F12

F13

F14

F15

F10

F11

Clear

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

Press the Keys

[Gold] [C]

[F1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

[F5]

[F6]

[F7]

[F8]

[F9]

[F10]

[Blue] [F1]

[Blue] [F2]

[Blue] [F3]

[Blue] [F4]

[Blue] [F5]

[Blue] [F6]

[Blue] [F7]

[Blue] [F8]

[Blue] [F9]

[Blue] [F10]

[Gold] [F1]

[Gold] [F2]

[Gold] [F3]

[Gold] [F4]

[Gold] [1]

[Gold] [2]

No key available. Scan the bar code in Appendix

A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”.

5055 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

40 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

59XX Terminal

For help with using the keyboard, refer to the 5900 Series User’s Guide

(P/N 961-047-121).

Unlabeled Key Colors:

Brown

Gold

This illustration shows the keyboard for the 59XX Terminal.

Characters on the Keyboard

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are as follows.

[SHIFT] Press this key plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.

[Brown] The brown key puts the keyboard into brown shift mode. Press [Brown] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in brown on the overlay.

[Gold] The gold key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to type a special character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

The [INSERT] , [CLR] , and [SHIFT] keys have their operations printed to the right of them. Operations printed to the right are the unshifted values. Operations printed above the keys are the shifted values.

Note : The keyboard does not have keys for the “Not” symbol (‘) and the

“cent” symbol (¢). To enter these symbols, scan the following bar codes

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Cent (¢)

*/ECENT*

*%CENT*

Not (¬)

*/ENOT*

*%NOT*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 41

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

59XX Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

59XX Paging Keys

59XX 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

To Enter

Clear

Clr

Home

Delete

Del

Enter

EOF

Insert

Reset

Press the Keys

[Brown]

[ Y ]

[Brown] [ B ]

[Brown] [ " ]

[Brown] [ A ]

Press the Keys

[Gold] [ Y ]

[Gold] [ B ]

[Gold] [ " ]

[Gold] [ A ]

Press the Keys

[Gold] [.] (period)

[CLR]

[Gold] [INSERT]

[ Í ]

[Gold] [ Í ]

[ENTER]

[Gold] [CLR]

[INSERT]

Î (Forward tab)

42 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

59XX AID-Generating Keys

To Enter

F13

F14

F15

F16

F10

F11

F12

Clear

F21

F22

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F17

F18

F19

F20

Press the Keys

[F5]

[F6]

[F7]

[F8]

[Gold] [.] (period)

[F1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

[Brown] [F1]

[Brown] [F2]

[Brown] [F3]

[Brown] [F4]

[Brown] [F5]

[Brown] [F6]

[Brown] [F7]

[Brown] [F8]

[Gold] [F1]

[Gold] [F2]

[Gold] [F3]

[Gold] [F4]

[Gold] [F5]

[Gold] [F6]

[Gold] [F7]

[Gold] [F8]

[Gold] [Y]

[Gold] [Z]

No key available. Scan the bar code in Appendix

A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”.

59XX Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 43

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

17XX Terminal

For help with using the keyboard, refer to the RT17XX Radio Data Terminal User’s Guide (P/N: 961-047-068).

57-Key Keyboard 37-Key Keyboard

Unlabeled Key Colors:

Black

Gold

Brown

Your 17XX Terminal has either a 57-key (left) or a 37-key (right) keyboard as shown.

Characters on the Keyboards

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are as follows.

[SHIFT] Press [SHIFT] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. The [SHIFT] key is located near the top of the keyboard.

[Gold] This puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

[Black] The black key puts the keyboard into black shift mode. Press [Black] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in black on the overlay.

Note : The keyboard does not have keys for the “Not” symbol (‘) and the

“cent” symbol (¢). To enter these symbols, scan the following bar codes

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Cent (¢)

*/ECENT*

*%CENT*

Not (¬)

*/ENOT*

*%NOT*

44 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

37-Key Keyboard

To Enter p q n o j k l m i g h f e c d a b w x u v y z s r t

The 37-key keyboard has standard numeric keys, an [ENTER] key, and user-defined function keys in its primary plane. It has alphabetic keys and special characters in its secondary plane. Because a terminal with a 37-key keyboard does not have alphabetic keys in its primary plane, follow these procedures when using its firmware and downloading software to it:

S To access password-protected menus, press [Gold] , [Black] , [F12] ,

[F11] or press [Black] , [F3] , [Black] , then type “52401”for a password.

S To start the COLD START? menu option, press [F10] to answer “yes.”

S To download software, hold down the [F1] key as you power up the terminal to go into download mode. This is similar to holding down the

[I] key on the standard 57-key keyboard.

The following chart describes how to type letters on the 37-key keyboard.

Press the Keys To Enter

[Black] [F1]

[Black] [F2]

[Black] [F3]

[Black] [F4]

[Black] [F5]

[Black] [F6]

[Black] [F7]

[Black] [F8]

[Black] [F9]

[Black] [F10]

[Black] [F11]

[Black] [F12]

[Black] [SP]

[Black] [ Í ]

[Black] [7]

[Black] [8]

[Black] [9]

[Black] [4]

[Black] [5]

[Black] [6]

[Black] [1]

[Black] [2]

[Black] [3] W

[Black] [RETURN] X

[Black] [0]

[Black] [.]

Press the Keys

[SHIFT] [F1]

[SHIFT] [F2]

[SHIFT] [F3]

[SHIFT] [F4]

[SHIFT] [F5]

[SHIFT] [F6]

[SHIFT] [F7]

[SHIFT] [F8]

[SHIFT] [F9]

[SHIFT] [F10]

[SHIFT] [F11]

[SHIFT] [F12]

[SHIFT] [SP]

[SHIFT] [ Í ]

[SHIFT] [7]

[SHIFT] [8]

[SHIFT] [9]

[SHIFT] [4]

[SHIFT] [5]

[SHIFT] [6]

[SHIFT] [1]

[SHIFT] [2]

[SHIFT] [3]

[SHIFT] [RETURN]

[SHIFT] [0]

[SHIFT] [.] (period)

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 45

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

17XX Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

17XX Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

17XX Tab Keys

17XX 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

To Enter

Clear

Clr

Home

Delete

Del

Enter

EOF

New Line (return)

Reset

Press the Keys

[Gold]

[ Y ]

[Gold] [ B ]

[Gold] [ " ]

[Gold] [ A ]

Press the Keys

[Black] [ Y ]

[Black] [ B ]

[Black] [ " ]

[Black] [ A ]

Press the Keys

[ A ]

[

]

Press the Keys

57-Key Keyboard

[Black] [1]

[Gold] [ Í ]

[Black] [SP]

[ Í ]

[Black] [ Í ]

[ENTER]

[Black] [RETURN]

[RETURN]

[ " ] (Forward tab)

37-Key Keyboard

[Gold] [8]

[Gold] [4]

[Gold] [7]

[ Í ]

[Gold] [9]

[ENTER]

[Gold] [RETURN]

[RETURN]

[ " ] (Forward tab)

46 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

17XX AID-Generating Keys

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

To Enter

Clear

Press the Keys

57-Key Keyboard

[Black] [1]

[Black] [A]

[Black] [B]

[Black] [C]

[Black] [D]

[Black] [E]

[Black] [F]

37-Key Keyboard

[Gold] [8]

[F1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

[F5]

[F6]

[Black] [G]

[Black] [H]

[Black] [I]

[Black] [J]

[Black] [K]

[Black] [L]

[Black] [M]

[Black] [N]

[Black] [O]

[Black] [P]

[Black] [Q]

[Black] [R]

[Black] [S]

[Black] [T]

[Black] [U]

[Black] [V]

[F7]

[F8]

[F9]

[F10]

[F11]

[F12]

Not supported

[Black] [W]

[Black] [X]

[Black] [Y]

[Black] [Z]

Not supported

[Gold] [1]

[Gold] [2]

No key available. Scan the bar code in Appendix A, “ Bar

Code Scanning ”.

17XX Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 47

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

11XX Terminal

For help with using the keyboard, see the 1100 Series Data Terminal User’s

Guide (P/N 961-047-069).

Unlabeled Key Colors:

Black

Gold

Brown

This illustration shows the keyboard for the 11XX Terminal.

Characters on the Keyboard

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are as follows.

[SHIFT] Press the brown [SHIFT] key plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.

The [SHIFT] key is located near the top of the keyboard.

[Gold] The gold key puts the keyboard in gold shift mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to type a special character or do an operation printed in gold.

[Black] The black key puts the keyboard in black shift mode. Press [Black] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in black. To lock into shift mode, press [Black] [Gold] . To unlock the keyboard, press [Black] [Gold] again.

The [RETURN] key has its operation printed to the left of it, which is its unshifted value. The operation printed above is the shifted value.

Note : The keyboard does not have keys for the “Not” symbol (‘) and the

“cent” symbol (¢). To enter these symbols, scan the following bar codes

(also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ” ).

Cent (¢)

*/ECENT*

*%CENT*

Not (¬)

*/ENOT*

*%NOT*

48 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

11XX Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

11XX Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

11XX Tab Keys

11XX 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

To Enter

Clear

Clr

Home

Delete

Del

Enter

EOF

Insert

New Line (return)

Reset

Press the Keys

[Gold]

[ Y ]

[Gold] [ B ]

[Gold] [ " ]

[Gold] [ A ]

Press the Keys

[Black] [ Y ]

[Black] [ B ]

[Black] [ " ]

[Black] [ A ]

Press the Keys

| Í

Î |

Press the Keys

[Black] [1]

[Gold] [ Í ]

[Black] [SP]

[ Í ]

[Black] [ Í ]

[ENTER]

[Black] [RETURN]

[Black] [5]

[RETURN]

Î | (Forward tab)

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 49

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

11XX AID-Generating Keys

F21

F22

F23

F24

PA1

F17

F18

F19

F20

PA2

PA3

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F10

To Enter

Clear

Press the Keys

[Black] [1]

[Black] [A]

[Black] [B]

[Black] [C]

[Black] [D]

[Black] [E]

[Black] [F]

[Black] [G]

[Black] [H]

[Black] [I]

[Black] [J]

[Black] [K]

[Black] [L]

[Black] [M]

[Black] [N]

[Black] [O]

[Black] [P]

[Black] [Q]

[Black] [R]

[Black] [S]

[Black] [T]

[Black] [U]

[Black] [V]

[Black] [W]

[Black] [X]

[Gold] [1]

[Gold] [2]

No key available. Scan the bar code in Appendix

A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”.

11XX Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

50 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

700 Series Mobile Computer

For help with using the 700 Series Computer, refer to the 700 Series

Monochrome Mobile Computer User’s Manual (P/N 961-054-032) or the

700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual (P/N: 961-054-031).

700 Series Software Input Panels

With the Software Input Panels (SIPs), you can change the color of up to ten keys, given four color choices (including the original gray. To change the color of the keys (only up to 10 keys) :

1 Hold the LEFT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.

2 Hold the RIGHT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.

3 Select the letter that represents the color to which to switch.

4 Select from the three colors listed in the dialog box, or select the option to return all of the affected keys back to gray.

Main Keyboard

Shifted Keyboard

Function Keyboard Uppercase keys with numbers

Lowercase keys with shifted characters

The illustration above shows the Software Input Panels (SIPs) for the VT/ANSI application.

S Tap the Mn

G key off the Shifted keyboard to get to the TE 2000 Setup Menus.

S Tap the Shift

S key to toggle between the Main and Shifted keyboards.

S Tap the toggle key

} to toggle between the Function and Main keyboards.

S Tap the Cap _ key to use uppercase keys with numbers.

S Tap the Cap _ key, then the Shift

S key to use lowercase keys with shifted characters.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 51

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

700 Series Keypads

This illustration shows a 700 Series Monochrome Mobile Computer (left), a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer with a regular keyboard

(middle), and a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer with an alpha keyboard (right).

Note : The following key sequences are based on the SIP keyboards unless otherwise noted. Sequences provided are based on the assumption that you are starting with the Main Keyboard.

700 Series Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

700 Series Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

Tap the SIP Keys

} g

} k

} i

} m

Tap the SIP Keys

} h

} l

} j

} f

52 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

700 Series Standard Keys

Note : See the 700 Series Mobile Computer User’s Manual for information how to enter alpha characters using the 700 Series Computer keypads.

Keep in mind the Alpha key ( F or d ) and the Caps key ( 1 or g ) are toggle keys — these remain on until pressed again to turn them off.

d f e b c j i k g h n o p l m s r q t u v w x y z

700 Series Alphanumeric Characters

To Enter a

Press the Numeric Keys

F 2

F 2 2

F 2 2 2

F 3

F 3 3

F 3 3 3

F 4

F 4 4

F 4 4 4

F 5

F 5 5

F 5 5 5

F 6

F 6 6

F 6 6 6

F 7

F 7 7

F 7 7 7

F 7 7 7 7

F 8

F 8 8

F 8 8 8

F 9

F 9 9

F 9 9 9

F 9 9 9 9 d P d Q d R d S d T d U d V d W d X d Y d Z d H d I d J d K d L d M d N d O

Press the Alphanumeric Keys d A d B d C d D d E d F d G

[v]

[w]

[x]

[y]

[z]

[q]

[r]

[s]

[t]

[u]

[l]

[m]

[n]

[o]

[p]

[g]

[h]

[i]

[j]

[k]

Tap the SIP Keys

[a]

[b]

[c]

[d]

[e]

[f]

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 53

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

0 – 9

Symbols

To Enter

700 Series Alphanumeric Characters (continued)

Press the Numeric Keys

F 1 2

F 1 2 2

F 1 2 2 2

F 1 3

F 1 3 3

F 1 3 3 3

F 1 4

F 1 4 4

F 1 4 4 4

F 1 5

F 1 5 5

F 1 5 5 5

F 1 6

F 1 6 6

F 1 6 6 6

F 1 7

F 1 7 7 d g P d g Q

F 1 7 7 7 d g R

F 1 7 7 7 7 d g S

F 1 8

F 1 8 8

F 1 8 8 8

F 1 9 d g T d g U d g V d g W

F 1 9 9

F 1 9 9 9 d g X d g Y

F 1 9 9 9 9 d g Z

0 – 9 Z – Y

Press the Alphanumeric Keys d g A d g B d g C d g D d g E d g F d g G d g H d g I d g J d g K d g L d g M d g N d g O

Symbol key, or S plus corresponding key.

S [M]

S [N]

S [O]

S [P]

S [Q]

S [R]

S [S]

S [T]

S [U]

S [V]

S [W]

S [X]

S [Y]

S [Z]

Tap the SIP Keys

S [A]

S [B]

S [C]

S [D]

S [E]

S [F]

S [G]

S [H]

S [I]

S [J]

S [K]

S [L]

[0] – [9]

54 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

700 Series Function Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

Lock

Return

Shift

Space bar

Clear

PA1

PA2

PA3

700 Series Editing Keys

Tap the SIP Keys

S {

} £

} #

} $

} %

To Enter

E-Inp

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

Tap the SIP Keys

} &

} |

} ~

} (

} )

Note: Pressing E on the 700 Series Numeric Keypad or pressing E on the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad also performs the Reset function.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 55

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

700 Series Auxiliary Keys

To Enter

- (hyphen)

, (comma)

. (period)

_ (underscore)

Enter

Tap the SIP Keys

[–]

[,]

[.]

S [–]

Note: For the F11–F24 keys, press either the uppercase sequence or the lowercase sequence (separated by the “or” conjunction), but not both.

Keep in mind the Alpha key ( F or d ) and the Caps key ( 1 or g ) are toggle keys — these remain on until pressed again to turn them off.

Enter Press the Numeric Keys

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

Press the

Alphanumeric Keys aM aN aO aS aT aU

A0 aW aX aY aZ

AF12 or AF2

AF122 or AF22 adgA or adA adgB or adB

AF1222 or AF222 adgC or adC

AF13 or AF3 adgD or adD

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

AF133 or AF33 adgE or adE

AF1333 or AF333 adgF or adF

AF14 or AF4 adgG or adG

AF144 or AF44 adgH or adH

AF1444 or AF444 adgI or adI

AF15 or AF5 adgJ or adJ

AF155 or AF55 adgK or adK

AF1555 or AF555 adgL or adL

AF16 or AF6

AF166 or AF66 adgM or adM adgN or adN

} [

} \

} ]

} ¨

} ©

} ª

} «

} u

} v

} w

} x

} y

} z

} V

} W

} X

} Y

} Z

Tap the

SIP Keys

} o

} p

} q

} r

} s

} t

56 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

700 Series Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, tap the SIP } @ keys or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 57

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK30 Handheld Computer

Your CK30 Handheld Computer has a 52-key, a 50-key, or a 42-key keyboard.

52-Key Keyboard 50-Key Keyboard

Green

Orange Green

Orange

This illustration shows the CK30 52-Key Keyboard on the left and the 50-key keyboard on the right.

58 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

For help with using the CK30, refer to the CK30 Handheld Computer

User’s Manual (P/N 073528).

Orange

Green

This illustration shows the CK30 42-Key Keyboard.

Characters on the Keyboards

The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:

[Green] Press C plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in green on the overlay.

[Orange] Press B plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in orange on the overlay.

CK30 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

52-Key Keyboard

[Func] Y

[Func] B

Press the Keys

50-Key Keyboard

42-Key Keyboard

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 59

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK30 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

CK30 Standard Keys

52-Key Keyboard

C [W]

C [Y]

C [V]

C [U]

Press the Keys

50-Key Keyboard

C [Q]

C [V]

C [W]

C [U]

42-Key Keyboard

C Y

C B

C "

C A

To Enter

0–9

Symbols

CK30 Function Keys

52-Key Keyboard

[0] – [9]

[Shift] plus corresponding key

Press the Keys

50-Key Keyboard

[0] – [9]

[Shift] plus corresponding key

42-Key Keyboard

[0] – [9]

[Shift] plus corresponding key

To Enter

Backspace

Caps Lock

Ctrl

Forward Tab

Return

Shift

Space bar

CK30 3278 SNA Keys

52-Key Keyboard

B [A]

C [Alt]

[Tab]

[Enter]

B [Alt]

B A

Press the Keys

50-Key Keyboard

[Bksp]

[Func] [Shift]

[Ctl]

[Tab]

[Enter]

[Shift]

[Func] [Bksp]

42-Key Keyboard

B [Shift]

[Ctl]

[Tab]

[Enter]

[Shift]

[Sp]

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

52-Key Keyboard

C [B]

C A

[Enter]

C [3]

C [8]

B , C

C [9]

C [0]

Press the Keys

50-Key Keyboard

C [K]

[Func] C

[Enter]

C [0]

C [H]

[Func] [Ctl]

[Func] [Enter]

C [R]

42-Key Keyboard

C [F8]

C A

[Enter]

C [3]

C [8]

B , C

C [9]

C [0]

60 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK30 AID-Generating Keys

F23

F24

Clear

PA1

PA2

PA3

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F14

F15

F16

F17

F10

F11

F12

F13

To Enter

52-Key Keyboard

[F1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

B [F1]

B [F2]

B [F3]

B [F4]

B [E]

B [F]

B [G]

B [H]

B [I]

B [J]

B [K]

B [L]

B [M]

B [N]

B [O]

B [P]

B [Q]

B [R]

B [S]

B [T]

C [C]

C [F1]

C [F2]

C [F3]

Press the Keys

50-Key Keyboard

[Func] [1]

[Func] [2]

[Func] [3]

[Func] [4]

C Y

C B

C "

C [C]

C [X]

C [Y]

C [E]

[Func] [5]

[Func] [6]

[Func] [7]

[Func] [8]

[Func] [9]

[Func] [0]

C [1]

C [2]

C [3]

C [4]

C [5]

C [6]

C [7]

C [8]

C [9]

C [0]

C A

Not applicable

C [F6]

C [F1]

C [F2]

C [F3]

42-Key Keyboard

[F1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

[F5]

[F6]

[F7]

[F8]

[F9]

[F10]

[F11]

[F12]

Not applicable

CK30 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press keyboards, press

C [F4] on the 52-key and 42-key

C [Enter] on the 50-key keyboard, or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 61

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK30 3270 Additional Functions

To access the TE configuration menus, press [Alt] [M] on the 52-key keyboard, press C [Ctl] [M] on the 50-key keyboard, or press [Alt] B [F3] on the 42-key keyboard.

62 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK31 Handheld Computer

Your CK30 Handheld Computer has a 52-key keyboard. For help with using the CK31, refer to the CK31 Handheld Computer User’s Manual

(P/N .

Orange Green

This illustration shows the CK31 52-Key Keyboard.

Characters on the Keyboards

The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:

[Green] Press C plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in green on the overlay.

[Orange] Press B plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in orange on the overlay.

CK31 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

Press the Keys

[Func] Y

[Func] B

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 63

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK31 Paging Keys

CK31 Standard Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

To Enter

0–9

Symbols

CK31 Function Keys

To Enter

Backspace

Caps Lock

Ctrl

Forward Tab

Return

Shift

Space bar

CK31 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

Press the Keys

C [W]

C [Y]

C [V]

C [U]

Press the Keys

[0] – [9]

[Shift] plus corresponding key

Press the Keys

B [A]

C [Alt]

[Tab]

[Enter]

B [Alt]

B A

Press the Keys

C [B]

C A

[Enter]

C [3]

C [8]

B , C

C [9]

C [0]

64 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK30 AID-Generating Keys

To Enter

F21

F22

F23

F24

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

Clear

PA1

PA2

PA3

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

Press the Keys

[F1]

[F2]

[F3]

[F4]

B [F1]

B [F2]

B [F3]

B [F4]

B [E]

B [F]

B [G]

B [H]

B [I]

B [J]

B [K]

B [L]

B [M]

B [N]

B [O]

B [P]

B [Q]

B [R]

B [S]

B [T]

C [C]

C [F1]

C [F2]

C [F3]

CK31 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press C [F4] on the 52-key keyboard or scan the following bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 65

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CK31 3270 Additional Functions

To access the TE 2000 configuration menus, press [Alt] [M] on the

52-key keyboard.

66 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer

For help with using the CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer, refer to the

CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer User’s Guide (P/N 961-054-033).

Characters on the Keyboards

The special characters and functions printed above the keys are colorcoded to correspond with the matching shift keys. The shift keys are:

[Blue] Press [Blue] plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in blue on the overlay.

[Gold] Press [Gold] plus a key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

CV60 Software Input Panels

Software Input Panels (SIPs) are based on the 700 Series SIPs (page 51), with additional features. You can change the color of up to ten keys, given four color choices (including the original gray. To change the color of the keys (only up to 10 keys) :

1 Hold the LEFT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.

2 Hold the RIGHT Shift key down until it reverses back to normal.

3 Select the letter that represents the color to which to switch.

4 Select from the three colors listed in the dialog box, or select the option to return all of the affected keys back to gray.

You can change the size of the SIP to one-times, two-times or three-times the length and width of the original size. Thus, each SIP can be 240x80,

480x160, or 720x240 pixels (wide by tall). To change the size of the keys::

1 Hold the Left Shift Key down until it reverses back to normal.

2 Press and hold the “-” key until the Size Selection dialog appears.

3 Of the three options, select the sized keyboard of your choice.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 67

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

Main Keyboard

Shifted Keyboard

Function Keyboard

Uppercase keys with numbers

Lowercase keys with shifted characters

The illustration above shows the Software Input Panels (SIPs) for the VT/ANSI application.

S Tap the Mn G key off the Shifted keyboard to get to the TE 2000 Setup Menus.

S Tap the Shift

S key to toggle between the Main and Shifted keyboards.

S Tap the toggle key

} to toggle between the Function and Main keyboards.

S Tap the Cap _ key to use uppercase keys with numbers.

S Tap the Cap _ key, then the Shift

S key to use lowercase keys with shifted characters.

68 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CV60 Keyboard

Note: You must use the 3270 keyboard (P/N: 850-551-005) with the TE applications.

Blue Gold

Gold Blue

This illustration shows the keyboard for the CV60 Vehicle Mount Computer.

CV60 Cursor Keys

To Enter

Window/viewport up

Window/viewport down

Window/viewport right

Window/viewport left

Press the Alphanumeric Keys

↑

↓

→

←

CV60 Paging Keys

To Enter

Page up

Page down

Page right

Page left

Press the Alphanumeric Keys

[Blue] ↑

[Blue]

↓

→

←

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Tap the SIP Keys

} g

} k

} i

} m

Tap the SIP Keys

} h

} l

} j

} f

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CV60 Tab Keys

To Enter

Back Tab

Forward Tab

CV60 3278 SNA Keys

To Enter

Clr (E-Inp)

Del

Enter

EOF

Home

Insert

New Line (Return)

Reset

Press the Alphanumeric Keys

→

[Shift] →

Press the Alphanumeric Keys

[Blue] [C]

[Del]

[Enter]

[Blue] [E]

[Home]

[Ins]

[Return]

→

Tap the SIP Keys

S {

Tap the SIP Keys

} &

} |

} ~

} (

} )

70 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

CV60 AID-Generating Keys

F19

F20

F21

F22

F15

F16

F17

F18

F23

F24

PA1

PA2

PA3

F11

F12

F13

F14

F10

To Enter

Clear

[Blue] [F5]

[Blue] [F6]

[Blue] [F7]

[Blue] [F8]

[Blue] [F9]

[Blue] [F10]

[Yellow] [F1]

[Yellow] [F2]

[Yellow] [F3]

[Yellow] [F4]

[Yellow] [1]

[Yellow] [2]

[Yellow] [3]

[F3]

[F4]

[F5]

[F6]

Press the Alphanumeric Keys

[Yellow] [C]

[F1]

[F2]

[F7]

[F8]

[F9]

[F10]

[Blue] [F1]

[Blue] [F2]

[Blue] [F3]

[Blue] [F4]

} Y

} Z

} [

} \

} ]

} ¨

} ©

} ª

} «

} #

} $

} %

} t

} u

} v

} w

} x

} y

} z

} V

} W

} X

Tap the SIP Keys

} £

} o

} p

} q

} r

} s

CV60 Auto-Login Restart

To enter Auto-Login Restart, press [Blue] [Menu] , tap the SIP } @ keys, or scan this bar code (also in Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ”).

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 71

Chapter 3 — Using the Terminal’s Keyboard

72 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Using the Terminal Emulation

Menus

This chapter lists all TE 2000 parameters. If a certain parameter does not apply to your terminal, the parameter will not appear in the TE 2000 configuration menus.

The CFGLIT.DAT file specifies the text of the TE 2000 configuration menus. This chapter assumes you are using the default settings in

CFGLIT.DAT. To customize CFGLIT.DAT, see Chapter 5, “ Customizing Your Configuration .”

Note: For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals with firmware versions 8.00 or greater, if a CONFIG.DAT file is present on your terminal, its settings are backed up in a CONFIG.OLD file, then written into a TE_SETTINGS.INI file. If the CONFIG.DAT file is not on your terminal, all settings are written to the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 73

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Function Keys

These paragraphs describe how to navigate through the TE 2000 configuration menus.

Enter Key

Press the terminal [Enter] key to return to a previous TE configuration menu. Press [Enter] several times to return to the Main Menu from a submenu. This key also accepts the displayed or keyed input.

Terminals

2415, 2425, 2455, 2475, 248X

2435A

6400

5020

5055

59XX

17XX, 11XX

700 Series

Related [Enter] Keys

[ or \ keys v key (57-key keyboard) e key (48-key keyboard) v key (39-key function numeric keyboard)

[ENT] keys b or e keys

<Enter> via external keyboard

[ENTER] key

[ENTER] keys e key

Shift Keys

Use shift keys to put the keyboard in the desired shift mode. These shifted key functions are shown on the keyboard overlays in Chapter 3, “ Using the

Terminal’s Keyboard .”

S For 6400, 5055

[Yellow] and [Blue] shift keys are required. For the 5055 PC, the

Yellow shift key substitutes the <Alt> key and the Blue shift key substitutes the <Ctrl> key on the external keyboard.

S For 17XX, 11XX

[Gold] and [Black] shift keys are required.

Y (“Yes”) Key

Several displays provide a warning that a certain action can cause your terminal to lose data stored in memory. Press the Y (“yes”) key to proceed as instructed. Press another key to exit the menu without executing your original choice.

74 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Up and Down Arrows

For 6400, 5055, 11XX , the up and down arrow keys are defined by the host computer.

For 59XX , the up and down arrow keys can be made to function more efficiently, in many cases, by pressing the FUNC or ALT key, then pressing the desired arrow key.

Use these keys to:

S Adjust the length and frequency of the audible buzzer, key click, and error tone.

S Set the display screen size (the number of rows displayed and characters per row) and contrast.

Number Keys [0] through [9]

Many menus have numbered options. Press the corresponding numeric key to make a selection.

Note: For the 700 Series, CK31, and CV60 Terminals, you may tap an option to make a selection.

Once you make a selection and you remain at that menu screen, the option is highlighted, but you can select additional options. To deselect an enabled option, press the number corresponding to that option.

Pressing a number may bring up a submenu. Use the submenu to further modify the choice you made in the parent menu. After the modifications, you may return to the parent menu to make additional selections. (This depends on the menu and function.) Also, you may press a numeric key to exit a menu or cold start the terminal. These situations are covered later in this chapter.

Various menus require entering a number, but do not necessarily have simple choices such as 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. Instead, you may have to enter a number from a range of numbers, such as 0–32.

These instances are detailed in the text that applies to those menus, or in the menu displays.

Note : There are situations where pressing [6] causes the terminal to exit from a submenu or to reboot.

Display Annunciators

For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX , annunciators show the current status or operation in progress. Some of the common annunciators are as follows:

Note : The following symbols appear larger than actual size on your terminal display. All individual letter annunciators are five pixels in height, except T (temperature) and B (bad battery) which are seven pixels.

Display Position 0

Radio (6400, 5055)

The radio is transmitting data to the base station.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 75

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Display Position 1

If the radio icon is displayed in position 0, then position 1 shows the radio transmission status (either receiving, sending, communication loss, or message waiting). If there is no radio icon shown in position 0, then this position is blank and position 1 shows the active session number 1 or 2.

Message

A message is received and has not been read.

Specific for 6400, 5055, 59XX Terminals

Sending

Radio is sending data to the base station.

Receiving

Radio is receiving data from the base station. This annunciator appears only when the information is for this particular computer’s address.

Communication Loss

No communication with the host computer has occurred for at least 60 seconds. The radio computer may be out of radio range, the base station may not have power, or communications from the host computer to the base station may not be properly set up.

Specific for 17XX, 11XX Terminals

Transmitting data

The terminal is transmitting data to the host computer.

Receiving data

The terminal is receiving data.

Communication Loss

The terminal cannot communicate with the host computer. The terminal may be out of radio range, the base radio may not have power, or communication from the host to the base may not be properly set up.

Display Position 2

Input Inhibited

The keyboard has accepted enough information for the current input field.

If the “key ahead” feature is on, the terminal stores the keystrokes made after “input inhibited” appears. The host may also inhibit (lockout) the keyboard upon certain errors or when sending additional information to your computer.

Insert Mode

Characters are inserted, not overwritten.

Display Position 3

Alphabet Character Shift Mode (59XX, 17XX, 11XX,

Green for 6400, 5055)

The keyboard is in the alphabet character shift mode — any alphabet character keystrokes are entered as uppercase characters.

Shift Mode (Blue for 6400, 5055; Black for 11XX, 17XX; varies for 59XX)

The keyboard is in a colored shift mode — keystrokes enter the symbol or perform the function shown on the overlay to the upper left of the key.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

A c

" Shift Mode (Yellow or Gold for 6400, 5055, 11XX, 17XX; varies for 59XX)

The keyboard is in a colored shift mode — keystrokes enter the symbol or perform the function shown on the overlay to the upper right of the key.

Display Position 4

Alpha Lock (6400)

This symbol is used only for the 6400 Computer 41-key keyboard model.

Battery is charging (17XX, 11XX)

The terminal is connected to a charging source. This does not necessarily mean the terminal is charging since this is dependent on battery state, temperature, and other conditions.

Display Position 5

Error (17XX)

The terminal is connected to a charging source, but charging is not possible.

Display Position 6

Bad Battery (17XX)

The battery pack you are currently using is bad.

Temperature (17XX)

The terminal is currently out of the battery charging temperature range, which is 5 ° to 40 ° C.

Display Positions 1 through 3

Laser scanner in use (17XX, 11XX)

Observe caution labels on laser scanners.

Display Positions 4 and 5

Caps Lock (5055)

If [Caps Lock] is pressed (activated) on the 5055 external keyboard, the terminal types all capital letters regardless of how the text is entered.

Num Lock (5055)

If [Num Lock] is activated on the 5055 external keyboard, the terminal enters numbers as pressed via the right-hand pad on the keyboard.

Display Positions 4 through 6

Low battery condition (17XX, 11XX)

A Low Battery indication is very important to the operation of the terminal, letting you know that your terminal will stop operating shortly. Your terminal should continue to operate 30 minutes to 2 hours depending on how you use it. Data stored in RAM will be saved for approximately 30 days. However, you should avoid testing this limit.

Your terminal will retain its RAM data storage for up to 5 minutes with the battery pack removed. It is always a good idea to replace the battery pack with a fresh recharged pack immediately after removing the discharged pack. Without battery power your terminal will not operate, and your display will be blank.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 77

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

XX/YY

Display Positions 4 through 8

Current Row/Column Position (59XX)

Shows the current location of the cursor, with “XX” as the row position and “YY” as the column position. For example, if the cursor is at row 5, column 12, the annunciators will show “05/12” in positions 4–8.

Display Positions 5 through 8

Battery Pack Gas Gauge Icons (6400)

These battery icons represent the charge level in your main battery pack.

Four icons (positions 5–8) indicates more than 76% charge level

Three icons (positions 5, 6, and 7) indicates between 51–75%

Two icons (positions 5 and 6) indicates between 26–50%

One icon (position 5) indicates between 21–25%

When the terminal gets below 20%, the icons are replaced by Ls and after the charge level is less than 10% your terminal emits a series of beeps.

Four Ls indicates 16–20% charge level

Three Ls indicates 11–15%. At the 15% charge level, your terminal beeps once. The sound duration and frequency are at levels you have set for your terminal.

Two Ls indicates 6–10%. At the 10% and 7% charge levels, your terminal beeps once.

The sound duration and frequency are at levels you have set for your terminal.

One L indicates 0–5%. At this charge level, your terminal beeps three times at its current setting level for both duration and frequency.

Note : If you have the beeper turned off , you will not hear any of the low battery beep warnings.

The battery pack icons on your terminal display reflect the same status as the LEDs on the battery pack. However, there may be a one minute delay for updating the icons on the display when the battery pack is replaced.

78 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Configuration Menus

(700 Series, CK31, CV60)

When a user taps the Menu Settings button (”M” circled in this illustration) on the toolbar, the following menu appears:

S Select Menu Settings to configure the contents of this menu. Enter a password, the default being cr52401.

See page 139 for more information.

S Select TE2000 Menus to access the TE2000 Main Menu. Information about this is described later in this chapter.

S Select SIP Settings to select which Software Input Panel (SIP) you want to use with the TE 2000 application:

S Select Session Menu to change the current session: See page 157 for information.

S Select Toolbar Options to configure the options that appear in the toolbar on the terminal. See page 140 for more information.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 79

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S Select Scanner Test to scan bar codes and view the bar code read and its length. The first character of the bar code is the bar code type character.

Select ok or press Enter to exit this test.

S Select Keyboard Test to view the hex value of the pressed key and the actual key value. Press Enter to exit this test.

S Select any of the Session 1 through Session 4 to go to that session.

S Select SIP Toggle to enable or disable the SIP keyboard.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Configuring TE Parameters

This chapter contains the TE configuration menus for the following terminals: 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 unless otherwise noted. Additional information is available for each of the following:

S Trakker Antares (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X) page 160

S 6400 Computer page 160

S 5055 Data Collection PC page 161

Note : Screens are shown with all of the available options.

S If an option is not assigned to a specific terminal, then that option is available for all of the terminals addressed in this publication.

S If an option is specific towards a terminal, this option does not appear on the display, or will be blank, for all other terminals.

Key Sequence to Open Main Menu

To configure TE parameters on your respective terminal, at the initialization screens or anywhere in a TE session, access the Main Menu by pressing the following key sequence:

Terminal

2415

2425

2435A

2455, 2475, 248X

6400

5020

5055

59XX

17XX, 11XX

700

CK30

CK31

CV60

Key Sequence

) !

(55-key keyboard)

( 5 (37-key keyboard)

( !

r l (57-key keyboard)

Green > , Orange > (48-key keyboard) r l (39-key function numeric keyboard)

( ¡

[Gold] [Blue]

C A

[Blue] [M] or [ALT] [M]

[Brown] [Black]

[Gold] [Black]

Tap twice on the upper-right corner of the display; or via the Software Input Panel (SIP) keyboard, tap S G .

[Alt] [M] (52-key keyboard)

C [Ctl] [M] (50-key keyboard)

[Alt] B [F3] (42-key keyboard)

Tap twice on the upper-right corner of the display; or via the external keyboard, press [Alt] [M].

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 81

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Note : You can also scan this bar code label to access the Main Menu.

TE configuration menus

*/ETECFG*

*%TECFG*

Opening the Main Menu

The Main Menu is the first screen displayed when you open the computer menus. All other menus are accessed from the Main Menu. At the initialization screens or anywhere in a TE session, press the appropriate keys to access the Main Menu (defined within each terminal’s specific information) .

After the Main Menu appears, enter a number (1–7) to make a selection.

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Menus

The following menus pertain to the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and

248X Terminals.

To return to the Main Menu, press the [Enter] key several times, then select 6) Exit Menus , to return to the operating system.

Main Menu

1) Set-up Parms

2) LCD Parms

3) Beeper Setup

4) Tests

5) Version Info

6) Exit Menus

7) More

5) Radio Comm is blank for 2415,

2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X terminals without either an 802.1x

supplicant radio driver or UDP

Plus.

Set-up Parms

1) Communication

2) Barcode Parms

3) Protocol Opts

4) Display Opts

5) Radio Comm

6) Cold Start

7) More

Beeper Setup

2) Error Tone

3) Beeper Select

[1] [2]

LCD Parms

2) Screen Size

3) Screen Mode

4) Annunciators

6) Key Uppercase

7) Scroll Window

[3] [4]

Tests

1) Peripherals

5) Numbers

6) Timed Numbers

<TE Program Name>

Version

Date

Version Info

Firmware

<number>

<ddmmyy>

[5] [7]

Main Menu 2

1) Keyboard Opts

2) Save Parms

82 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

1) Set-up Parms

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)

This is password-protected to prevent unauthorized users from changing parameters. You can customize the parameter’s CONFIG.DAT setup file to change the password. See Chapter 5, “ Customizing Your Configuration.

”

Changed parameters apply to the current session. If more than one session is available, use the 7) More > 2) Save Parms > 4) Session Menu to verify or change the current session before going to the next session. To open the

1) Set-up Parms menu, press [1] , [Enter] , then type “cr52401” at the prompt to access the following menus.

1) ITC Server is for

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,

248X with TE/UDP Plus

2) RTC/WTP is for 2415, 2425,

2435A, 2455, 2475,

248X with RTC

3) Direct Connect is for 2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X with

TE/IP

Controller Type

1) ITC Server

2) RTC/WTP

3) Direct Connect

Set-up Parms

1) Communication

2) Barcode Parms

3) Protocol Opts

4) Display Opts

5) Radio Comm

6) Cold Start

7) More

[1] [2]

5) Radio Comm is blank for 2415,

2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X terminals without either an 802.1x supplicant radio driver or UDP Plus.

Barcode Parms

1) Code 39 Encoded

3) Concatenate

4) RS232 Stream

5) Stream Scan

6) Scan All Flds

7) Native if UDP Plus or

TCP/IP is blank

Protocol Opts

1) Host View Sze

2) Data Stream

3) Extended Cmds

4) 5250

5) 3270

6) VT220

7) Native

[3] [4]

Display Opts

1) Backlight

2) Cursor Mode

3) Security ID is for Proxim radios

Protocol

1) SST

2) SST-Diag Mode

3) Security ID

[5] [6]

Cold Start

Enter “Y”

To Cold Start terminal:

3) COM Select is for

248X

Set-up Parms

1) Menu Password

3) COM Select

[7]

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 83

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Menus

The following menus pertain to the 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, and 11XX

Terminals.

To return to the Main Menu, press the [Enter] key several times, then select 6) Exit Menus , to return to the operating system.

Main Menu

1) Set-up Parms

2) LCD Parms

3) Beeper Setup

4) Tests

5) Version Info

6) Exit Menus

7) More

3) Beeper Select is for 6400, 5055,

17XX, 11XX

Set-up Parms

1) Communication

2) Barcode Parms

3) Protocol Opts

4) Display Opts

5) Radio Comm

6) Cold Start

7) More

Beeper Setup

1) Key Click

2) Error Tone

3) Beeper Select

[1] [2]

LCD Parms

1) LCD Contrast

2) Screen Size

3) Screen Mode

4) Annunciators

5) Backlight

6) Key Uppercase

7) Scroll Window

[3] [4]

Tests

1) Peripherals

2) Converters

3) Memory View

4) Packet Driver

5) Numbers

6) Timed Numbers

1) LCD Contrast and

5) Backlight is for 59XX, 17XX

4) Annunciators is blank for

17XX, 11XX

2) Converters is for 59XX

MLID Name and MLID ver are for 6400,

5055

<TE Program Name>

Version

Date

Version Info

Firmware

MLID Name

MLID ver

(mac address)

<number>

<ddmmyy>

ZZZZZZ xx.xx

[5] [7]

Main Menu 2

1) Keyboard Opts

2) Save Parms

3) Cloning Opts

4) Session Menu

3) Cloning Opts is for 59XX, 17XX,

11XX

84 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

1) Set-up Parms

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

”

1) Set-up Parms menu, press [1] , [Enter] , then type “cr52401” at the prompt to access the following menus.

Set-up Parms

1) Communication

2) Barcode Parms

3) Protocol Opts

4) Display Opts

5) Radio Comm

6) Cold Start

7) More

2) RTC/WTP is for 6400, 5055,

59XX, 11XX, 17XX with RTC

3) Direct Connect is for 6400, 5055 with

TE/IP

Controller Type

2) RTC/WTP

3) Direct Connect

7) Native

1) Backlight is for 6400, 17XX,

11XX

3) Remote Disp is for 17XX is blank if UDP Plus or

TCP/IP

Protocol Opts

1) Host View Sze

2) Data Stream

3) Extended Cmds

4) 5250

5) 3270

6) VT220

7) Native

Display Opts

1) Backlight

2) Cursor Mode

3) Remote Disp

[1] [2]

Scanner Type

1) No Scanner

2) Wand

3) Laser

4) Wand Emulate

5) Auto Detect

[3] [2]

Scan Options

1) Redundancy

2) MOD 10 Check

3) Concatenate

4) BC Type Char

5) Stream Scan

6) Scan All Flds

7) More

[4] [5]

Protocol

1) SST

2) SST-Diag Mode

3) Security ID

2) Wand ,

4) Wand Emulate ,

5) Auto Detect are for 59XX, 17XX,

11XX

1) Redundancy is for 6400, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX

3) Concatenate is for 6400, 5055

4) BC Type Char is for 6400, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX

3) Security ID is for Proxim radios

Cold Start

Enter “Y”

To Cold Start terminal:

[6] [7]

Set-up Parms

1) Menu Password

2) Print Device

3) COM Select

2) Print Device is for 6400

3) COM Select is for

5055

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 85

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Menus

The following menus pertain to the 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and

CV60 Terminals.

To return to the Main Menu, press the [Enter] key several times, then select 6) Exit Menus , to return to the operating system.

6) Cold Start is for

5020

6) Exit TE2000 is for 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

Set-up Parms

1) Communication

2) Barcode Parms

3) Protocol Opts

4) Display Opts

6) Cold Start

6) Exit TE2000

7) More

Beeper Setup

1) Key Click

2) Error Tone

3) Beeper Select

Main Menu

1) Set-up Parms

2) LCD Parms

3) Beeper Setup

4) Tests

5) Version Info

6) Exit Menus

7) More

3) Beeper Setup

[1] [2]

LCD Parms

2) Screen Size

3) Screen Mode

4) Annunciators

6) Key Uppercase

7) Scroll Window

7) More is for CK30, CK31

7) Scroll Window for 5020

7) More is for

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 is

[3] [4]

Tests

1) Peripherals

<TE Program Name>

Version

Date

Version Info

Firmware

<number>

<ddmmyy>

[5] [7]

Main Menu 2

1) Keyboard Opts

2) Save Parms

4) Session Menu

1) Set-up Parms

(5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

This is password-protected to prevent unauthorized users from changing parameters.

For 5020 Terminals and 700 Series, CK30, CV60 Terminals with TE 2000 application versions older than 8.00

, you can customize the parameter in the CONFIG.DAT setup file to change the password.

For

700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals with TE 2000 application version 8.00 or greater , you can customize the parameter in the

TE_SETTINGS.INI setup file. See Chapter 5, “ Customizing Your

Configuration.

”

1) Set-up Parms menu, press [1] , [Enter] , then type CR52401 at the prompt to access the menus on the next page.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Set-up Parms

1) Communication

2) Barcode Parms

3) Protocol Opts

4) Display Opts

6) Cold Start

6) Exit TE2000

7) More

For 5020

6) Cold Start is for 5020.

6) Exit TE2000 is for 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60.

1) ITC Server is for

5020, 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 with TE/UDP

Plus

3) Direct Connect is for 5020, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60 with

TE/IP

Controller Type

1) ITC Server

3) Direct Connect

[1] [2]

Barcode Parms

1) Code 39 Encoded

3) Concatenate

5) Stream Scan

6) Scan All Flds

For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

1) Backlight is for

700 Series

6) Font Quality is for CK30, CK31

Protocol Opts

1) Host View Sze

2) Data Stream

3) Extended Cmds

4) 5250

5) 3270

6) VT220

[3] [2]

Scan Options

2) MOD 10 Check

3) Concatenate

4) BC Type Char

5) Stream Scan

6) Scan All Flds

7) More

For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

Display Opts

1) Backlight

2) Cursor Mode

3) Select Font

5) Display Colors

6) Font Quality

7) More

[4] [4]

For 5020

Display Opts

2) Cursor Mode

For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

[6] [6]

Exit TE2000

Enter “Y”

To Exit TE2000:

For 5020

Cold Start

Enter “Y”

To Cold Start terminal:

Set-up Parms

1) Menu Password

2) Print Device

[7]

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 87

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

1) Set-up Parameters

The following setup parameter information pertains to all terminals unless otherwise noted.

1) Communication

The communication option for the terminals are broken down as follows:

S 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 with UDP Plus

1) ITC Server via the next paragraph.

S 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with RTC

2) RTC/WTP on page 90.

S 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX with RTC

2) RTC/WTP on page 92.

S 6400, 5055 Terminals with TCP/IP

3) Direct Connect on page 94.

S 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020 with TCP/IP, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

3) Direct Connect on page 96.

1) ITC Server

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020 with TE/UDP Plus,

CK30, CK31, CV60)

ITC (Intermec Technologies Corporation) Server options are as follows.

To set the options, select 1) ITC Server , 2) Host/Srvr , then the Server

Setup option (Server A, B, or C).

Controller Type

1) ITC Server

[1]

ITC Server

2) Host/Srvr

[2]

Server Setup

1) Server A

2) Server B

3) Server C

Server <A, B, or C>

Server IP

<IP address>

Host Setup<A, B, or C>

1) Host Name

2) Upline Prot

3) Port Number

4) Emulation

88 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Server IP <A, B, or C>

The Server <A> IP address is read from either the CONFIG.DAT or

TE_SETTINGS.INI file (if one is saved) or the terminal firmware. When an IP address is entered, it is written to the terminal’s firmware for the next boot.

If you are using the Server <B> or Server <C> option as a fallback Intermec

Application Server, enter the server’s IP address or DNS name. The boot sequence continues to try Server <A>, <B>, then <C> in order by filling the firmware controller slot with the IP values entered for each server.

Host Setup <A, B, or C>

Menu options are as follows:

Host Setup <A, B, or C>

1) Host Name

2) Upline Prot

3) Port Number

4) Emulation

Host <A, B, or C>

<3270, 5250, or VT/ANSI>

Host Name

<host name>

[1] [2]

Upline Prot<A, B, or C>

1)Telnet

2)SNA

Port Number<A, B, or C>

<port number>

[3 ] [4]

Emulation<A, B, or C>

2) 3270

3) 5250

4) VT/ANSI

S 1) Host Name

The host name can be 64 or fewer characters in length. Enter spaces or punctuation where needed.

Note that the TE 2000 application performs an auto-enter when the 64th character is entered.

It is case-sensitive and must match a host name in the list of available hosts defined on the Intermec Application Server, or remain blank. The name can also be the

IP address of the host to which you want to connect. Enter the IP address as four decimal numbers separated by periods.

If a terminal was linked with a host name on the Intermec Application

Server, or a default host was configured on this Intermec Application

Server, you do not need to enter a host name on this screen.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 89

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

The terminal displays a list of available hosts if the following conditions are met. The user can then select the host from the list.

S The Intermec Application Server contains multiple hosts.

S The terminal is not linked with a host name on the Intermec Application Server.

S The host name is blank.

S 2) Upline Prot(ocol)

When enabled, upline protocol options do the following:

S Telnet (Default)

Forces the Intermec Application Server to create a Telnet connection to the host.

S SNA

Forces the Intermec Application Server to create an SNA connection to the host.

S 3) Port Number

This option overrides the port number set for the upline if you have entered a host name and selected Telnet as your upline protocol.

Default port number is 23.

The maximum port number is 65535.

S 4) Emulation

Use this option to tell the terminal each host computer type.

Default is

VT/ANSI.

Note : You can also set the type through the 2) Data Stream option on the 3) Protocol Opts menu.

2) RTC/WTP

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)

Use 2) RTC/WTP to set, view, or change the terminal ID. This number allows the host computer to identify individual terminals in the radio data network. Each terminal must have a unique number in the same network.

Use the numeric keys on the terminal keyboard to modify its ID. Enter a number between 0–126, then press [Enter] to go to 2) Host/Cntl menus.

The 1) Radio Setup and 2) Host/Cntl menus are shown on the following pages. Pending on which option you are exercising you will either advance to the WTP Stack settings or the TCP/IP Stack settings.

1) Radio Setup is done in the firmware with the RTC stack.

90 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

WTP Stack Options

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Controller Type

2) RTC/WTP

[2]

Host/Cntl

2) Host/Cntl

DONE

ENTER

Host/Cntl

1) CNTL A

2) CNTL B

3) CNTL C

[2]

ENTER

Controller (x)

Enter Unit

Number xxx

ENTER

Controller (x)

(cust emulation) unit # xxx

Host Name

Enter up to 16 characters/Numbers for a name.

ENTER

Emulation (x)

Enter Unit

1) Native

2) 3270

3) 5250

4) VT/ANSI

ENTER

Telnet (x)

1) Enabled

2) Disabled

ENTER

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 91

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) RTC/WTP

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

The 1) Radio Setup and 2) Host/Cntl menus are shown on the following pages. Pending on which option you are exercising you will either advance to the WTP Stack settings or the TCP/IP Stack settings.

WTP Settings

Use the numeric keys on the terminal keyboard or 5055 external keyboard to modify its ID. Enter a number between 0–126, then press [Enter] to go to the 2) Host/Cntl menus.

The LAN ID number can be 0–255 depending on the radio being used.

With the RM60/70 radio, the number can be 0–255; with the RM80/90 radio, the range is 0–15. Your terminal only communicates with equipment using the same ID number that you assigned to your LAN.

If you enter a LAN ID number different from what is configured in the

NET.CFG file you get the following message. If this happens, the system modifies NET.CFG, which is used by WTPPKT.EXE on initializing the terminal.

LAN ID changed

Need to reboot to take effect.

92 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

WTP Stack Options

Controller Type

2) RTC/WTP

[2]

Host/Cntl

1) Radio Setup

2) Host/Cntl

[1] [2]

For 802.11 Radios Only

Radio Setup

Network Name xxxx

Enter up to 34 characters for a name

ENTER

For Non 802.11 Radios

Radio Setup

LAN xx

Radio Setup

Radio Config# Only if a “radio cfg“ file is present on the terminal.

Go to Host/Cntl on the next page

Set Mode/Channel is for RM60

(902 MHz) radios

Set Mode/Channel

Use Cursor Up and Down Keys

To Adjust

DS xxxx channel xx

ENTER (5055 -- continue to Host/Cntl setups)

Set Frequency

Use Cursor Up and Down Keys

To Adjust xxxxxxxxx

ENTER (continue to Host/Cntl setups)

Set Frequency is for

Synthesized UHF radios

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 93

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Host/Cntl Settings

ENTER

Host/Cntl

1) CNTL A

2) CNTL B

3) CNTL C

ENTER

DONE

ENTER

Controller (x)

Enter Unit

Number xxx

ENTER

Controller (x)

(cust emulation) unit # xxx

Host Name

Enter up to 64 characters/Numbers for a name.

ENTER

Emulation (x)

Enter Unit

1) Native

2) 3270

3) 5250

4) VT/ANSI

Telnet (x)

1) Enabled

2) Disabled

ENTER

3) Direct Connect

(6400, 5055)

The first option if exercising TCP/IP stack is 1) Radio Setup . Once selected, enter your network name or LAN ID.

If using a 902 MHz radio module, use the up and down arrows to pick the

Direct Sequence (DS) and Channel configuration. If using a Synthesized

UHF radio, select possible frequencies for your radio module from the list.

The 2) Host/Cntl option changes the host setting to designate up to three host computers for each 6400 Computer or 5055 PC. Each host is assigned a separate priority level (1, 2, or 3). When powered on, the 6400

Computer or 5055 PC seeks host A. If host A is not available, then the unit seeks host B; if host B is unavailable, the unit then logs onto host C.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

When designating additional hosts for the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC, you must:

S Tell the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC the host type of each host computer: (3270, 5250, or VT/ANSI).

S Tell the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC the name of each host.

Note : Selections in these menus apply only to the current session. Use 4)

Session Menu to verify or change the current session.

TCP/IP Stack Options

Direct

1) Radio Setup

2) Host Setup

[1] [2]

For 802.11 Radios Only

Radio Setup

Network Name xxxx

Enter up to 34 characters for a name

ENTER

For Non 802.11 Radios

Radio Setup

LAN xx

Radio Setup

Radio Config#

Only if a “radio cfg“ file is present on the terminal.

Host

1) Host A

2) Host B

3) Host C

ENTER

Host Name (x)

Host emulation

Host Name

Enter up to 64 character/numbers for a name

ENTER

Emulation (x)

2) 3270

3) 5250

4) VT/ANSI

Set Mode/Channel is for RM60

(902 MHz) radios

ENTER (5055 -- continue to Host/Cntl setups)

Set Mode/Channel

Use Cursor Up and Down Keys

To Adjust

DS xxxx channel xx

Set Frequency

Use Cursor Up and Down Keys

To Adjust xxxxxxxxx

Set Frequency radios is for

Synthesized UHF

ENTER (continue to Host/Cntl setups)

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 95

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

3) Direct Connect

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 with TE/IP)

To set these options, select 3) Direct Connect > 2) Host Setup > 1) Host

A . Use the Emulation (A) option to tell the terminal the type of each host computer.

Default is 3270.

Note : You can also set the emulation type through the 2) Data Stream option on the 3) Protocol Opts menu.

Controller Type

3) Direct Connect

[3]

Direct Connect

2) Host Setup

Host

1) Host A

2) Host B

3) Host C

[2]

2) Host B and

3) Host C are for

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

ENTER

Host Name (x)

Host emulation

Unit # xxx

Host Name

Enter up to 64 character/numbers for a name

ENTER

Port Number (x)

Unit # xxx is for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 and appears if RTC over TCP is enabled.

If you want to use a port other than 23, enter that port here. Range is 0–65535.

Note : If the Native protocol is selected,

RTC over TCP cannot be disabled.

These two boxes are for

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

ENTER

Emulation<A, B, or C>

1) Native

2) 3270

3) 5250

4) VT/ANSI

ENTER

Emulation<A, B, or C>

1) RTC over TCP

ENTER

Emulation<A, B, or C>

Enter Unit

Number: xxx

96 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Barcode Parms

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020)

The 2) Barcode Parms (parameters) menus designate whether you are using a bar code scanner and scan options.

Barcode Parms

1) Code 39 Encoded

3) Concatenate

4) RS232 Stream

5) Stream Scan

6) Scan All Flds

4) RS232 Stream is blank for 5020

1) Code 39 Encoded

By default, 1) Code39 Encoded is disabled. When you enable this option, the key press sequences for Encoded Code 39 are used. For more information, see Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning .”

3) Concatenate

Each bar code read is added to the end of the previous bar code read until the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, or 5020 Terminal meets a condition forcing transmission to the host.

When this option is OFF, each bar code read is placed at the beginning of the current input field. After a bar code is placed in a field, any subsequent read replaces the first read.

Note : If you access the TE configuration menus when 4) RS232 Stream is enabled, all RS-232 data received during this time is lost. Only the data arriving from the COM1 port on the hand-held terminal is received.

4) RS232 Stream

(blank for 5020)

If this option is enabled, the terminal watches the RS-232 port for activity in which the terminal reads in the RS-232 data and sends it to the host.

This enables support for fixed-station scanners or scales that send only

RS-232 data without having the host send an extended command to enable the RS-232 port.

Default for 4) RS232 Stream is disabled.

For information about setting scanner options when this is enabled, see Chapter 2,

“ Using Terminal Emulation Applications .”

5) Stream Scan

If the scanned bar code is too big for the input field, the overflow information appears in the next field and continues until the entire bar code is entered. When this option is OFF, and the scanned bar code is too big for the input field, the overflow information is dropped.

6) Scan All Flds

When this option is selected, the scanner is enabled when the cursor is in an input field. When this option is OFF, the host computer must enable the scanner for each input field that requires scanned data.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 97

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Barcode Parms

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,

CV60)

Selecting 2) Barcode Parms displays either the Scanner Type menu or the

Scan Options menu, pending on your terminal:

S For the 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals,

Selecting 2) Barcode Parms displays the Scanner Type menu.

S For the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals,

Selecting 2) Barcode Parms displays the Scan Options menu.

Scanner Type

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Use the Scanner Type menu to designate the type of bar code scanner. To make a selection, press the numeric key corresponding to the desired option, then press [Enter] to access the Scan Options menu.

Note : If 1) No Scanner is chosen, the remaining scanner and bar code options can be set. Then, if a scanner is used at a later time, only the scanner type needs to be designated. Selected options are highlighted on the display. Press a key corresponding to that option to deselect a selected option.

Scanner Type

1) No Scanner

2) Wand

3) Laser

4) Wand Emulate

5) Auto Detect

2) Wand ,

4) Wand Emulate , and

5) Auto Detect are for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

Scan Options

Use the Scan Options menu to assign scan options, enable bar code symbologies to use (the terminal can only decode the enabled symbologies) , and set options for each enabled bar code symbology, such as the bar code lengths. Press [Enter] to advance to other Scan Options menus.

Scan Options

1) Redundancy

2) MOD 10 Check

3) Concatenate

4) BC Type Char

5) Stream Scan

6) Scan All Flds

7) More

1) Redundancy is for 6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

3) Concatenate is for 6400, 5055, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

4) BC Type Char is for

6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

1) Redundancy (6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

This option requires two identical scans of a bar code, one right after another, before the terminal accepts the scan as valid.

98 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Mod 10 Check

When you select this option, a check digit is added at the end of the bar code after a good read for transmission to the host. The host can then validate the transmitted data using the check. This feature is not needed with modem transmission protocols.

The bar code number is divided by 10, until the number (or modulus) is less than 10. If the modulus subtracted from 10 (remainder) is equal to zero, then the bar code number is valid.

3) Concatenate (6400, 5055, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Each bar code read is added to the end of the previous bar code read until the 6400, 5055, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or CV60 Terminal meets a condition forcing transmission to the host.

When this option is OFF, each bar code read is placed at the beginning of the current input field. After a bar code is placed in a field, any subsequent read replaces the first read.

4) BC Type Char (6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

This adds a character associated with the bar code type at the beginning of the scanned bar code.

See page 320 for bar code type characters.

5) Stream Scan

6) Scan All Flds

7) More

This brings you additional scanning options that adjust scanning timeout and characters sent before and after the scanned data.

S 1) Scan Timeout (59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Use this option to adjust the scanning timeout period from 1 to 200 seconds. When using a proximity-detect scanner, you can shorten the timeout period to speed up scanning while also reducing the duration of errant scans. With a long-range scanner, you may want to increase the timeout period to ensure sufficient aiming time.

Scan Timeout

Seconds

XXX

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 99

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 2) Scan PreChar and 3) Scan PostChar

Enter a hexadecimal value from 00–FF for the character to be sent preceding the scanned data or after the scanned data. The value of 20h means that pre- or post-characters are not sent.

S 4) ParmsBySession (5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

When enabled, the symbology parameters under 1) Set-up Parms > 2)

Barcode Parms configure Windows CE terminal scanning devices on a per-session basis.

When disabled (default) , the 2) Barcode Parms option is ignored. The

TE 2000 application does not configure symbology parameters for Windows CE terminal scanning devices. The settings selected via the Windows CE System Data Collection applet are used for both TE 2000 sessions. You can configure the symbology parameters under 1) Set-up

Parms > 2) Barcode Parms , however these are not used.

S 5) Use Wedge Mode (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

This causes the TE 2000 application to use the system Scanners and

Symbologies settings. All scanned data will come into the TE 2000 application from the system Virtual Wedge per the Virtual Wedge settings as if the scanned bar code characters were typed into the keyboard.

When Use Wedge Mode is enabled, none of the TE 2000 menu options for scanning will function, such as the following:

S Auto Tab Scan, Aut Entr Scn, BRT Auto Enter, ANY Auto Enter,

Scan PreChar, Scan PostChar, symbology enable, disable, mix-max or fixed lengths, drop leading, or trailing characters.

Scanner data will not be inhibited when in a non-scannable field in TE

2000 3270 or TE 2000 5250.

When Use Wedge Mode is enabled, all of the system Scanners and

Symbologies capabilities will be available. This means that all of the symbology options and grid options for special edits can be used.

Use Wedge Mode can be enabled in TE_SETTINGS.INI by session but only the setting for Session 1 will be used. The Session 1 setting will be propogated across all sessions. If you enable Use Wedge Mode in TE

2000 menus and then save the parameters, you will see the

TE_SETTINGS.INI contains the same Use Wedge Mode value for all sessions.

Scan Options

1) Scan Timeout

2) Scan PreChar

3) Scan PostChar

4) ParmsBySession

5) Use Wedge Mode

1) Scan Timeout is for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

4) ParmsBySession is for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

5) Use Wedge Mode is for 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

100 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Sys 1 UPCE is for

6400, 17XX, 11XX,

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

3) Extended is blank for 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

6) Relax Std is for

59XX, 17XX, 11XX

UPC

1) Enabled

2) Add-On 2

3) Add-On 5

4) Sys 1 UPCE

5) Sys 0 UPCE

6) Expand E To A

Code 39

1) Enabled

2) Chk Digit

3) Extended

4) Encoded

5) Auto-Encoded

6) Relax Std

7) Full ASCII

[6]

RELAX CODE 39

1) Quiet zone

2) Data Decode

3) Element Decode

4) START Decode

Scan Options to Enable Bar Codes

There are menus of options to enable (or disable) various bar code symbologies. To enable a bar code, press the numeric key corresponding to the number of the bar code symbology (shown on menu), then press [Enter] .

After enabling a particular bar code, options may have to be selected for the bar code. After selecting the desired options, set the length requirements (such as minimum and maximum length, fixed lengths, leading and trailing character options, etc.).

Once the length requirements are set, the terminal returns to the same

Scan Options menu. Choose another bar code symbology from that menu or press [Enter] to advance to the next Scan Options menu.

Scan Options

1) UPC

2) EAN

3) Code 39

4) Code 128

5) Codabar

[1] [2]

EAN

1) Enabled

2) Add-On 2

3) Add-On 5

4) Expand 8 To 13

[3] [4]

Code 128

1) Enabled

2) UCC/EAN

3) No UCC Type

4) UCC F1 Value

[5]

Codabar

1) Codabar

2) ABC Codabar

2) Add-On 2 and

3) Add-On 5 if using 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, or

CV60, see the following note.

2) ABC Codabar is for 59XX, 17XX,

11XX

Note: For the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or CV60 Terminal, this implementation of TE 2000 processes EAN 8 and UPC E bar codes in the same manner. The type character for EAN 8 with Add-On 2 or Add-On 5 will decode as UPC E with Add-On 2 or Add-On 5, respectively. The bar code type character will also indicate UPC E with Add-On 2 or Add-On 5, respectively. Consequently, the drop leading and trailing UPC options will be used when an EAN 8 with Add-On 2 or Add-On 5 is decoded.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 101

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Scan Options 2

(Additional Bar Codes)

This menu offers additional bar code selections. After enabling a bar code symbology, various options, including length can be set.

When all options are set, the display returns to the Scan Options 2 menu.

This menu and the bar code symbologies to be enabled are shown below.

When all needed bar code symbologies are enabled, press [Enter] to return to the Scan Options menu. Press [Enter] again to back out and return to the 1) Set-up Parms menu.

5) Code 11 is for

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

Scan Options 2

1) Plessey

2) Str 2of5

3) Int 2of5

4) CI 2of5

5) Code 11

6) Code 93

[1] [2]

Str 2of5

1) Enabled

2) Disabled

3) MOD11 Chk is blank for 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

4) Allow Alpha is for

59XX, 17XX, 11XX

Plessey

1) Enabled

2) MOD10 Chk

3) MOD11 Chk

4) Allow Alpha

Int 2of5

1) Enabled

2) Chk Digit

[3] [4]

CI 2of5

1) Enabled

2) Disabled

Code 11

1) Enabled

2) Chk Dig 1

3) Chk Dig 2

[5] [6]

Code 93

1) Enabled

2) Disabled

102 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Lengths Options

The Lengths Options menus determine the maximum and minimum length for a specific bar code symbology. Setting the length of enabled bar codes helps the terminal determine if a scanned bar code is valid and improves response time. The length options must be set for each enabled bar code.

Enter this information in the order listed.

1 Key in the maximum length (0–99), then press [Enter].

For the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or CV60 Terminals, set this as high as you intend to set the minimum length.

2 Key in the minimum length (0–99), then press [Enter].

3 Fixed-length entries override the maximum and minimum length entries (minimum and maximum are used for chosen codes). If fixed lengths are not needed for the enabled bar code, enter zero (0).

Enter the fixed length (0–99), then press [Enter]. Up to four prompts to set another fixed length will appear. Enter zero (0) for the unused fixed lengths.

Note that I 2 of 5 only supports fixed lengths 1 and 2. Entries in 3 and 4 are ignored.

4 Enter the number of characters (0–15) to drop from the front (leading) edge of the scanned bar code, then press [Enter].

5 Enter the number of characters (0–15) to drop from the rear (trailing) edge of the scanned bar code, then press [Enter].

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Exceptions

The following exceptions apply only to the 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or

CV60 Terminals:

S Codabar, Str 2of5, Int 2of5, and CI 2of5 bar code symbologies set the length, if fixed-length 1 is non-zero, to three fixed-length entries equal to the first three fixed-lengths (fourth fixed-length is ignored). Otherwise, the length is set to greater than or equal to the minimum length.

S Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, and Plessey set the length to any length greater than or equal to the minimum length.

S UPC/EAN and Code 11 lengths are not used — ANY is allowed.

S Codabar options will not decode less than two data characters (four characters including Start and Stop).

S CI 2of5 options override Str 2of5 options, if both CI 2of5 and Str 2of5 are selected.

S EAN Add-on settings override UPC add-on settings, if both UPC and

EAN options are selected.

S If “Sys 1 UPCE” or “Sys 0 UPCE” is selected, then both UPCE number system 0 and 1 are enabled.

S Code 11 does not support “No check digits.” Select either 1 check digit

(Chk Dig 1) or 2 check digits (Chk Dig 2) according to your bar codes.

If neither check digit option is selected, then 2 check digits will be used as a default.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 103

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

After all of the length options are set for the enabled bar code, the display returns to either the Scan Options menu or the Scan Options 2 menu

(pending on from which menu the bar code was enabled) .

(bar code type)

Max Length xx

(bar code type)

Max Length xx

Min Length xx

(bar code type)

Max Length xx

Min Length xx

Fix Length 1 xx

(bar code type)

Max Length xx

Min Length xx

Fix Length 1 xx

Fix Length 2 xx

Fix Length 3 xx

(bar code type)

Max Length xx

Min Length xx

Fix Length 1 xx

Fix Length 2 xx

Fix Length 3 xx

Fix Length 4 xx

(bar code type)

Drop Leading xx

(bar code type)

Max Length xx

Min Length xx

Fix Length 1 xx

Fix Length 2 xx

(bar code type)

Drop Leading xx

Drop Trailing xx

3) Protocol Opts

Use the 3) Protocol Opts menu to designate the type of terminal emulation the host supports. You can also use it to designate additional commands and command sets.

Protocol Opts

1) Host View Sze

2) Data Stream

3) Extended Cmds

4) 5250

5) 3270

6) VT/ANSI

7) Native 7) Native is blank if UDP Plus or TCP/IP

104 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

1) Host View Sze

The 1) Host View Sze option tells the terminal the format of display information sent from the host. The display viewing size equals 1920 (the number of rows times the number of columns). The exception is with

5250 Terminal Emulation which has an additional row for error messages and therefore has 2000 characters.

The default setting for Native Terminal Emulation is 120 columns by 16 rows (equals 1920). The default for VT/ANSI Terminal Emulation is 80 columns by 24 rows (equals 1920). The default for 5250 Terminal Emulation is 80 columns by 24 rows (25 with error messages).

The default for 3270 Terminal Emulation depends on what the original setting was before changing to the 3270 Terminal Emulation. Remember that the total characters must equal 1920 (number of rows by the number of columns) unless using 5250 Terminal Emulation with error messages.

Enter a number between 1–80 to change the width. Press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu. “xx” is the width.

Host View Sze

Width xx

2) Data Stream

Enter the number corresponding to the type of host computer to specify the data stream used. Press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.

Data Stream

1) Native

2) 3270

3) 5250

4) VT/ANSI

1) Native is blank if UDP Plus or TCP/IP

Note : For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals, you can also set the emulation type through the 1) ITC Server or 3) Direct Connect options.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 105

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

For information about TE 2000 5250, VT/ANSI, or Native terminal emulation, see these manuals:

S TE 2000 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

(P/N 977-055-004)

S TE 2000 VT/ANSI) Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

(P/N 977-055-005)

S Native Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

(P/N: 977-055-006)

3) Extended Cmds

Use 3) Extended Cmds to enable or disable extended commands. By default, extended commands are disabled. For more information about extended commands, see Chapter 7, “ Extended Commands .”

When this option is enabled , the host computer can change or use RS-232 communications (such as printers), bar code options, display screen and font size, and error tone features of the unit. Press [1] to enable or press

[2] to disable the extended command list. Press [Enter] to return to the

3) Protocol Opts menu.

Extended Cmds

1) Enabled

2) Disabled

4) 5250

(Options)

The 4) 5250 menu enables the following features if the 5250 communication protocol is used.

Press the appropriate number to enable an option, then press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.

1) Beep On Error

Causes the buzzer to emit when an error condition occurs; does not lock up the keyboard.

2) Auto Tab Scan

Causes the cursor to automatically tab forward to the next input field when a good scan is obtained.

3) Telnet (blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Handles the telnet option negotiations to establish a session with an appropriate telnet server.

Note : 3) Telnet is not changeable if TCP/IP is used.

106 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Device Name

Enters a physical name for a device. This is 1–10 characters with allowable values of A–Z, a–z, 0–9, the pound symbol (#), the dollar sign ($), the ampersand (@), and an underscore ( _ ).

5250E RFC 1572 Support.

Note : The first character of 4) Device Name cannot start with a number

(0–9).

The following screen displays after a physical name is entered.

S 1) 5250 Allow Alias

If this is enabled, and your current device name returns an error in use, then the terminal attempts to append a “$” (dollar sign) to the end of your device name to initiate a session to your host. When disabled, the device name is resent to the host for the host to send a FIN packet to the terminal, causing the terminal to reboot. This continues until the device name is no longer in use.

Allow Alias

1) 5250 Allow Alias

5) Allow NAWS (Negotiate About Window Size)

When enabled, the terminal will support Telnet option 31 if prompted.

When disabled, this option will return a “won’t do” message.

6) Skip FldExit

When this option is enabled, a field that would generate an error code of

“0020” (field exit required) when [Enter] was pressed will now send the field data.

The legacy TE application would send the entire field so a “7” entered into a 3-character blank-filled field would transmit as “7bb”, a “12” would transmit as “12b”. TE 2000 strips the field fill characters so “7” will transmit as a “7”, “12” will transmit as a “12” and so forth.

Note A “b” indicates a one-byte space.

7) More

Select 7) More to modify the function of the period key or backspace key.

S 1) Period–Comma (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)

Select 1) Period–Comma to change the period key ( . ) to a comma.

S 2) Destructive BS (backspace)

Press [2] to use the backspace key to remove (delete) any previouslykeyed data characters. When disabled, the backspace key goes back one character, but does not delete that character.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 107

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 3) Lock Error Msg

The TE 2000 cursor modes ensure that the cursor location of the screen and its surrounding data is visible. The 5250 error message line is typically not visible because the error message line 24 is too far away from the cursor location. Enabling this option causes a 5250 Write Error

Code command error message to be visible by placing the cursor on the error message line. When the RESET key is pressed, the cursor is restored to where it would have been if this option was not enabled (the location specified by a 5250 Insert Cursor command) and the cursor mode option then causes that area of the screen to be visible.

Disabling this option causes normal behaviour for the 5250 Write Error

Code command error message. The Write Error Code command error message is displayed on the error message line of the screen and the cursor is placed at the location specified by the host Insert Cursor command. The cursor mode then causes the cursor area of the screen to be visible.

S 4) Use Color

When enabled, the TE 2000 5250 application emulates single byte

IBM-5292-2 and double byte IBM-5555-C01 terminals. Monochrome was and still emulates single byte IBM-5291-1 and double byte

IBM-5555-B01 terminals.

The 5250 Column Separator attribute is emulated using the ExtraLight font attribute which may not be noticeable on some terminals.

5250

1) Beep On Error

2) Auto Tab Scan

3) Telnet

4) Device Name

5) Allow NAWS

6) Skip FldExit

7) More

[7]

5250

1) Period-Comma

2) Destructive BS

3) Lock Error Msg

4) Use Color

3) Telnet is blank for 5020,

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

1) Period-Comma is for

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,

2475, 248X

108

5) 3270

(Options)

The 5) 3270 menu enables the following features if the 3270 communication protocol is used.

Press the appropriate number to enable an option, then press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.

1) Keybrd Unlock

Unlocks the keyboard after the [PA1] , [PA2] , or [CLEAR] keys are pressed. (Normally the keyboard remains locked, until unlocked or the terminal is reset by the host, after any of these keys are pressed.) When using Token Ring on your host, the tab key also unlocks the keyboard.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Auto Tab Scan

Causes the cursor to tab forward to the next input field when a good scan is obtained.

Note : 2) Auto Tab Scan cannot be enabled at the same time as 3) Auto

Entr Scan .

3) Auto Entr Scan

Actuates the <Enter> function when a good scan is obtained.

Note : 3) Auto Entr Scan cannot be enabled at the same time as 2) Auto

Tab Scan .

4) Emulate 3210 (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

The Intermec 3210 emulation option allows the 3270 keyboard to emulate an RT3210 Hand-Held Computer, performing the same functions. For full 3210 compatibility, disable buffering the keyboard, set cursor to lazy mode, and set the LCD Parms to Key Uppercase.

5) Telnet (blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Handles telnet option negotiations to establish a session with an appropriate telnet server.

Note : 5) Telnet cannot be changed if you are using TCP/IP.

6) Origin Set

When enabled, this option resets the screen origin when an exclamation mark is found in the data stream.

7) More

Select 7) More for additional features.

S 1) Device Name

Enters a physical name for a device. This is 1–10 characters with allowable values of A–Z, a–z, 0–9, the pound symbol (#), the dollar sign ($), the ampersand (@), and an underscore ( _ ).

3270E RFC 2355 Support.

Note : The first character of 1) Device Name cannot start with a number (0–9).

S 2) Allow NAWS (Negotiate About Window Size)

When enabled, the terminal will support Telnet option 31 if prompted.

When disabled, this option will return a “won’t do” message.

S 3) BRT Auto Enter

When enabled, if the last field on a screen has the reverse video attribute set, then when that field is exactly filled, the terminal will automatically send the data for this screen back to the host with an “Enter AID” code.

If disabled, the screen will wait for the user to hit the AID key prior to sending data back to the host.

Default is disabled.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 109

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 4) Any Auto Enter

When enabled, an automatic “enter” occurs when a reverse video attribute field is filled by keying or scanning data. Any extra scanned data is discarded. If disabled, the screen will wait for the user to hit the AID key prior to sending data back to the host.

Default is disabled.

3270

1) Keybrd Unlock

2) Auto Tab Scan

3) Auto Entr Scn

4) Emulate 3210

5) Telnet

6) Origin Set

7) More

[7]

3270

1) Device Name

2) Allow NAWS

3) BRT Auto Enter

4) Any Auto Enter

4) Emulate 3210 is for

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

5) Telnet is blank for

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

110

6) VT/ANSI

The 6) VT/ANSI menu enables the following features if the VT/ANSI communication protocol is used.

VT/ANSI

1) DEL To BS

2) CR To CRLF

3) Auto Entr Scn

4) Auto Tab Scan

5) Local Echo

6) AnswerBack

7) More

1) DEL to BS (Delete to Backspace)

Causes the [CLEAR] key to delete the character to the left of the cursor position, and moves the cursor back one space. When this option is not enabled, the [CLEAR] key deletes the character at the cursors position.

Default is disabled.

2) CR to CRLF (Carriage Return to Carriage Return/Line Feed)

Causes <Enter> to perform a carriage return and a line feed. When this option is not enabled, <Enter> performs a carriage return only.

Default is disabled.

3) Auto Entr Scn (Auto Enter Scan)

Actuates the <Enter> function whenever a good scan is obtained.

Default is enabled for version 6.60 or greater, otherwise the default is disabled.

Note : 3) Auto Entr Scn cannot be enabled at the same time as 4) Auto

Tab Scan .

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Auto Tab Scan

Causes the terminal to automatically tab to the next input field when a good scan is obtained.

Default is disabled.

Note : 4) Auto Tab Scan cannot be enabled at the same time as 3) Auto

Entr Scan .

5) Local Echo

Allows characters to be displayed from terminal memory but not from host memory.

Default is disabled.

6) AnswerBack

Enables you to enter a character string that is sent to the host in response to an inquiry (hexadecimal 05). The range is 0–30.

Default is null string for

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, and 11XX Terminals and the terminal’s serial number for 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, and CV60 Terminals.

AnswerBack

Message

If you enter any of the following control characters, it is sent out.

Note that control strings count as one character.

<ACK>

<BEL>

<BS>

<DC2>

<DC3>

<EOT>

<ESC>

<GS>

<HT>

<SI>

<SO>

<SOH>

<US>

<VT>

7) More

Calls up the following VT/ANSI More Options screen.

VT/ANSI More Options

1) Screen Lock

2) DiscreteBells

3) UserKey Locked

4) RS232 Setup

5) VT220 Mode

6) Lock Mode

7) More

2) DiscreteBells is for 6400,

5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

4) RS232 Setup is for 6400,

5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX,

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

S 1) Screen Lock

Sets and locks the screen to a specified size. Any characters outside this screen size are ignored by the hand-held unit.

Default is disabled.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 111

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 2) DiscreteBells (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

If enabled, the terminal beeps for each bell character the host sends. If disabled, the unit ignores the bell characters if it is already beeping.

Default is disabled.

S 3) UserKey Locked

If set, the host ignores a host command defining the Function keys.

Default is disabled.

S 4) RS232 Setup (6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60)

When using the media copy command, use this option to set up the communications port, then press [Enter] to return to 3) Protocol Opts .

S 1) RS232 Baud Rate

Select 1200, 2400, 4800 (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX) ,

[9600], 19200, 38400,

57600, or 115200 (5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) .

S 2) RS232 Parity (not supported on 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,

CV60) Select from Odd, Even, or [None].

S 3) RS232 Stop Bits (not supported on 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,

CV60) Select either [1]- or 2-bits.

S 4) RS232 Data Bits (not supported on 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,

CV60) Select either 7- or [8]-bit.

S 5) RS232 Flow (not supported on 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31,

CV60) Select from None, DTR, or XON/XOFF. Default is None.

RS232 Setup

1) RS232 Baud Rate

2) RS232 Parity

3) RS232 Stop Bits

4) RS232 Data Bits

5) RS232 Flow

2) RS232 Parity ,

3) RS232 Stop Bits ,

4) RS232 Data Bits , and

5) RS232 Flow are for 6400, 5055,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX

1) 1200 ,

2) 2400 , and

3) 4800 are for

6400, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX

7) 57600 and

8) 115200 are for

5020, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

RS232 Baud Rate

1) 1200

2) 2400

3) 4800

4) 9600

5) 19200

6) 38400

7) 57600

8) 115200

RS232 Stop Bits

1) 1

2) 2

[1] [2]

RS232 Parity

1) Odd

2) Even

3) None

[3] [4]

RS232 Data Bits

1) 7

2) 8

RS232 Flow

1) None

2) DTR

3) XON/XOFF

[5]

112 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 5) VT220 Mode

Selects operating in character or block mode. Select a choice, then press

[Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.

Default is 1) Char .

S 1) Char (Default)

Sets the mode to Character mode. The terminal sends each character as it is pressed.

S 2) Block

Sets the mode to Line Edit (block) mode. The terminal sends a block of characters when a terminating key is pressed.

S 3) Transmit BS

When enabled, pressing the backspace key sends a backspace to the host for the host to echo back to the terminal. When disabled, the backspace key is handled locally on the terminal by doing a destructive backspace to the printed data characters on the display.

VT220 Mode

1) Char

2) Block

3) Transmit BS

S 6) Lock Mode

Use the Mode key on the terminal’s keyboard or keypad to toggle between Line Edit (block) mode and Character mode. Use the Lock Mode option to disable the Mode key in the VT/ANSI data stream.

By default,

Lock mode is disabled.

S 7) More

Selects the telnet option for the VT/ANSI data stream.

VT/ANSI

1) Telnet

2) Term Setup

3) Send XON

4) Keypad Mode

5) VT Cursor Mode

6) Terminal Mode

7) More

1) Telnet is blank for

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60

S 1) Telnet (blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Handles telnet option negotiations to establish a session with an appropriate telnet server.

Note this cannot be changed if using TCP/IP.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 113

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 2) Term Setup

Selects the compliance level of the emulated terminal.

Default is

VT340 to support all commands.

Make a selection, then press [Enter] to return to the 3) Protocol Opts menu.

Term Setup

1) ANSI

2) VT100

3) VT220

4) VT320

5) VT340

6) IBM 330X

S 3) Send XON

Default is enabled which indicates that when an RIS is received from the host, the XON character is returned after compliance of this command.

Default is enabled.

S 4) Keypad Mode

Determines what is returned to the host when keys are pressed.

Default is 2) Numeric .

S 1) Application

Generates application ESC sequences for the key code. For help, refer to your VT manual.

S 2) Numeric

Generates ANSI cursor control ESC sequences that correspond to what appears on the face of the keys.

Keypad Mode

1) Application

2) Numeric

114 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 5) VT Cursor Mode

Determines what is returned to the host when cursor keys are hit.

Default is 2) Cursor .

S 1) Application

Generates application ESC sequences for the key code. For help, refer to your VT manual.

S 2) Cursor

Generates ANSI cursor control ESC sequences that correspond to what appears on the face of the cursor key.

VT Cursor Mode

1) Application

2) Cursor

S 6) Terminal Mode (VT220/320 only)

Sets the terminal mode to 7-bit or 8-bit. This option sets the mode

VT-series terminals used to exchange escape sequences, control commands, and status reports with an application.

Default is 1) 7-Bit .

Terminal Mode

1) 7-Bit

2) 8-Bit

S 7) More

Below and on the next page are the additional options:

VT/ANSI

1) Use PC Char Set

2) Allow NAWS

3) Terminal ID

4) Auto Wrap

5) Allow LineMode

6) Do Gold Key

7) More

S 1) Use PC Char Set

Select this option to default the font character to the terminal’s character set instead of a DEC terminal character set.

S 2) Allow NAWS (Negotiate About Window Size)

When enabled, the terminal supports Telnet option 31 if prompted. When disabled, this option returns a “won’t do” message.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 115

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S 3) Terminal ID

This enables the entry of a character string sent back to the host in response to IAC SB terminal type SE. The range is 0 through 30, with null string as the default. If set to null, then ANSI, VT100,

VT220, VT320, or VT340 is returned as selected.

Terminal ID

Terminal Type

S 4) Auto Wrap

If enabled, graphic display characters received when the cursor is at the right margin appear on the next line. The screen scrolls up if the cursor is at the end of the scrolling region.

S 5) Allow LineMode

When enabled, the terminal prompts to negotiate to the default

LineMode RFC 1184. When disabled, the terminal does not negotiate to LineMode RFC 1184.

S 6) Do Gold Key

When enabled, the F1 key acts as the Gold key on a VT/ANSI terminal. This sends the F1 key value, which then “hides” the next key pressed, but puts its value into a buffer to send to the host (default).

When disabled, the F1 key acts as a function key.

Note: The Gold key action is only invoked when the terminal is executing in block mode.

S 7) More

Select this for more menu options:

1) Do UTF8

Select this option to enable UTF-8 encoding as defined by RFC

2279. If the character is between 0 and 0x7f, then nothing changes. If the character is between 0xc0 and 0xfd, then convert the character to a displayable character using the following formula where x is the first character in the string and y is the second character.

(x – 0xc0) *2 **6 + (y – 0x80)

If disabled (default), then characters are translated regularly as defined by the current gl, gr character sets selected.

116 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Note : 7) Native is enabled by default to preserve backwards compatibility.

7) Native

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, and 5055 with WTP,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

S For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with WTP:

When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [FnL] [7]

(Home), while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing [F1] , etc. When disabled , [F1] is equivalent to [F1] , [F2] is equivalent to [F2] , etc.

S For 2435A Terminals with 48-key keyboards:

When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing

Green > , H .(Home), while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing

Orange > , 1 , etc. When disabled, [F1] is equivalent to pressing

Orange > , 1 , [F2] is equivalent to pressing Orange > , 2 , etc.

S For 6400 Computers with WTP on a 51-key keyboard:

When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [0] , while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [1] , etc. When disabled ,

[F1] is equivalent to [Blue] [1] , [F2] is equivalent to [Blue] [2] , etc.

S For 6400 Computers with WTP on a 41-key keyboard:

When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [Space] .

S For 5055 Terminals with WTP:

When enabled, pressing [F1] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [0] , while pressing [F2] is equivalent to pressing [Blue] [1] , etc. When disabled ,

[F1] is equivalent to [Blue] [1] , [F2] is equivalent to [Blue] [2] , etc.

S For 59XX, 17XX, 11XX ,

When enabled, pressing [F1] is equal to [Black] [0] and [F2] is equal to

[Black] [1] , etc. When disabled, [F1] is equal to [Black] [1] ,

[F2] is equal to [Black] [2] , etc.

Native Mode

1) F1 is FUNC-0

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 117

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Display Opts

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020, 6400, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX)

4) Display Opts adjusts the backlight timer, the cursor appearance on the display, or the remote display.

Display Opts

1) Backlight

2) Cursor Mode

3) Remote Disp

1) Backlight is for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,

2475, 248X, 6400, 17XX, 11XX

3) Remote Disp is for 17XX

1) Backlight

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 17XX, 11XX)

Use the up and down arrows to select “Off” or a number from “1–60” for

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X Terminals or from “1–255” for 6400, 17XX, and 11XX Terminals. This would dictate the number of seconds that the backlight stays on after a key is pressed.

Backlight Timer

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust xxx

2) Cursor Mode

Selects the cursor style. After making a selection, press [Enter] to return to the 4) Display Opts menu. The cursor shape is shown between “>” and

“<”.

1) Underline Blink (blank for 5020)

Causes the underline character to appear and disappear in its current location.

2) Block Blink (blank for 5020)

Causes the block ( J ) character cursor to appear and disappear in its current location.

3) Underline (6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

This option provides a solid underline character to display the cursor’s current location.

118 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Block (6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

This provides a reverse or highlighted block ( J ) character displaying the cursor’s current location.

Cursor Mode

1) Underline Blink

2) Block Blink

3) Underline

4) Block

> <

1) Underline Blink and

2) Block Blink are blank for 5020

3) Underline and

4) Block are for 6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

3) Remote Disp

(17XX)

This menu allows communication to a remote display.

1) Enabled

Press this option to enable the remote display function.

2) Screen Size

Use this option to set the screen size of the remote display.

3) Remote Baud

Select the appropriate baud rate for the remote display: 9600, 19200, or

38400.

4) Remote Type

Use this option to identify the remote terminal: VT100, VT220, or ANSI.

Remote Display

1) Enabled

2) Screen Size

3) Remote Baud

4) Remote Type

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 119

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Display Opts

(700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

4) Display Opts adjusts the backlight timer, the cursor appearance on the display, or the remote display.

Display Opts

1) Backlight

2) Cursor Mode

3) Select Font

5) Display Colors

6) Font Quality

7) More

1) Backlight is for 700 Series

6) Font Quality is for CK30,

CK31

Display Opts

1) Code Page

120

1) Backlight

(700 Series)

Use the up and down arrows to select “Off” or a number from “1–60” for

700 Series Terminals. This would dictate the number of seconds that the backlight stays on after a key is pressed.

Backlight Timer

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust xxx

2) Cursor Mode

Selects the cursor style. After making a selection, press [Enter] to return to the 4) Display Opts menu. The cursor shape is shown between “>” and

“<”.

1) Underline Blink

Causes the underline character to appear and disappear in its current location.

2) Block Blink

Causes the block ( J ) character cursor to appear and disappear in its current location.

3) Underline

This option provides a solid underline character to display the cursor’s current location.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Block

This provides a reverse or highlighted block ( J ) character displaying the cursor’s current location.

Cursor Mode

1) Underline Blink

2) Block Blink

3) Underline

4) Block

> <

3) Select Font

Selects a font type to appear on the display.

1) Lucida

This displays the font type in Lucida :

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

2) Courier New

This displays the font type in Courier New :

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

3) Courier New Bold

This displays the font type in Courier New with bold applied:

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

4) Tahoma

This displays the font type in

Tahoma

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

Select Font

1) Lucida Console

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRXTUVWXYZ

2) Courier New

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

3) Courier New Bold

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

4) Tahoma

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

5) Display Colors

Adjusts foreground (text) or the background colors of the display.

Display Colors

1) Foreground RGB

2) Background RGB

3) Swap Fore/Back

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 121

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

1) Foreground RGB

Assigns a color setting for the foreground (text). Select a color in the first screen, which is then displayed in the second screen. In the second screen, enter a numeric value from 0–255.

Foreground RGB

1) Red

2) Blue

3) Green

Foreground RGB

Red

XXX

(or Blue or Green)

2) Background RGB

Assigns a color setting for the background. Select a color in the first screen, which then is displayed in the second screen. In the second screen, enter a numeric value from 0–255.

Background RGB

1) Red

2) Blue

3) Green

Background RGB

Red

XXX

(or Blue or Green)

122

3) Swap Fore/Back

Renders the original foreground color as the new background color and the original background color as the new foreground color.

6) Font Quality

(CK30, CK31)

Selects either a standard font quality or a clear type font quality to appear on the display.

1) Standard

This displays the font in standard quality.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Clear Type

This displays the font in the clear type quality.

Font Quality

1) Standard

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRXTUVWXYZ

2) Clear Type

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

7) More

Select this for more menu options:

1) Code Page

Selects a language in which the code page is to appear.

S 1) English

This displays text in the English language, — code page 37.

S 2) Cyrillic (Russian)

This displays text in the Cyrillic (Russian) language — code page 855.

S 3) Greek

This displays text in the Greek language — code page 1253.

S 4) Hebrew

This displays text in the Hebrew language — code page 862.

S 5) Central Europe

This displays text in the Polish language — code page 1250.

S 6) Latin 2

This displays text in the Latin language — code page 8859-2.

Code Page

1) English

2) Cyrillic

3) Greek

4) Hebrew

5) Central Europe

6) Latin 2

5) Radio Comm

(Blank for 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, and for 2415,

2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals without either an 802.1x Supplicant

Radio Driver or UDP Plus)

Note : Diagnostic modes disable data compression and are reserved for engineering tests.

Menus for 5) Radio Comm specify the communication protocol and speed in certain instances. Depending on circumstances, one of the two menus will appear.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 123

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with either an

802.1x Supplicant Radio Driver or UDP Plus

The following menu appears:

Radio Comm

1) User Auth

2) Disconnect Val

1) User Auth is for 2415, 2425,

2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with an 802.1x supplicant radio

2) Disconnect Val is for 2415,

2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X

Terminals with UDP Plus

1) User Auth (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with 802.1x supplicant radio driver)

When enabled, the terminal prompts for a user name and password before sending any radio data. When disabled, the terminal will use the machine authentication as set up in the firmware menus.

2) Disconnect Val (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals with UDP Plus)

The length of time in minutes that the terminal, after receiving an error from the network status, will continue to look for network errors before restarting. Enter a value from 1–10. Default is 2.

Disconnect Val

Minutes

For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals

This menu enables or disables the SST diagnostic mode.

Protocol

1) SST

2) SST-Diag Mode

3) Security ID 3) Security ID is for Proxim radios

124 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

3) Security ID (Proxim radios)

This changes the radio security identification. Enter the new security ID

(up to 16 characters) twice. If the old security ID is not correct or if the second new security ID was not entered correctly, you will see the “unchanged” message on the bottom line of the display.

Protocol

Security ID

New Security ID

If the new security ID is entered correctly, the following will appear.

Protocol

Security ID changed.

Save parms then reboot terminal for change to take affect.

6) Cold Start

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX)

This resets all TE 2000 values to the stored configuration in

CONFIG.DAT and performs a cold-start on the terminal. Press [Y] to reboot the terminal, or press any other key to return to the 1) Set-up

Parms menu.

Depending on the setting in the firmware menu of the terminal , after rebooting, the terminal opens to the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System.

Cold Start

Enter ‘Y’ to Cold Start terminal:

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 125

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

6) Exit TE2000

(700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

This returns control to the Windows operating system. The 700 Series and

CV60 Terminals prompt you for a password before displaying the Exit dialog. Either press [Y] or tap Yes to exit the TE 2000 application and return to the Windows operating system.

Exit TE2000

Enter ‘Y’ to Exit TE2000

CK30 700 Series, CK31, CV60

7) More

7) More provides the following additional setup parameters:

Set-UP Parms

1) Menu Password

2) Print Device

3) COM Select

2) Print Device is for 6400, 5020,

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

3) COM Select is for 248X, 5055

1) Menu Password

This parameter enables menu password protection for the TE configuration menus. This provides added protection because once enabled, the password must be entered before any further activity can occur within the terminal emulation menu screens. The default is to have this option disabled.

To enable the password, press [1] , then type “3193693” for the fixed password set by Intermec Technologies Corporation.

The “1)” will change to reverse video to indicate it is enabled.

With this enabled, enter this password when you access the terminal emulation menu screens. Press [Enter] until you reach the Main Menu , then press 6) Exit Menus to return to the main terminal screen.

To disable the password, press [1] to display in normal viewing text. You do not need to enter a password to disable this function.

Note that the menu password can be set via a custom configuration. See Chapter 5, “Customizing Your Configuration,” for help on creating a custom configuration file.

126 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Print Device

(6400, 5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Establishes extended commands for the RS-232, IrDA, RF, or Pan printer drivers. Press [1] for the RS-232 driver (default) , press [2] for the IrDA driver (6400, 5020, 700 Series, CV60) , press [3] for the RF driver (5020) ; or press [4] for the Pan driver (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) .

Print Device

1) RS232 Print

2) IRDA Print

3) RF Print

4) Pan Print

1) RS232 Print is for 6400, 5020, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60

2) IRDA Print is for 6400, 5020, 700 Series,

CV60

3) RF Print is for 5020, 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

4) Pan Print is for 700 Series, CK30, CK31,

CV60

3) RF Print (5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Enter the IP address of the RF Printer to which the 5020 Terminal is to communicate. If you want to use a serial port other than port “23”, you may select from the range of 0–65535.

RF Print

Printer Address

RF Print

Printer Port

4) Pan Print (700 Series, CK30, CV60)

When selected, the print data is sent to the Bluetooth device specified in the registry. The registry is updated by using the Bluetooth Device Manager application to discover other Bluetooth devices.

Note: The TE 2000 application only supports Bluetooth devices attached to COM6.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 127

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

3) COM Select

(248X, 5055)

Selects which communications port to use for extended commands,

RS-232 communications, or media copy commands.

COM Select

1) COM 1

2) COM 2

2) LCD Parms (Parameters)

2) LCD Parms adjusts these Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features:

S The screen size (number of rows displayed, and the number of characters displayed on each row).

S The screen mode (how the cursor positions itself on the display).

S Making all alphabetic character keystrokes uppercase characters.

S Scrolling window parameters.

LCD Parms

1) LCD Contrast

2) Screen Size

3) Screen Mode

4) Annunciators

5) Backlight

6) Key Uppercase

7) Scroll Window

1) LCD Contrast is for 59XX, 17XX

2) Screen Size is blank for 2480, 2485

4) Annunciators is blank for 17XX

5) Backlight is for 59XX, 17XX

1) LCD Contrast

(59XX, 17XX)

Use this option to adjust the contrast of the display to a more readable level (range 0–255). The terminal uses this setting as a baseline, automatically readjusting contrast as necessary, based on temperature changes. Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the contrast, then press [Enter] to return to the LCD Parms screen.

LCD Contrast

Use Cursor Up and Down Keys

To Adjust xxx

128

Note : 2) Screen Size is available for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475,

2481, and 2486 Terminals on TE 2000 application version 7.00 or greater and with Double-Byte Country Code equal to 00 (USA).

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Screen Size

(blank for 2480, 2485)

2) Screen Size selects the number of lines and characters in each line to be viewed on the display. To change the screen size:

1 Press the arrow keys. Each key press moves the word On one position in the direction of the arrow key pressed. The word On indicates the current setting.

2 When the word On appears in the position corresponding to the desired screen size, press [Enter] .

2415 and 2425 Terminal Screen Sizes

Choices for the 2415 and 2425 Terminals include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 16 x 20)

S 4 rows, with 10, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 6 rows, with 10, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 8 rows, with 10, 12, 17, 20, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 10 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 12 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 16 rows, with 12, 17, 20, 22, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 21 rows, with 12, 17, 22, 26, or 32 characters per row

Off

Off off

Screen Size

Off

Off off

Off

Off off

Off

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 129

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2435A Terminal Screen Sizes

For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and

TE 2000 application version 7.10 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the following screen sizes.

If the icons are disabled in the firmware (default) , then the 2435A Terminal uses the screen sizes as shown on page 129 for the 2415 and 2425 Terminals. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 16 x 19)

S 4 rows, with 9, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 6 rows, with 9, 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 8 rows, with 9, 12, 17, 19, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 10 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 12 rows, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per row

S 16 rows, with 12, 17, 19, 22, 26, or 31 characters per row

S 21 rows, with 12, 17, 22, 26, or 31 characters per row

Off

Off off

Screen Size

Off

Off off

Off

Off off

Off

2455 Terminal Screen Sizes

Choices for the 2455 Terminal include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 25 x 80)

S 8 rows, with 33 or 40 characters per row

S 12 rows, with 40, 53, or 80 characters per row

S 20 rows, with 80 characters per row

S 25 rows, with 80 characters per row

Screen Size

33 40

Off Off

Off

130 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

For 2455 Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.73 or greater and

TE 2000 version 7.15.09 or 7.15.77 or greater, the 2455 Terminals use the following screen sizes. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 25 x 80)

S 8 rows, with 20, 33, or 40 characters per row

S 12 rows, with 20, 33, 40, 53, or 80 characters per row

S 16 rows, with 20, 33, 40, or 53 characters per row

S 20 rows, with 80 characters per row

S 25 rows, with 80 characters per row

Off

Screen Size

Off

53 80

Off

2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminal Screen Sizes

Note: This information does not apply to the 2480 and 2485 Terminals.

Choices for the 2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminals include the following.

Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 25 x 64)

S 12 rows, with 20, 26, 40, 53, or 64 characters per row

S 20 rows, with 40 characters per row

S 25 rows, with 40, 55, or 64 characters per row

Off

Screen Size

40 53

Off

Off off off

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 131

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

For 2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminals with Terminal Emulation version

6.73 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.15.09 or 7.15.77 or greater, the 2475, 2481, and 2486 Terminals use the following screen sizes.

Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 25 x 64)

S 12 rows, with 20, 26, or 40 characters per row

S 16 rows, with 20 or 26 characters per row

S 20 rows, with 40 characters per row

S 25 rows, with 40, 53, or 64 characters per row

Off

Screen Size

Off

6400 Computer Screen Sizes

Choices for the 6400 Computer include the following. It is also possible to have selected 5, 8, 10, and 16 for number of rows. This depends on what size of display you have selected. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 18 x 20)

S 6 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 9 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 12 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 18 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

Screen Size

10 13 16 20 23* 26 32

Off

Off off

Off

Off off

Off

With 1.23 of BIOS 5.36 of Terminal Emulation

Off

132 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

5020 PC Screen Sizes

Choices for the 5020 PC include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 16 x 20)

S 8 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 10 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 12 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 14 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

S 16 rows, with 10, 13, 16, 20, 23, 26, or 32 characters per row

Off

Off off

Screen Size

Off

Off off

20 off

Off

Off off

Off

5055 PC Screen Sizes

Choices for the 5055 Data Collection PC include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 25 x 80)

S 8 rows, with 20 columns per row

S 10 rows, with 20 columns per row

S 12 rows, with 20 or 40 columns per row

S 16 rows, with 20, 40, or 80 columns per row

S 21 rows, with 40 or 80 columns per row

S 25 rows, with 40 or 80 columns per row

Screen Size

20 40

Off

Off Off

Off

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 133

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

59XX Terminal Screen Sizes

Choices for the 59XX Terminal includes the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 12 x 40)

S 8 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row

S 10 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row

S 12 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row

S 16 rows, with 40, 60, or 80 columns per row

S 21 rows, with 80 columns per row

S 25 rows, with 80 columns per row

Screen Size

40 60

Off

On Off

Off Off

Off

17XX Terminal Screen Sizes

Choices for the 17XX Terminal include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 8 x 22)

S 4 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line

S 6 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line

S 8 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line

S 10 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line

S 12 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line

S 16 lines, with 12, 17, 22, 26, or 31 characters per line

S 21 lines, with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line

Off

Off off

Off

Off off

Screen Size

22 26

Off

Off off off off off off off off off

31 off

134 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

11XX Terminal Screen Sizes

Choices for the 11XX Terminal include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 9 x 16)

S 4 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row

S 6 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row

S 8 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row

S 9 rows, with 12 or 16 characters per row

Select Size

Off

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminal Screen Sizes

Choices for the 700 Series, CK30, and CV60 Terminals include the following. Only one option can be selected at a time.

(Default is 10 x 20)

S For 700 Series Computers, enter a value between 8–20 for rows and a value between 10–32 for columns.

S For CK30 and CK31 Handheld Computers, enter a value between 8–20 for rows and a value between 10–32 for columns.

S For CV60 Vehicle Mount Computers, enter a value between 8–24 for rows and a value between 16–80 for columns.

Sample screen from CV60 Terminal

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 135

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

3) Screen Mode

3) Screen Mode selects the cursor position and movement as you scroll through data in the display buffer. This buffer stores data in a standard

CRT format (as sent from the host computer). Since the terminal display is smaller than a CRT, these 3) Screen Mode options optimize your view of information (data) on the display.

Default is 2) Corner Mode .

Use arrow keys to scroll (or “move”) the screen’s view port on the display.

Screen Mode

1) Center Cursor

2) Corner Mode

3) Page Mode

4) Lazy Mode

5) Locked Mode

6) Define Origin

136

1) Center Cursor

In this mode, the cursor begins near the center of the display and attempts to remain there as you scroll through the data. Upon reaching an outside boundary of the full CRT screen, the display stops advancing while the cursor moves beyond the center of the screen. When the cursor reaches the boundary of the CRT screen, an error tone sounds, such as a “beep.” The cursor does not wrap to the next line in the display.

2) Corner Mode

Starts the display at the upper-left corner of the full CRT screen and keeps the cursor in the lower-right corner of the display. As you scroll, the cursor remains there as data advances in the scrolled direction (up, down, right, or left) until an outside boundary of the full CRT screen is reached. Then the screen stops moving in relation to the display and the cursor moves in the scrolled direction (the cursor no longer remains in the corner of the display). When the cursor reaches the CRT screen boundary it stops moving. The cursor does not wrap to the next line in the display. An error tone sounds if you try to move the cursor beyond the boundary.

This option is recommended when your application uses only the upperleft corner of the full CRT screen.

3) Page Mode

Divides the full CRT screen into predefined “pages,” and starts the terminal display on page 1. The cursor first appears in the upper-right corner of the display. As you scroll, only the cursor moves (the data on the screen does not appear to move). When you scroll off the edge of the displayed page, the display snaps to the next (or previous) page. Upon reaching the boundary of the CRT screen, the cursor stops moving and an error tone sounds each time you attempt to move beyond the boundary.

Some “pages” in 3) Page Mode overlap each other (the same information is shown on both pages). This overlap occurs because the 24-row by

80-column CRT screen cannot be divided equally.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Lazy Mode

Starts the cursor in the upper left corner of the terminal display. The cursor moves across the display in the scrolled direction. When the cursor goes beyond the edge of the display, the data begins to move in the opposite direction that the cursor is moving in and the cursor remains at the edge of the display. When you reach an outside boundary of the full CRT display, an error tone sounds each time you try to move beyond the boundary.

5) Locked Mode

When this is selected the screen view is locked to the upper left-hand corner of the display. Any characters selected outside of the display window size are written to the screen but are not visible. The windowing keys do not move the visible window.

Note : In 5250 emulation, the err_row is mapped to the last row of the screen size selected.

6) Define Origin

Use this option to specify the “X,Y” origin of the terminal display. Enter a number from the range of 0–79 for the “X” origin and a number from the range of 0–23 for the “Y” origin.

Default is 0 for both “X” and “Y” origins

Define Origin

1) X Origin

2) Y Origin

X Origin

Enter number from 0–79

[1]

Y Origin

[2]

Enter number from 0–23

4) Annunciators

(blank for 17XX, 11XX)

4) Annunciators selects and changes the location of the annunciators on the display screen. Press the up or down arrows to position the annunciators around each of the four display corners, once as a line and once as a box. You can also select “Stealth Mode” which displays the annunciators only when you make a change and then hides it when you press a key.

Default is “Stealth Mode.”

Annunciators

Use cursor up and down keys to

Adjust.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 137

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

5) Backlight

(59XX, 17XX)

This adjusts the intensity (brightness) of the display backlight. The intensity can be set from 0 (off) to 15 (fully on). Keep in mind that the backlight uses considerable battery power. To conserve battery power, keep the intensity and duration of the backlight as low as possible. Use the up and down arrow keys to adjust the intensity of the backlight. Press the up arrow key to increase the intensity, the down arrow key to decrease. Press

[Enter] when finished to return to the LCD Parms screen.

BLight Intensity

Use cursor up and down keys to

Adjust.

6) Key Uppercase

When enabled, 6) Key Uppercase causes the alphabetic keys (A–Z) to display as uppercase characters regardless of the shift or caps lock mode settings.

7) Scroll Window

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

7) Scroll Window defines the cursor movement, just how far it moves with each press of the arrow keys.

Default is 1) Tab Size .

1) Tab Size

Moves the cursor by the amount configured for 3) Define Width and

4) Define Height .

2) Screen Size

Causes the cursor to move by the virtual screen size selected in

2) LCD Parms under the Main Menu.

3) Define Width

and

4) Define Height

These options customize the x-axis and y-axis (up and down) movement of the cursor when 1) Tab Size is selected.

Default is 8.

Scroll Window

1) Tab Size

2) Screen size

3) Define Width

4) Define Height

138 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

7) More

(700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Select 7) More to access the following screen:

LCD Parms

1) Scroll Window

2) Menu Settings

3) Toolbar Options

1) Scroll Window

(700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

1) Scroll Window defines the cursor movement, just how far it moves with each press of the arrow keys.

Default is 1) Tab Size .

2) Menu Settings

(700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

When you select this option, you are prompted for a password. The default password is cr52401 .

The set up current menu settings are listed on the right in the Current

Items box The available items that you can add to the current menu settings are listed on the left in the Available Items box. To select an item, tap that item, then tap either >> or << button to move the item.

To rearrange the order the items are displayed in the Current Items box, select an item from the list, then use the Up or Dn buttons to move the selected item up or down the list.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 139

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

This configures the way menu options are listed when the user taps the

Menu Settings button created by the toolbar settings. When this button is pressed, the following menu would appear. See page 79 for information.

3) Toolbar Options

(700 Series, CK31, CV60)

When you select this option, you are prompted for a password. The default password is cr52401 .

140 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

In the Current Items box on the right, are the set toolbar values. The items you can include in the toolbar are listed under Available Items on the left.left hand side is the available items that you can add to the toolbar.

To select an item, tap that item, then tap the appropriate >> or << buttons to move the item to the other box.

To rearrange the order that items are displayed in the toolbar, select an item from the Current Items list, then use the Up or Dn buttons to move the selected item up or down the list of items shown in the toolbar.

As you select an item, Item Width shows the default width value and the current row width is recalculated. On 700 Series and CK31 Terminals, the maximum toolbar width is 240 pixels. On a CV60 Terminal, the maximum toolbar width is 800 pixels.

Note : We do not test for the maximum width of terminal displays. If the toolbar exceeds the maximum width of your display, then the items in the toolbar that go past the maximum width are not shown and the data that is not visible is not checked for errors.

Under Available Items :

S Select “Host IP” to display the current IP address of the host or DNS name for the host in the toolbar.

S Select “Power Indicator” to display (in a graphical form) the percentage of the battery life still available in the toolbar. Below is a color chart:

Color

Green

Yellow

Red

Brown

Percentage of Available Battery Life

Above 66%

Between 33% and 66%

Below 33%

Unknown

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 141

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S Select “Menu Settings” to add an “M” button to your toolbar. Tap this to access the menu settings selected from the menu settings screen in option two under LCD parms. Default settings bring up this screen:

S Select “Switch Session” to add an “S” button to your toolbar. Tap this to access Session Switching. See page 157 for more information on session switching.

Note that if you tap this button while in the TE menus, no action will occur.

S Select “Exit” to add an “EXIT” button to your toolbar. Tap this button to exit the TE 2000 application. Enter the password (default is cr52401) , then tap Yes to continue.

142 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S Select “Signal Indicator” to show the RSSI (Radio or Ready Signal

Strength Indicator) which displays the RSSI frequency retrieved from the radio module. The RSSI indicator is updated every 200 milliseconds. The color scheme is set up as follows.

Color

Dark Green

Light Green

Yellow

Orange

Red

Status of RSSI

100% Excellent

80% Favorable

60% Good

40% Poor

20% Bad

S Select “Term IP” to display the IP address of the terminal. If the IP address is not known because the DCHP address is not assigned to the terminal, then the literal “unknown” is displayed in this area.

S Select “SIP Toggle” to add a “T” button to your toolbar. Tap the “T” button to toggle the SIP to its new state without regard to the SIP

Toggle setting in the TE menus.

S Select “Empty” to include a set number of blank pixels on the toolbar.

S Select “New Row” to divide your toolbar into two rows. All items after the new row then shows the new width of the toolbar in the selected row. Use the Up and Dn arrows to position where in your current toolbar menus you want to split the toolbar.

S Select “Session 1,” “Session 2,” “Session 3,” or “Session 4” to reserve space on the toolbar to display the session name first if entered or the IP address or DNS name of the host that to which that session is connected. Then, tap on this toolbar section to switch to that session. If no session name, IP address or DNS name is entered, then space is reserved on the toolbar and is left empty.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 143

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Example

In this example, the toolbar has an “Exit” option, is set to “Session 1,” displays the RSSI status, and is also set to “Session 2.” Session 1” is definted to have the session name “CFNK” and Session 2 shows the IP address

“136.179.84.175.”

Exit Session 1 set to session name

RSSI Session 2 set to IP address

Note : Press Defaults to reset the toolbar to its default values.

3) Beeper Setup (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK30, CK31)

The 3) Beeper Setup menus adjust the beeper tones for key clicks (presses) and error conditions.

For 17XX Terminals , 3) Beeper Select directs the audio output to the internal buzzer or to a headset.

Beeper Setup

1) Key Click

2) Error Tone

3) Beeper select

144 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

1) Key Click

Use 1) Key Click to adjust the frequency and length (duration) of the sound made when a key is pressed. To adjust the key click tone, press the appropriate option, then press the up/down arrow keys to make the desired adjustment. Each key press is accompanied by a tone at the new frequency or length. Press [Enter] to return to the 1) Key Click screen.

1) Volume

(59XX)

Press [1] , then the up/down arrow keys to adjust the volume from 0 to 32.

2) Length

Press [2] , then the up/down arrow keys to adjust the length from 0 to 10.

3) Frequency

(6400, 17XX, 11XX)

Press [3] , then the up and down arrow keys to adjust the tone frequency in steps from 0 to 32.

Volume

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust

Key Click> xx

Frequency

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust

Key Click> xx

Key Click

1) Volume

2) Length

3) Frequency

[1]

1) Volume is for 59XX

3) Frequency is for

6400, 17XX, 11XX

[2]

Length

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust

Key Click> xx

[3]

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 145

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) Error Tone

2) Error Tone adjusts the length and frequency of the tone made when an error occurs (for example, pressing an invalid key). The 2) Error Tone adjustments, and the procedures for making them are identical to the

1) Key Click adjustments. Press 2) Length to set the length. The range is

1 through 10, which equates to a 500 to 5000 ms beep for all errors.

Default error tone length is 3 (or 1500 ms) .

For version 6.73 or greater , the range is 1 through 10, but now equates to a

50 to 500 ms beep for all errors. The default error tone length is still 3

(but for 150 ms).

Error Tone

1) Volume

2) Length

1) Volume is for

59XX

Volume

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust

Error Tone> xx

[1] [2]

Length

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust

Error Tone> xx

3) Beeper Select

(6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX)

For 17XX, 11XX , both buzzers are not allowed to beep simultaneously when using a headset. If both options are enabled, the head set buzzer will beep first before the internal buzzer. If you are using the RS-232 port for communications, enable 1) Beep Internal and disable 2) Beep Head Set .

1) Beep Internal

Press [1] to direct the audio to the internal beeper.

Default is enabled.

2) Beep Head Set

(17XX, 11XX)

Press [2] to direct sound to the headset.

Beeper Setup

1) Beep Internal

2) Beep Head Set 2) Beep Head Set is for 17XX,

11XX

146 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Tests

Intermec Systems Engineers use the 4) Tests menus to verify terminal operation during environmental stress tests, peripherals, the display, RF communications, and memory.

Tests

1) Peripherals

2) Converters

3) Memory View

4) Packet Driver

5) Numbers

6) Timed Numbers

2) Converters is for 59XX

3) Memory View and

4) Packet Driver are for 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX,

11XX

5) Numbers and

6) Timed Numbers are blank for 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

1) Peripherals

1) Peripherals tests terminal peripheral devices, such as radio, RS-232, display, keyboard, and scanner. Detailed descriptions of each peripheral test follows.

Peripherals

1) Radio Test

2) RS232 Test

3) Display Test

4) Keyboard Test

5) Scanner Test

1) Radio Test is for

6400, 5055 802.11 (Lucent) radios

2) RS232 Test ,

3) Display Test , and

4) Keyboard Test are for

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

1) Radio Test

(802.11 (Lucent) Radios — 6400, 5055)

Several factors influence the rate at which a frame is transmitted. First, the radio’s transmission rate is configured in the net.cfg

file. The keyword

Transmit_Rate in net.cfg

holds a numeric value for the transmission rate.

The transmission rate is also affected by the characteristics of the RF link.

If the radio encounters problems sending a higher transmission rate because the RF link is weak, busy, or noisy, the radio may retry the transmission at a lower data rate. Thus, the TxRate reported may be lower than the configured transmission rate. Only the transmission rate of the most recent and successful transmission is reported.

Transmit_Rate values and their respective supported transmission rates available in the high speed Lucent radios are as follows:

1 Fixed Low (1 Mb/s) 5 Fixed High (11 Mb/s)

2 Fixed Standard (2 Mb/s) 4 ARS Standard (2 Mb/s)

3 ARS High (11 Mb/s default ) 4 ARS Medium (5.5 Mb/s)

4 Fixed Medium (5.5 Mb/s)

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 147

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S PRI

The primary version of low-level radio firmware.

S SEC

The secondary version of the low-level radio firmware.

S RFLINK

A general description of the RF connection overall quality between Lucent radios in the terminal and radios in the Access Point. The Lucent radio grades the RF link on a scale from 0–92, representing the RF channel Signal-to-Noise Ratio. The RF link quality descriptions are assigned as: 0–23 “Adequate,” 24–47 “Good,” or 48–92 “Excellent.”

S SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio)

Calculated by dividing the RF signal level by the RF noise level. The result is a number that indicates the overall communications quality of the RF link and is expressed in dBm.

S SSID (Service Set ID)

A 32-character, alphanumeric string that identifies the service set, or infrastructure, with which the terminal is currently associated. The

SSID is a user-configurable parameter and is configured by the keyword

“WaveLAN_Network_Name” in the net.cfg

file. Setting the keyword to

“ANY” allows the station to associate with any service set.

S B SSID (Basic Service Set ID)

The 6-byte MAC address of the Lucent radio in the Access Point with which the station is associated. The Lucent radio in the terminal may associate with a non-Lucent (but 802.11-compliant) radio in an Access

Point. Looking at the first three bytes of the MAC address (OUI) can help identify the Access Point radio’s manufacturer.

Example

An OUI of “00601D” points to a Lucent radio, while “0020A6” indicates a Proxim radio.

S TxRate

The data rate (in Mb/s) of the last message transmitted by the Lucent radio. The default TXRate of 2 Mb/s and will be displayed when the terminal starts up and has not transmitted a frame yet. High speed Lucent radios are capable of data rates of 1 Mb/s, 2 Mb/s, 5.5 Mb/s, and

11 Mb/s. The TxRate 5.5 Mb/s data rate is displayed as 6 Mb/s. This occurs because the Lucent radio reports an integer value for current transmission data rate, so the data rate of 5.5 Mb/s is rounded up to 6

Mb/s.

Radio Test

PRI:

SEC: v4.0

v4.52

RFLINK: Excellent

SNR: 99dBm

SSID: xxxxxxx

B SSID: xxxxxxxxxxxx

TxRate:xMb/s std

Primary version of Lucent driver

Secondary version of driver

RF link quality

Signal-to-Noise ratio

Network name in use

MAC address of access point

Data rate

148 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2) RS232 Test

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Tests the data communication port on the terminal, requiring a special loop-back connector that links the following input and output pins on the data connector:

S TX output to the RX input

S DTR output to the DSR input

S CTS output to the RTS input

To run the test, select 2) RS232 Test , attach the loop-back connector to the port connector on the terminal, then press [Enter] . The display changes to the second RS232 Test menu shown below. The condition of each line-pair displays as passing or failing the test. If any test fails, return the terminal for service.

RS232 Test

Attach RS232

Loopback

Connector

Press Enter

RS232 Test

RTS-CTS: PASS

DTR–DSR: PASS

TX-RX: PASS

Any Key To Stop

3) Display Test

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

3) Display Test tests the operation of and activates each element in the terminal LCD panel. If a line appears broken, or there are gaps in the display, replace the LCD panel.

1 From the Display Test menu, press [Enter] to start the test. The display screen is painted with a series of vertical lines. Visually inspect the lines.

All lines should appear clear and complete (no broken segments).

2 Press [Enter] to move to a screen drawn with horizontal lines. Visually inspect the lines using the same criteria.

3 Press [Enter] to move to the final screen. Visually inspect the painted black lines which should be uniformly black for monochrome displays and uniformly white for color displays.

4 Press [Enter] to return to the 1) Peripherals menu.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 149

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Keyboard Test

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Tests each key on the terminal keypad or 5055 external keyboard. Press each key, except the [Enter] key, and a character corresponding to the pressed key should appear on the display.

Keyboard Test

Press a key.

ENTER To exit

Key = hex(0033) = 3

5) Scanner Test

This option tests the operation of an attached bar code scanner. From this menu, scan an enabled bar code. The bar code and the bar code length should appear on the display to pass. Press [Enter] to exit the test.

Scanner Test

Scan Code>

TEST-SHEET

Length>10

2) Converters

(59XX)

Use this option to test the analog-to-digital (A to D) and the digital-toanalog (D to A) converters. The RSSI Test ( not available on all radios ) offers a choice of graphics displays of the received radio signals. Press any key to exit.

Converters

1) A to D

2) D to A

150 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

3) Memory View

(6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX)

This menu is reserved for engineering test and evaluation. Press [F1] to exit out of this test, [F2] to view the heap, [F3] to view the far heap, or

[F4] to do a memory dump.

Memory View

F1 - Exit

F2 - Heap

F3 - Far Heap

F4 - Memory Dump

Address: xxxxxx

4) Packet Driver

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

4) Packet Driver tests accuracy of data transmissions to/from the terminal.

Packet Driver

3) Packet Stats

4) Histogram

3) Packet Stats is for 6400,

5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

3) Packet Stats

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Shows the number of packets sent and received, number of errors, and number of packets dropped.

Receive Statistics

Pkt

Chr

Err

Lost xxx xxx xxx xxx

Transmit Statistics

Pkt

Chr

Err xxx xxx xxx

Transaction Statistics

Qty

Sec

Qty/Min xxx

Ops xxx xxx xxx

* See Text

’Histogram Options’

RTC Statistics

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 151

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

4) Histogram

An Intermec engineer may ask you to access this menu if your terminal has problems. From this menu you can provide the Intermec system engineer with vital information about your unit.

The actual menus are not shown in this manual, however some of the general terminology is shown below. Several of the menu options, such as

“Clear. . ., ” are password-protected and are only accessible if the engineer provides you with the correct password. An Intermec system engineer will work with you on these selections. Terminology you might see:

S avg tx time

S avg trans time

S send retries rcv retries

S ptt (push-to-talk) count S reset count

S addrs on list S interval time

S poll no data S time bucket #

Histogram

1) Start

2) Stop

3) View

5) Numbers

(blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

5) Numbers checks the operation of the terminal microprocessor. During the test, the terminal display is filled with hexadecimal numbers that move across the screen horizontally and scroll vertically. Character movement indicates that the processor is still running. To stop the test, press any key.

This test is helpful in detecting lockups during severe operating conditions.

6) Timed Numbers

(blank for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

6) Timed Numbers does the same thing as 5) Numbers except that it keeps track of the time in seconds that it took to run the test. The test terminates when a key is pressed or when 65,536 numbers are displayed.

5) Version Info (Information)

5) Version Info shows the name, version, and release date of the program you are using, the version of the radio driver, and the MAC address of the

6400, 5055, or 11XX Terminal. See Chapter 1, “ Getting Started ,” for TE program names.

MLID Name and MLID ver are for 6400, 5055

Version Info

Firmware

<TE Program Name>

Version

Date

MLID Name

MLID ver

(mac address)

<number>

<ddmmyy>

ZZZZZZ xx.xx

152 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

6) Exit Menus

Note : If direct connect is used, the terminal may reboot upon exiting the

TE configuration menu.

Use 6) Exit Menus to exit the TE configuration menus. If you changed any parameter settings, the terminal displays the following when you exit the menus.

Save Parms

Enter ’Y’ to save parms

If you press [Y] (“yes”), you are prompted for a password. “cr52401” is the default password.

Save Parms

Enter

Password

> .......

After you enter the correct password, your settings are saved to Flash, and the terminal may reboot. (Some changes automatically reboot the terminal.) If you press a key other than [Y] , you exit the menus and the new settings are not saved. In this case, the new settings are lost when you reboot your terminal.

When you exit the TE configuration menus, the following information appears:

<TE program name> <version>

Session: <number>

Host:

<data stream>

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 153

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

7) More (Main Menu 2)

Select 7) More to open the Main Menu 2 screen.

Main Menu 2

1) Keyboard Opts

2) Save Parms

3) Cloning Opts

4) Session Menu

3) Cloning Opts is for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX

4) Session Menu is for 2415 (WTP), 2425

(WTP), 2435A (WTP), 2455 (WTP), 2475 (WTP),

248X (WTP), 6400, 5020 (TCP/IP), 5055, 17XX,

11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

1) Keyboard Opts

Use 1) Keyboard Opts > 1) Type-Ahead to key in information when the terminal cannot immediately send data to the host computer.

1) Type-Ahead enters information when the terminal cannot immediately send data to the host.

Keyboard Opts

1) Type—Ahead

154

This stores keystrokes after the Input Inhibited annunciator (below) appears on the status line, and then saves them for the next input field.

Type-ahead is enabled by default.

Input Inhibited annunciator

2) Save Parms

(Parameters)

Use 2) Save Parms to retain the changes made to TE configuration settings. When saved, changes become the default settings for the terminal.

Note : Use this option sparingly. Each time it is used, additional memory space is occupied because previously saved changes are not erased. The memory cannot be recovered on 59XX, 17XX, and 11XX Terminals without reflashing.

Ensure that the parameters are correct before choosing 2) Save Parms .

When selected, you are prompted to enter a seven-character password. The default password is”cr52401,” which can be altered with a custom configuration to be a string of 1 to 10 characters long. After you enter the correct password, your changes are written to Flash.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

If an error is made or the incorrect password is entered, the terminal will return to 2) Save Parms screen without saving your entries.

Save Parms

Enter

Password:

> . . . . . . .

Save Parms

Working

Please Wait

........

3) Cloning Opts

(59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Note : 3) Cloning Opts is disabled for 59XX Terminals.

These options transfer the application program or parameter settings from one terminal to another. All three choices are password-protected, with

“cr52401” as the default password. To perform this function you need a cloning cable and both terminals set for cloning.

Cloning Opts

1) Clone Prgms

2) Clone Parms

3) Receive Parms

1 Connect the two terminals together using the cloning cable. Use cable

P/N: 216-911-001, with radio terminals containing 12-volt Flash (see illustration on page 156) for connecting with the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger (see illustration on page 156) .

2 Plug the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger into an ac outlet. Use cable P/N: 216-909-001, with radio terminals containing 5-volt Flash.

You may use the 12-volt Flash cable, but this is optional.

3 Turn on the source terminal from which to copy the application.

4 Press 3) Cloning Opts , then 1) Clone Prgms .

5 Key in the password.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 155

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

6 Hold down the [I] key while turning on the terminal receiving the program. The application program will copy into the receiving terminal.

To Source

Terminal

To NC1100

Charger

To Receiving

Terminal

12-Volt Cable (P/N: 216-911-001)

5-Volt Cable (P/N: 216-909-001)

To Source Terminal To Receiving

Terminal

This illustrations shows the FLASH cloning cable connections as they pertain to step 1 on the previous page.

To clone parameters from one terminal to another, first ensure the desired parameters are already set in the terminal you wish to transfer from. Then:

1 Connect the terminals together using the cloning cable. Data Terminals with 12-volt FLASH use P/N: 216-911-001. Data Terminals with

5-volt FLASH use P/N: 216-909-001.

2 With both terminals turned ON, press 3) Cloning Opts on both.

3 On the source terminal (the terminal with the parameters from which to copy) , press 2) Clone Parms .

4 On the receiving terminal, press 3) Receive Parms . If using the cable that requires the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger, make sure it is connected to the NC1100 Power Supply and Charger.

156

Follow the alignment from the NC1100 power supply to the cloning cable connection. This illustration pertains to step 1 on page 155.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

Note: For 700 Series, CK31, and CV60 Terminals , the following menu appears after double-tapping the upper-left corner of your display.

4) Session Menu

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X with WTP, 700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60 with TCP/IP, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Note: 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals with UDP Plus do not allow multiple sessions.

4) Session Menu defines different host communication sessions, designates a “hot key” that switches quickly between sessions, and assigns sessions customizable host names (or, friendly names).

1) Switch

Use this option to change the current session. The current (or intended) session must be identified (or designated) before setting Parameters.

2) Set Hot Key

(available on units supporting session-switching)

Displays the current hot key. Use the up and down keys to view the available choices. Press [Enter] to designate a key for the hot key.

3) Copy Setup

(password-protected)

For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX Terminals , this copies parameters from the background session to the current session.

For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals , this copies parameters from the current session to the session chosen. The copied data is grayed out and the chosen session is outlined with a box, like in this example:

Sample screen from CV60 Terminal

4) Session Name

(700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Use this to assign customizable host names (or, friendly names) to each session. Enter a name for Session 1, then press [Enter] to return to the Session Menu. You may use up to 64 characters for each name.

Sample screen from CV60 Terminal

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 157

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

To assign a name to another session, press [1] to switch to that session, return to the Session Menu, then press [4] to assign a name to that session.

Session Menu

1) Switch

2) Set Hot Key

3) Copy Setup

4) Session Name 4) Session Name is for

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,

2475, 248X, 6400, 5020, 5055,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK31

Select Session

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust

[1]

Session: X

<datastream>

Host: xxxx

[1]

For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60

Set Hot Key

Use Cursor Up

And Down Keys

To Adjust

< xx >

[2] [3]

Session 1

Session Name

[4]

1 Cursor left or right, then press [Enter]; or press a number to pick a session.

2 The IP address or DNS name assigned to the selected session.

3 The terminal emulation assigned to the selected session.

Restarting Terminal Emulation

Note : The reset firmware bar code is not supported on the 5020, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, or CV60 Terminals. Instead, do the cold-start function to exit the TE 2000 application and return to the

Windows CE main menu.

You need to restart your TE 2000 application if you are having problems or if you want to reconnect to the host with a new configuration. Restarting your TE 2000 application also clears the auto-login information, preventing another user from establishing a TE 2000 session using your login information.

158 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

You can restart your TE 2000 application by either scanning the following

Reset Firmware bar code or by using the 6) Cold Start option in the TE

2000 configuration Main Menu. Both methods reset all terminal firmware and the application and run the application in a new session.

Reset Firmware

*/M.*

*-.*

The terminal restarts your TE application using the configuration saved in

CONFIG.DAT, or follow this procedure:

1 At the third initialization screen or anywhere in a TE 2000 session, access the Main Menu by pressing the appropriate key combination ( see page 4 ).

COPR. 1991-2005

INTERMEC. ALL

RIGHTS RESERVED

V <version number>

<release date>

TE 2000(TM)

<program name> <version>

Host: <host name>

<emulation type>

<program name> <version>

<emulation type>

Host: <host name>

<program name> <version>

Session: <current session number>

<session name>

<emulation type>

Host: <host name>

<device name>

For Version 8.00 or greater For Version 7.26 or greater

Note : If not connected to the Intermec Application Server or host computer, or have problems accessing the Main Menu, reset your terminal to go to the initialization screens.

2 Select 1) Set-up Parms , then enter the “cr52401” password.

Do not press

Enter.

3 Select 6) Cold Start , press [Y] when prompted to restart, then start using the application or change the TE configuration.

See the terminal’s user guide or manual for information on how to recover from a lock-up condition.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 159

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals

The following instructions are specific for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455,

2475, and 248X Terminals.

You can configure several options for TE 2000 5250 on your Trakker Antares

Terminal, including:

S UDP Plus or TCP/IP communications

S VT/ANSI options

S Main Menu password

Note : You can also set the password for UDP Plus Terminals from the Intermec Application Server.

You can access the TE configuration menus when the initialization screens appear or once you establish a TE session. The TE initialization screens appear each time you reboot the terminal or restart your application.

Note : Some parameters for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X

Terminals are available through the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System. They are not reproduced in the TE configuration menus. See the terminal’s user manual for information about the menu system.

6400 Computer

The terminal emulation screens support terminals running Intermec Terminal Emulation or 6400 TCP/IP software. This describes the menus used to set operating and scanning parameters for the hand-held computer.

Additional information can be found in the technical overview for your emulation program.

Note : Ensure there is a fully-charged battery pack in the 6400 Computer before setting parameters.

Opening the Main Menu

The Main Menu is the first screen displayed when you open the computer menus. All other menus are accessed from the Main Menu. To open the

Main Menu, press the Yellow shift, then the Blue shift key. Briefly, these keys generally operate as:

S Blue shift, for functions labeled by blue legends above the keys.

S Green shift, for functions labeled by green legends above the keys.

S Yellow shift, for functions labeled by yellow legends above the keys.

S [Blue] , then [Green] shift is CAPS LOCK.

S [Blue] , then [Yellow] shift is Alphabetic Lock (6400 Computer 41-key units).

S [Yellow] , then [Blue] is Terminal Emulation menus; your particular emulation software probably treat the keys for contrast control, backlighting and other functions differently.

160 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS

Do a cold-restart to exit the current emulation program and return back to the DOS keyboard layout. Press [Y] , press [Enter] several times to put you at the DOS C:\ prompt. To exit to the beginning of the current emulation, press and hold the Blue and Yellow shift keys, and both [ENT] keys to do the hard reset.

5055 Data Collection PC

If you are running terminal emulations and ever update the DOS load on the internal SanDisk IDE drive on the 5055 PC, be aware that when updating 50DS1000, avoid copying the CONFIG.SYS and

AUTOEXEC.BAT files. The new versions of these two files may interfere with existing applications, such as Terminal Emulations. If affected, Terminal Emulations will automatically run on boot up.

In all other situations, do copy the CONFIG.SYS and

AUTOEXEC.BAT files.

This contains information about the terminal emulations with keyboards supported for the Intermec

5055 Data Collection PC.

The 5055 PC supports terminal emulations with rugged keyboards.

FWP650H0 is DOS-based and is not compatible with Windows DOS prompts.

An external PS/2-compatible keyboard is required for configuring and using terminal emulations.

Terminal emulation font files are needed to generate the various character fonts. See the related terminal emulation programmer’s reference guide for additional information.

Programs to Create Terminal Emulation Menus

The Terminal Emulation Menu Screens are provided to support terminals running Intermec Terminal Emulation software. This describes the menus that set operating and scanning parameters for the 5055 PC. Additional information can be found in the programmer’s guide or technical overview for your emulation program.

When you power on the 5055 PC, the AUTOEXEC.BAT file executes the following programs, in sequential order, to create the terminal emulation menus. Listed are their descriptions.

S LSL

Creates the link layer for the protocol stack.

S rl2pcm

Includes the Proxim radio driver for the Proxim RangeLAN2 radio, or wvlan43

Includes the WaveLAN/IEEE radio driver for the 802.11b HR radio.

S 6500ikps

Installs multitasking, beeper, and key remapping TSRs.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 161

Chapter 4 — Using the Terminal Emulation Menus

S wtppkt

Includes the WTP Packet driver program if a WTP link accesses the host computer, or ethdrv and odipkt

Includes the Ethernet and ODI Packer driver programs if a TCP/IP link and a controller are used to gain access to the host computer.

S 65scn7b -c1

Activates the scanner driver.

S 6500dbcs

Intercepts INT10 and display characters on the display.

S fwp650h0

Activates the terminal emulation program.

Press <Alt> , then [M] on the external keyboard to access the setup menus.

Note : On terminal emulation keyboards, use the yellow key in place of the

<Alt> key. For example, to access the Setup Menus, press [Yellow] , then

[M] .

Opening the Main Menu

The Main Menu is the first screen displayed when you open the computer menus. All other menus are accessed from the Main Menu.

To open the Main Menu, press the Yellow shift, then the Blue shift

(MENU) key. Briefly, these keys generally operate as:

S Blue shift, for functions labeled by blue legends above the keys.

S Green shift, for functions labeled by green legends above the keys.

S Yellow shift, for functions labeled by yellow legends above the keys.

S [Blue] , then [Green] shift is CAPS LOCK.

S [Yellow] , then [Blue] shift is Terminal Emulation menus; your particular emulation software probably treat the keys for contrast control, backlighting and other functions differently.

To Exit Emulation Mode and Return to DOS

Do a cold-restart to exit the current emulation program and return back to the DOS keyboard layout. Press [Y] , then press [Enter] several times to arrive at the DOS C:\ prompt. To exit to the beginning of the current emulation, press and hold the Blue and Yellow shift keys, and both [ENT] keys to do the hard reset.

162 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Customizing Your

Configuration

This chapter describes the procedures you can use to customize the standard TE 2000 3270 program by Intermec Technologies Corporation. You customize the TE 2000 program by creating or modifying configuration files, and then downloading them to your terminal to do the following:

S Use the auto-login feature to send the same login information each time you login to the host (page 164) .

S Create a custom parameter set-up file to download a customized file to all terminals so they have the same setup information (see note below) .

S CUSTOM.DAT Settings (page 174)

S TE_SETTINGS.INI Settings (page 197)

S Change the text of TE configuration menus or system messages (page

212) .

S Preinitialize the 3270 TE program (page 213) .

S Remap national characters (page 219) .

S Implement ITCCOLOR.DAT attribute colors (page 220) .

S Substitute national characters (page 222) .

Note: For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals with TE 2000 application versions 8.00 or greater, if a CONFIG.DAT file is present on your terminal, its settings are backed up in a CONFIG.OLD file, then written into a TE_SETTINGS.INI file. If the CONFIG.DAT file is not on your terminal, all settings are written to the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 163

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Using the Auto-Login Feature

Use the auto-login feature to send the same login information each time you login to the host. When you start the TE 2000 application, the terminal checks for an auto-login script file. If a script file exists, the terminal runs the login commands from the auto-login script file before the TE

2000 program starts.

To use the auto-login feature, you need to develop an auto-login script file and load the auto-login script file on the terminal. These steps are covered on the following pages along with a list of the necessary control characters and the procedure for disabling the auto-login feature.

Developing Auto-Login Script Files

A typical auto-login script file consists of Input and InputHidden commands followed by a HostName command, followed by a series of Wait-

For and Send commands. A very simple script file may not have any input commands if all of the terminals are using the same account.

Note : The auto-login script must be an ASCII text file with

AUTOLOG.SCR as the required file name or the file is not processed.

Commands

You can use several commands to create auto-login script files. All commands are case-sensitive. For example, WaitFor is a command, but

Waitfor is not a valid command. For examples of script files, see “Sample

Auto-Login Script Files” on page 171.

S Input

This is called with two parameters. The first one is a character string enclosed in quotes used as a prompt to the user. The second one is a string variable name indicating where the text string will be stored.

S InputHidden

Same as the Input script command except that user input is echoed as a string of asterisks.

S HostName

This command is case-sensitive and must be presented as mixed-case letters.

HostName is followed by a character string enclosed in quotes.

The character string can be a host name or an asterisk. The HostName command acts as an IF clause. If the host name matches, the following section of the script file is executed up to the next HostName command. If an asterisk is used, it matches any host name.

Note : If a session name (friendly name) is entered, then this is used in place of the host name or server IP name to section off the autologin script.

S WaitFor

Wait for a list of up to ten strings. The strings must be enclosed in quotes and must be separated by a comma. The strings cannot exceed

20 characters in length.

164 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

S Send

This command sends a character string enclosed in quotes or a string variable to the host. The character string enclosed in quotes can have embedded IBM mnemonics in the TE 2000 3270 application.

S Pause “xxxxx”

Delays the terminal for x milliseconds, halts terminal operation from receiving and processing for the duration specified.

S PromptSessionStart

This command is a predefined variable. If this variable is defined and set to any value other than 0, the application prompts the user to press

[Enter] before starting a Telnet session with the host. Do not put quotes around the variable.

S Restart “x”

Restarts the autologin script file. The “x” is a dummy argument.

S Keyboard “0”

Disables the keyboard. Key presses are ignored. For additional information, see Note below.

S Keyboard “1”

Enables the keyboard. Key presses are processed. The keyboard is enabled by default. For additional information, see Note below.

S # (pound symbol)

Documents the script file. Text following a # (pound) symbol is considered a comment unless the # symbol is in a quoted string.

Note : Input the Keyboard “0” or Keyboard “1” command into the autologin script file after the PromptSessionStart command (if present) and the HostName command (if present). Also turn on the keyboard command before another HostName command is found in the file.

Search Strings

Some auto-login search string limitations are as follows. You can use line wrapping to look for unique strings.

S The searches are case sensitive.

S The maximum search string length is 20 characters.

S Each WaitFor command searches the entire screen from the top.

If a screen from the host has multiples of the word you are looking for, you can use the preceding spaces to identify a unique string.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 165

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Example

If the screen sent to the terminal is:

Linux rlogin 2.4.6

The autologin script would be:

PromptSessionStart=1

HostName “*”

#wait for host login screen and send login and password

WaitFor “login”

Send “billy<ENTER>”

WaitFor “password”

Send “letmein<ENTER>”

In this example, you can search for the three leading spaces from the end of the previous line to make a unique search string.

Control Characters

You can include control characters in your auto-login script file. Enclose the control character with < > (angle brackets) in AUTOLOG.SCR. The following table lists control characters for the TE 2000 3270 application.

Note : Some control characters may be represented by their hexadecimal values. For a description of control characters and hexadecimal equivalents, see the full tables in Appendix C, “ Conversion Tables .”

Control Characters for Auto-Login Script File

Control Character Definition

<CLEAR>

<CR>

<CUR_DN>

<CUR_LF>

<CUR_RT>

<CUR_UP>

<DEL>

<ERS_EOF>

<HOME>

Clear

Carriage return

Cursor down

Cursor Left

Cursor Right

Cursor Up

Delete

Erase EOF

Function keys

Home

Control Character Definition

<INS>

<LTAB>

<NEWLN>

<PA1>

<PA2>

<PA3>

<RESET>

<RTAB>

<SPACE>

Insert

Left Tab

New Line

PA1

PA2

PA3

Error reset

Right Tab

Space

166 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Loading the Auto-Login Script File

Follow these procedures to download an auto-login script file to your terminal. The method depends on the type of terminal you are using.

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals

You can download more than one script file to a 2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal, but immediately name the file to be used as AUTOLOG.SCR and name any other script files with different names ending with .SCR. To learn more about transferring files, refer to your terminal’s user manual.

Use one of the following download utilities to copy your completed

AUTOLOG.SCR file to the terminal.

Using Serial Port to Download File

1 Connect the terminal to the development personal computer or host.

For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual or your accessory documentation.

2 Load the AUTOLOG.SCR file into drive C, where the TE application is stored. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.

3 Use T24XCOPY.EXE (from the developer’s kit) to copy the file directly to drive C: on the terminal; or use LOADER.EXE (from the flash upgrade) to copy the file to the terminal in flash mode using the following command: loader AUTOLOG.SCR

Using RF Communications to Download File

Note : Loading the AUTOLOG.SCR file from the Intermec

Server is supported.

Application

1 Copy the AUTOLOG.SCR file to the Intermec Application Server.

2 Configure the download server on the Intermec Application Server to send AUTOLOG.SCR to the terminals in groups of 10 or less.

3 Start the download.

When you reset your terminal, it clears the auto-login information, such as the password and user’s name. You can cancel the auto-login process by pressing any key during the auto-login sequence. When a host session is broken, you can restart the auto-login sequence by rebooting your terminal.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 167

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

168

5020 Data Collection PC

The 5020 Data Collection PC User’s Manual (P/N: 068975) has comprehensive information regarding 5020 file management. Below is an excerpt from the manual.

Downloading a File

1 From the host computer or PC, connect to the 5020 Terminal using a web browser and start the Unit Manager application. For help, see the

5020 PC User’s Manual .

2 Click File Manager to access the main File Manager screen.

3 Click the option button next to the parent directory where the file to be downloaded is located, then click the Go To button to access its contents. To download a file to the current directory on the 5020 Terminal, go to the next step.

4 Go to the File Upload form at the bottom of the main File Manager screen on the host computer and click the Browse button.

5 From the Choose File box on the host computer, select the file to be downloaded to the 5020 Terminal, then click Open to place the path and file name on the File Upload form.

6 On the host computer, click the Upload File button to continue, or click Clear to clear the form and start again. The screen showing the parent directory is refreshed.

If successful, the following confirmation message will appear on the host computer, where “Filename” is the file that was downloaded to the

5020 Terminal: Uploaded file “Filename”

Copying a File

Use the File Manager from the host computer to make a copy of a file.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 of “ Downloading a File ”, then do the following:

1 Click the option button next to the file you want to copy, then click the

Copy button to access the Copy File screen.

2 To save the copied file to the same directory as the original file, enter a unique file name in the New Name field, then click Copy File to create a copy of the file. The screen showing the parent directory is refreshed.

If successful, the following confirmation message will appear on the host computer, where “Filename” is the original file and “New Filename” is the copy: “Filename” copied to “New Filename”

6400, 5055 Terminals

Use INTERLNK/INTERSVR communications to connect your terminal to a personal computer. For help, see “Downloading Files” on page 229.

You must load AUTOLOG.SCR into drive C, where the TE application is stored.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals

The download process requires flash and utility files.

1 Using FLSHCONV.EXE from the TOOLS.EXE file from the flash program, append the AUTOLOG.SCR file to the end of the .HEX program. Below are sample command lines for each terminal type:

S 11XX Terminal with 256K flash (this uses 1180, but applies to all radio types) : flshconv –eC000 –a fwp118c0.hex AUTOLOG.scr

–oNEW1180.HEX

S 11XX Terminal with 512K flash (this uses 1180, but applies to all radio types) : flshconv –eFFC0 –a fwp118h0.hex AUTOLOG.scr

–oNEW1180.HEX

S 17XX Terminal (example uses 1780, but applies to all radio types) ; flshconv –eFFC0 –a fwp178h0.hex AUTOLOG.scr

–oNEW1780.HEX

S 59XX Terminal (example uses 5980, but applies to all radio types) : flshconv –eE000 –a fwp598h0.hex AUTOLOG.scr

–oNEW5980.HEX

2 Using PROGDUX.EXE from the flash files, load the NEW.HEX file onto the terminal. This is a sample command line using the 1780 Terminal: PROGDUX –e NEW178H0.HEX

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals

This procedure requires that you have Microsoft ActiveSync installed on your desktop and that you have established a remote connection to your terminal.

See the following 3-paragraph note.

1 On the terminal, tap Start > ActiveSync > Sync .

2 From your desktop, access the Microsoft ActiveSync, then click Explore to access the contents of the terminal via its “Mobile Device” directory or folder. Browse to the appropriate location where to install files.

3 Also from your desktop, select Start > Windows Explorer , then browse for the files that are to transfer to your terminal.

4 Drag those files from the desktop Windows Explorer to the ActiveSync

“Mobile Device” window.

5 From the terminal, tap Start > Programs > File Explorer , then browse to the location where to place the files. If missing, then ensure all connections and locations are accurate before doing this procedure again.

Note : Always store files such as the AUTOLOG.SCR, REMAP.CFG,

CONFIG.DAT

(for TE 2000 application versions older than 8.00) ,

TE_SETTINGS.INI

(for TE 2000 application versions 8.00 or greater) ,

CFGLIT.DAT, or other such files, in the directory where the TE 2000 executable is stored. This is the root directory on the CV60 Computer, and is the “\CK_FFS” directory on the CK30 or CK31 Computer.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 169

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

On 700 Series Computers, if a Secure Digital card is present, the

“\SDMMC Disk\TE2000” directory contains the executable if installed from a CAB file. If there is no SecureDigital card, the next choice is the

Flash File Store. Finally, if neither is present, then the TE 2000 executable is stored in the “\Program Files” directory.

These extra files are either in the directory with the executable, in the root of the Secure Digital card if present or the Flash File Store if present, or at the very root of the machine, which is the order of precedence. Thus, the root directories are not the default — not the first choice. If the user created a new one of these files and placed it at the root, and another file of the same name existed somewhere else, higher in priority, then the user’s file is ignored. Thus, it is best to place it in the directory with the

TE 2000 executable file.

Disabling the Auto-Login Feature

To disable auto-login, you may rename or delete the AUTOLOG.SCR

file. Renaming the file ensures that you can use the same auto-login script file later by changing the name back to AUTOLOG.SCR. If you want to enable a new script file, you can use the instructions in this section to rename a different script file to AUTOLOG.SCR.

Follow these procedures to disable (or delete) the auto-login script file.

The method depends on the type of terminal you are using.

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals

1 Press the appropriate key sequence or scan the following bar code to access the TRAKKER Antares

2400 Menu System’s Main Menu:

Enter Test and Service Mode

*../M.*

*..-.*

2 Choose System Menu and then choose File Manager.

3 Select drive C. Press Y or B to highlight AUTOLOG.SCR.

4 Press [FnL .

] to delete the file or press [F7] to rename the file.

5 Exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to return to the current session. Restart the TE 2000 application to use it without the autologin.

You can also rename the auto-login script file from your host. For help, refer to your terminal’s user manual.

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals

Via your web browser, access the IP address at http://<IP address>, double-click the File Manager desktop icon, select File , then press the

[Del] key to remove the auto-login feature.

For the terminal, using Microsoft ActiveSync, browse for the auto-login file, right-click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Delete to remove the file from the terminal.

170 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

6400, 5055 Terminals

1 Reboot the terminal to a DOS prompt.

S For the 6400 Computer : press and hold the yellow, blue, and both green enter keys until the terminal resets. Watch the screen as the terminal boots and press 0

(zero) when the prompt appears.

S For the 5055 Data Collection PC : power-cycle the terminal and select the minimum DOS prompt from the boot menu.

2 Rename or delete the AUTOLOG.SCR file.

3 Reboot the terminal again and allow it to complete the boot into terminal emulation.

59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals

To disable auto-login on a 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal, reload the terminal with unmodified flash, then perform a cold start to flush the memory. The flash file does not allow selective erasing; files can be added, but not removed without removing all files.

Sample Auto-Login Script Files

You can use these sample script files as they are or as the starting point for creating your own auto-login script files.

Example 1

Auto-Login With All Terminals Using the Same Account

HostName “*” #Use this to log into any host

WaitFor “login:” #Wait for the login prompt

Send “username<NEWLN>”

WaitFor “Password:”

Send “letmein<ENTER>”

#Send the user name

#Wait for the password prompt

#Send the password

S The HostName command matches the host the user accesses.

S The WaitFor command waits for a string to be displayed by the host.

WaitFor takes up to 10 strings, 20 characters long. The strings must be enclosed in quotes and separated by a comma.

S The first Send command sends a fixed user name. The second Send command sends a fixed password.

S Angle brackets < and > can enclose uppercase mnemonics or hexadecimal values.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 171

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Example 2

Auto-Login With Different User Names and Passwords

Input “Enter user name”, username

InputHidden “Enter password”, password

HostName “*”

WaitFor “login:”

Send username

Send “<NEWLN>”

WaitFor “Password:” prompt

Send password

Send “<ENTER>”

#Prompt for user name

#Prompt for password

#Wait for login prompt

#Send the user name

#Send a carriage return

#Wait for password

#Send the users password

#Send a carriage return

S The Input and Send commands use input variables.

Input commands require a prompt string followed by a comma and a variable name in which to store the string.

S The InputHidden command will display “*” in place of any characters the user types. Place all

Input commands before the first HostName command.

S The Send command only accepts a single argument, so you need two Send commands to send the user name and a carriage return.

Example 3

Auto-Login to an Application

Input “Enter user name”, username

InputHidden ”Enter Password”, password

HostName “*”

WaitFor “login:”

Send username

Send “<NEWLN>”

WaitFor “Password:”

Send password

Send “<ENTER>”

WaitFor “Main Menu”

Send “3”

Send “<ENTER>”

WaitFor “Wip Menu”

Send “1”

Send “<ENTER>”

#Prompt for user name

#Prompt for password

#Wait for login prompt

#Send the user name

#Send a carriage return

#Wait for password prompt

#Send the users password

#Send a carriage return

#Wait for the main menu

#Pick option 3 from menu

#Await work-in-process menu

#Pick option 1 from menu

S Example 3 modifies the script file in Example 2. The additional modification (which starts with

WaitFor “Main Menu”) allows you to move automatically to an application after logging in.

172 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Example 4

Auto-Login With Variable Processing

Input “Enter user name”, username

InputHidden “Enter Password”, password

HostName “BigHost”

WaitFor “User:”

Send username

Send “<NEWLN>”

WaitFor “Password:”

Send password

Send “<ENTER>”

HostName “*”

WaitFor “login:”

Send username

Send “<NEWLN>”

WaitFor “Password:”

Send password

Send “<ENTER>”

WaitFor “Main Menu”

Send “3”

Send “<ENTER>”

WaitFor “Wip Menu”

Send “1”

Send “<ENTER>”

#Prompt for user name

#Prompt for password

#Use script portion for BigHost

#Wait for the user prompt

#Send the user name

#Send a carriage return

#Wait for password prompt

#Send the users password

#Send a carriage return

#Match any host name

#Wait for login prompt

#Send the user name

#Send a carriage return

#Wait for password prompt

#Send the users password

#Send a carriage return

#Wait for the main menu

#Pick option 3 from menu

#Await work-in-process menu

#Pick option 1 from menu

S A section for the host name BigHost is added to the beginning of the script file. If you log into any host other than BigHost, the script file starts at the HostName “*” line. This allows for different processing on each host.

Auto-Login Restart

The Auto-Login Restart command starts the auto-login script file from the correct HostName statement in the script file when a host session is broken. For this command to work, the WaitFor string must match the last data sent from the host. For example, if the WaitFor string is the login prompt “login:” with a space after the colon, the WaitFor string must include a space for the auto-login restart to work.

To use the Auto-Login Restart command, press the keys listed in Chapter

3 , “ Using the Terminal’s Keyboard .” Or, scan the following bar code.

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 173

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Creating a Custom Parameter Set-Up File

You can create a custom 3270 TE set-up file to preset almost any parameter you can set from the TE configuration menus. These parameter settings become the default (cold start) configuration for the terminal.

Go to page 197 for TE_SETTINGS;INI information and settings.

CONFIG.DAT Settings

Note: CHECKCFG.EXE is no longer used except for Trakker Antares

Terminals 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X. This information is included for Trakker Antares users and for those using TE 2000 application versions older than 8.00 on 700 Series, CK30, or CV60 Terminals.

CONFIG.DAT Syntax

The parameter setup file is an ASCII text file that you create which gets converted to a binary file by the CHECKCFG.EXE utility. New terminals do not come with this utility but it is available by request from the system engineer; or, if you ordered the upgrade version, it is included in the

TOOLS.EXE self-extracting file.

You can name the input file as you choose. When you use the

CHECKCFG utility later to verify the file, you must change the output file name to CONFIG.DAT. A field may have zero or more qualifiers.

The syntax of a line is

FieldName = Value; or

Qualifier.FieldName = Value;

S FieldName is the name of the parameter you want to modify.

S Value is the new value for the field.

S Qualifier and FieldName must be ASCII strings that match one of the configuration parameters.

S Value can be an ASCII string or a numeric value, depending on the type of the parameter FieldName specifies. The parameters along with their types and allowable values are listed under “ Parameters and Qualifiers” later in this chapter.

CHECKCFG.EXE ignores blank lines, leading white space (spaces and tabs), and white space on either side of any delimiter (period, equal sign, or semicolon).

In addition, the set-up file converts consecutive white space characters within strings to one space. For example, this line:

Screen Mode = Page Mode ; is the same as: Screen Mode=Page Mode;

174 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

You can set the Value field of any configuration parameter to “?”, which indicates that the TE configuration program should prompt the user for the appropriate value. For example, this parameter causes the terminal to prompt the user to select a screen mode from the list of values. Following is a sample setup file.

Screen Mode = ?;

Program Name = MYCUSTOM;

Screen Mode = Page Mode;

Host A.Port Number = 1;

Data Stream = 3270;

Code 39.Encoded = Enabled;

Extended Cmds = Enabled;

CONFIG.DAT Parameter Formats

You can direct the complete parameter list with value definitions to a file using this command:

CHECKCFG –P CFGLIT.DAT > parms.txt

Each parameter in the setup file is followed by one of three different formats that indicates the type of parameter and the values it can contain.

S Literal strings.

List of fixed values to choose from. Session 1 or 2 may qualify Screen Mode. It may take the value Center Cursor, Corner

Mode, Page Mode, Lazy Mode, or Locked Mode. Session 1 is the default qualifier. These configuration lines are valid:

Screen Mode = Lazy Mode;

Session 1.Screen Mode = Lazy Mode;

Session 2.Screen Mode = Lazy Mode;

S Numeric parameters.

Numeric parameters have minimum and maximum values. Parameters can be either decimal or hexadecimal:

S Decimal parameters consist of digits 0 through 9.

S Hexadecimal parameters consist of 0x or 0X, followed by 1 to 4 digits of 0 through 9, a through f, or A through F. These are equivalent:

160, 0xA0, and 0Xa0.

Port Number is a variable with a minimum value of 0 and a maximum of 65535. These lines are valid:

Port Number = 1;

Session 1.Host A.Port Number = 1;

Session 2.Host A.Port Number = 1;

S String parameters.

String parameters are variables with minimum and maximum lengths.

Program Name is unqualified. It must have eight characters. These configuration lines are valid:

Program Name = ABCDEFGH;

Program Name = FWP248H0;

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 175

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Verifying Your CONFIG.DAT Configuration

Use the CHECKCFG utility to verify that you properly configured your set-up file. CHECKCFG reads your configuration and reports any syntax errors. To get the utility, contact your Systems Engineer.

To verify your configuration, type checkcfg <input config file> cfglit.dat config.dat

S <input config file> is the name of your parameter set-up file.

S CFGLIT.DAT contains the strings that appear in the configuration menus, parameter files, and system messages.

S CONFIG.DAT is the name of the output file you will download to the terminal. You must name this file CONFIG.DAT.

You are ready to download the CONFIG.DAT file to the terminal when

CHECKCFG reports no errors. For download instructions, see

“ Downloading Files” on page 229.

If CHECKCFG reports an error, use a text editor to open and correct the set-up file. This chart lists the system messages CHECKCFG may display.

Default String Description ID #

Can’t open file Could not locate the input config (configuration) file

Bad option name Right side of expression in input config file has an invalid name

Syntax error Input config file contains a syntax error

F000

F001

F002

Bad string length Right side of expression in input config file has a string too long for specified parameter F003

Unknown type Parameter table in config program has a bad value (testing purposes only, should not occur) F004

Value out of range Right side of expression in input config file has an out-of-range # for specified parameter F005

Bad value Right side of expression in input config file has an invalid string for specified parameter F006

Expected numeric Right side of expression in input config file contains nonnumeric data instead of a numeric value

F007

Missing ’=‘

Missing ’;‘

A line in the input config file does not contain the required “=” (equal sign)

A line in the input config file is not terminated by a “;” (semicolon)

F008

F009

CONFIG.DAT Parameters and Qualifiers

Note : If parameters are duplicated, an error is not generated. Instead, the terminal processes the entire file and uses the last entered value of the duplicated parameter.

Parameters in the set-up file apply to all model numbers unless otherwise noted here. The following pages list each parameter and its qualifiers.

Some qualifiers have default values. If you want to use the default value, you can omit the qualifier from the parameter set-up file. Default qualifiers are listed between square brackets “[ ]” in this chapter.

The CFGLIT.DAT file specifies the text of set-up menus or system messages. Parameters and qualifier strings in the set-up file assume you are using the default CFGLIT.DAT file. To customize CFGLIT.DAT, see “Changing Text” on page 212.

176 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Trakker Antares terminals using WTP (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X), support dual sessions. If the terminals use UDP Plus or

TCP/IP, then dual sessions are not supported.

Note : Only WTP terminals support dual sessions (“Session 2”). For a list of terminals with WTP, see Chapter 1, “ Getting Started .”

Set-Up Parameters Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Set-Up Parameters Options

Options

Channel

(900 MHz radio).

Data Stream

Note : For TE 2000 application versions

6.60 and greater,

“VT/ANSI” is the default data stream.

Frequency

(S-UHF radio)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

[Host A].Channel

Host B.Channel

Host C.Channel

[Host A].Data Stream

Host B.Data Stream

Host C.Data Stream

Host Name

[Host A].Frequency

Host B.Frequency

Host C.Frequency

[Host A].Host

Host B.Host

Host C.Host

Values

Terminals using this option

10, 25, 30, 25, 30, 35, 40 6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX

Native (blank if UDP Plus or TCP/IP) , 3270, 5250,

[VT/ANSI]

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 0xFFFFFFFF

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX

Lan ID

Mode

Port Number

[Host A].Lan

Host B.Lan

Host C.Lan

[Host A].Mode

Host B.Mode

Host C.Mode

[Host A].Port Number

Host B.Port Number

Host C.Port Number

Radio Configuration

Number

[Host A].Radio Config#

Host B.Radio Config#

Host C.Radio Config#

String, minimum = 0, maximum = 16 [null string]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 254 [0] applies to 900 MHz

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 15 [0] applies to 2.4 GHz OpenAir

For 900 MHz radio:

DS 225K, DS 090K,

DS 450K

For S-UHF radio :

Freq Agility, Single Freq

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 65535 [23]

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [0]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 177

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Set-Up Parameters Options (continued)

Options

Radio Number

( same as unit number )

Unit Number

(same as radio number)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

[Host A].Radio #

Host B.Radio #

Host C.Radio #

[Host A].Unit #

Host B.Unit #

Host C.Unit #

Values

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 127 [127]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

CK30, CV60 RTC over TCP [Host A].RTC over TCP

Host B.RTC over TCP

Host C.RTC over TCP

Enabled, [Disabled]

Server IP

SNA

[Host A].Server IP

Host B.Server IP

Host C.Server IP

SNA

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 16 [16]

Enabled, [Disabled]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Telnet Telnet [Enabled}*

[Disabled}**

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

* [Enabled] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5055 with TE over IP options .

** [Disabled] is the default for 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CV60.

Terminal Type [Host A].Terminal Type

Host B.Terminal Type

Host C.Terminal Type

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [255]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

178 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Concatenate

MOD 10 Check

ParmsBySession

Redundancy

RS-232 Stream

Scan All Fields

Scan Postamble

Character

Scan Preamble

Character

Scan Timeout

Scanner Type

6400, 5055 support

Laser only

Bar Code Parameters

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Bar Code Parameters

Parameters

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

BC Type Character BC Type Char

Code 39 Encoded Code 39 Encoded

Concatenate

MOD 10 Check

ParmsBySession

Redundancy

RS-232 Stream

Scan All Flds

Scan PostChar

Scan PreChar

Scan Timeout

Scanner Type

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [0]

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 200 [30]

[No Scanner], Wand, Laser,

Wand Emulate, Auto

Detect

Terminals using this parameter

6400, 11XX, 17XX,

59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055, 700

Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

6400, 11XX, 17XX,

59XX

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X, 5020

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 179

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Bar Code Parameters (continued)

Parameters

Stream Scan

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Stream Scan

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this parameter

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Bar Code Symbologies

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Bar Code Symbologies

Symbologies

ABC Codabar

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

ABC Codabar

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Codabar

Code 11

Code 39

Code 93

Code 128

Codabar

Code 11

Code 39

Code 93

Code 128

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this symbology

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

5020, 11XX, 17XX,

59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

180 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Interleaved 2 of 5 Int 2of5

Plessey (6400 does not support Plessey alpha characters)

Plessey

Straight 2 of 5 Str 2of5

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Bar Code Symbologies (continued)

Symbologies

Computer Identics

2 of 5

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

CI 2of5

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

EAN

UPC

EAN

UPC

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this symbology

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 181

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Generic Bar Code Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Note : Generic bar code options must be qualified by one of the bar code symbology strings. For example: “Session 1.UPC.Max Length = 13;”

Generic Bar Code Options

Options

Drop Leading

Drop Trailing

Fixed Length 1

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

UPC.Drop Leading

EAN.Drop Leading

Code 128.Drop Leading

Code 39.Drop Leading

Codabar.Drop Leading

ABC Codabar.Drop Leading

Str 2of5.Drop Leading

Int 2of5.Drop Leading

CI 2of5.Drop Leading

Code 11.Drop Leading

Code 93.Drop Leading

Plessey.Drop Leading

UPC.Drop Trailing

EAN.Drop Trailing

Code 128.Drop Trailing

Code 39.Drop Trailing

Codabar.Drop Trailing

ABC Codabar.Drop Trailing

Str 2of5.Drop Trailing

Int 2of5.Drop Trailing

CI 2of5.Drop Trailing

Code 11.Drop Trailing

Code 93.Drop Trailing

Plessey.Drop Trailing

UPC.Fix Length 1

EAN.Fix Length 1

Code 128.Fix Length 1

Code 39.Fix Length 1

Codabar.Fix Length 1

ABC Codabar.Fix Length 1

Str 2of5.Fix Length 1

Int 2of5.Fix Length 1

CI 2of5.Fix Length 1

Code 11.Fix Length 1

Code 93.Fix Length 1

Plessey.Fix Length 1

Values

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 15 [0]

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

182 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Generic Bar Code Options (continued)

Options

Fixed Length 2

Fixed Length 3

Fixed Length 4

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

UPC.Fix Length 2

EAN.Fix Length 2

Code 128.Fix Length 2

Code 39.Fix Length 2

Codabar.Fix Length 2

ABC Codabar.Fix Length 2

Str 2of5.Fix Length 2

Int 2of5.Fix Length 2

CI 2of5.Fix Length 2

Code 11.Fix Length 2

Code 93.Fix Length 2

Plessey.Fix Length 2

UPC.Fix Length 3

EAN.Fix Length 3

Code 128.Fix Length 3

Code 39.Fix Length 3

Codabar.Fix Length 3

ABC Codabar.Fix Length 3

Str 2of5.Fix Length 3

Int 2of5.Fix Length 3

CI 2of5.Fix Length 3

Code 11.Fix Length 3

Code 93.Fix Length 3

Plessey.Fix Length 3

UPC.Fix Length 4

EAN.Fix Length 4

Code 128.Fix Length 4

Code 39.Fix Length 4

Codabar.Fix Length 4

ABC Codabar.Fix Length 4

Str 2of5.Fix Length 4

Int 2of5.Fix Length 4

CI 2of5.Fix Length 4

Code 11.Fix Length 4

Code 93.Fix Length 4

Plessey.Fix Length 4

Values

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 183

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Generic Bar Code Options (continued)

Options

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Maximum Length UPC.Max Length

EAN.Max Length

Code 128.Max Length

Code 39.Max Length

Codabar.Max Length

ABC Codabar.Max Length

Str 2of5.Max Length

Int 2of5.Max Length

CI 2of5.Max Length

Code 11.Max Length

Code 93.Max Length

Plessey.Max Length

Minimum Length UPC.Min Length

EAN.Min Length

Code 128.Min Length

Code 39.Min Length

Codabar.Min Length

ABC Codabar.Min Length

Str 2of5.Min Length

Int 2of5.Min Length

CI 2of5.Min Length

Code 11.Min Length

Code 93.Min Length

Plessey.Min Length

Values

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 99 [0]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

UPC Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

UPC Options

Options

Add-On 2

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

UPC.Add-On 2

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Add-On 5 UPC.Add-On 5 Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

184 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

UPC Options (continued)

Options

Expand E to A

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

UPC.Expand E to A

System 0 UPCE

System 1 UPCE

UPC.Sys 0 UPCE

UPC.Sys 1 UPCE

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

EAN Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

5020, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

EAN Options

Options

Add-On 2

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

EAN.Add-On 2

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Add-On 5

Expand 8 to 13

EAN.Add-On 5

EAN.Expand 8to13

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 185

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Code 39 Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Code 39 Options

Options

Auto-Encoded

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Code 39.Auto-Encoded

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Check Digit

Data Decode

Element Decode

Encoded

Extended

Full ASCII

Quiet Zone

Code 39.Chk Digit

Code 39.Data decode

Code 39.Element decod

Code 39.Encoded

Code 39.Extended

Code 39.Full ASCII

Code 39.Quiet zone

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

186 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Code 39 Options (continued)

Options

START Decode

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Code 39.START decode

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Interleaved 2 of 5 Option

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Interleaved 2 of 5 Options

Options

Interleaved 2 of 5

Chk Digit

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Interleaved 2 of 5 Chk Digit

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Code 11 Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Code 11 Options

Options

Check Digit 1

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Code 11.Chk Dig 1

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Check Digit 2 Code 11.Chk Dig 2 Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

5020, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

5020, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 187

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Plessey Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Plessey Options

Options

Allow Alpha

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Plessey.Allow Alpha

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

MOD 10 Check

MOD 11 Check

Plessey.MOD10 Chk

Plessey.MOD11 Chk

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Code 128 Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Code 128 Options

Options

No UCC Type

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Code 128.NO UCC Type

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

UCC/EAN Code 128.UCC/EAN Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

188 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Code 128 Options (continued)

Options

UCC F1 Value

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

UPC.UCC F1 Value

EAN.UCC F1 Value

Code 128.UCC F1 Value

Code 39.UCC F1 Value

Codabar.UCC F1 Value

ABC Codabar.UCC F1 Value

Str 2of5.UCC F1 Value

Int 2of5.UCC F1 Value

CI 2of5.UCC F1 Value

Code 11.UCC F1 Value

Code 93.UCC F1 Value

Plessey.UCC F1 Value

Values

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

3270 Protocol Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

3270 Protocol Options

Options

Allow Negotiate

About Window Size

(NAWS)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Allow NAWS

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

Any Auto Enter Any Auto Enter Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

Auto Enter Scan Auto Entr Scn [Enabled]*

[Disabled]**

* [Enabled] is the default for TE 2000 application ersion 6.60 or greater.

** [Disabled] is the default for TE 2000 application versions less than 6.60.

Auto Tab Scan Auto Tab Scan Enabled, [Disabled]

Bright (BRT) Auto

Enter

BRT Auto Enter Enabled

[Disabled]

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 189

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

3270 Protocol Options (continued)

Options

Device Name

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

DeviceName

Emulate 3210

Keyboard Unlock

Emulate 3210

Keybrd Unlock

Origin Set

Period-Comma

Skip Field Exit

Period-Comma

Skip FldExit

Telnet

Transmit BS

Origin Set

Telnet

Transmit BS

Use PC Character

Set

Use PC Char Set

Values

String, minimum length=0, maximum length=10 [null string] Default is NULL for

6400, 5020, 5055, 17XX,

11XX, 59XX, 700 Series.

Enabled, [Disabled]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX, 700 Series

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

190 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Display Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Display Options

Options

Backlight State

Backlight Timer

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Backlight State

Backlight Timer

Values

[Enabled], Disabled

Numeric, minimum = [0], maximum = 60 (2415,

2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475,

248X)

Numeric, minimum = [0], maximum = 255 (6400,

17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 11XX, 17XX,

59XX, 700 Series

Code Page

Contrast Mode

Cursor Mode

Code Page

Contrast Mode

Cursor Mode

[English], Cyrillic

(Russian), Greek, Hebrew,

Central Europe, Latin 2

700 Series, CK30, CV60

[Compensated], Absolute 11XX, 17XX, 59XX

[Underln Blink]* supported on 5020

Block Blink on 5020 )

(not

)

(not supported

Underline (6400, 5020,

5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60)

[Block]** (6400, 5020,

5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60)

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

* [Underln Blink] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X. ** [Block] is the default for 6400, 5020,

5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30, CV60.

Font Quality

Remote Baud

Font Quality

Remote Baud

[Standard], Clear Type

9600, 19200, [38400]

CK30

11XX, 17XX

Remote Display

Remote Columns

Remote Display

Remote Rows

Remote Display

Remote Type

Remote Disp

Remote Cols

Remote Rows

Remote Type

Enabled, [Disabled]

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255 [80]

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255 [24]

VT100, VT220, [ANSI]

11XX, 17XX

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 191

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Display Options (continued)

Options

Software Input

Panel Toggle

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60) Values

Terminals using this option

Select Font Select Font Lucida]*, [Courier New]**,

[Courier New Bold]***,

Tahoma

700 Series, CK30, CV60

* [Lucida] is the default for CK30. ** [Courier New] is the default for CV60. *** [Courier New Bold] is the default for 700 Series.

SIP Toggle Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CV60

Radio Communications Options

Set the Security ID for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals without an 802.1x supplicant radio driver or UDP Plus installed through the Trakker Antares 2400 Menu System.

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Radio Communications Options

Options

Baud Rate

(UHF radio)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Radio Baud Rate

Values

4800, 4800/9600, 9600

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X with

802.1x supplicant radio

Note that the default depends on the type of radio in the terminal.

Disconnection

Value

Protocol

Security ID

User Authentication

Disconnect Val

Radio Protocol

Security ID

User Auth

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 10 [2]

These qualifiers apply to

UHF: RTC, Adaptive Poll,

RTC-Diag Mode,

These qualifiers apply to

SST: SST, SST-Diag Mode

Note the default depends on the radio type and is either RTC or SST.

String, minimum length=0, maximum length=16 [null string]

Default is NORANDOWL for 6400, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, 11XX.

Enabled, [Disabled] installed, 6400, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X with

UDP Plus installed

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X with

802.1x supplicant radio driver or UDP Plus installed, 6400, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X with

802.1x supplicant radio driver installed

192 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

More Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

More Options

Options

COM Select

Main Menu

Password

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Change Menu

Password

Change Menu Password

You must enable and set the password to access the Main

Menu before you can change it. To set the password, see above.

Com Select

Menu Password

Values

String, minimum length =

[3193693] T bl h password, see “Main Menu password.”

[COM 1], COM 2

Enabled, [Disabled]

To set the password, see

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

248X, 5055

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

You must enable and set the password to access the Main

Menu. To enable or disable the password, see above.

Print Device Print Device

Printer Address

Printer Port

Printer Address

Printer Port

[RS232 Print],

IRDA Print (6400, 5020,

700 Series, CV60)

RF Print (700 Series, CK30,

CV60)

Pan Print (700 Series, CK30

Bluetooth Printing)

String, minimum length=0, maximum length=16 [null string]

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 65535 [23]

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

6400, 5020, 700 Series,

CK30, CV60

5020, 700 Series, CK30,

CV60

5020, 700 Series, CK30,

CV60

LCD Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

LCD Options

Options

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Annunciator Format Annun Format

Values

Terminals using this option

[Vertical]*, [Horizontal]** 2415, 2425, 2435A,

* [Vertical] is the default for 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 700 Series, CK30.

** [Horizontal] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 6400, CV60.

Annunciator

Position

Annun Position Upper Right, Upper Left,

[Lower Right]*, Lower Left,

[Stealth]**

* [Lower Right] is the default for 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series,

CK30. ** [Stealth] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, CV60.

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 193

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

LCD Options (continued)

Options

Define Height

(Scroll Window)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Backlight Intensity BLight Intensity

Define Height

Values

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 15

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 24 [8]

Terminals using this option

59XX

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Define Width

(Scroll Window)

Key Uppercase

Define Width

Key Uppercase

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 80 [8]

[Enabled], Disabled

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

17XX, 59XX LCD Contrast LCD Contrast Numeric, minimum = [0], maximum = 255

Screen Columns Screen Cols Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255

[16]*, [17]**, [19]***,

[20]****, [40]*****,

[80]******, [16]*******

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

* [16] is the default for 11XX. ** [17] is the default for 17XX. *** [19] is the default for 2435A.

**** [20] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2455, 2475, 2481, 2486. ***** [40] is the default for 2480, 2485, 59XX.

****** [80] is the default for 5055, CV60. ******* [16] is default for 6400 Wide Display, 5020, 700 Series, CK30.

Screen Mode

Screen Rows

Screen Mode

Screen Rows

Center Cursor, [Corner

Mode], Page Mode, Lazy

Mode, Locked Mode

Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255

[8]*, [8]**, [10]***,

[16]****, [17]*****,

[25]******, [16]*******

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

* [8] is the default for 11XX. ** [8] is the default for 17XX. *** [10] is the default for 5020, 59XX, 700 Series,

CK30. **** [16] is the default for 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 2481, 2486. ***** [17] is the default for 2480,

2485. ****** [25] is the default for 5055, CV60. ******* [16] is the default for 6400 Wide Display.

Scroll Window Scroll Window Screen Size, Scroll Setting,

[Tab Size]

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

194 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

LCD Options (continued)

Options

XOrigin

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

XOrigin

YOrigin YOrigin

Values

Numeric minimum = 0, maximum = 79 [0]

Numeric minimum = 0, maximum = 23 [0]

Terminals using this option

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Beeper Setup Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Beeper Setup Options

Options

Beep Head Set

Beep Internal

[Session 1]

Session 2

Beep Head Set

Beep Internal

Values

Enabled, [Disabled]

[Enabled], Disabled

Terminals using this option

17XX

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX

Beeper (Error Tone)

Frequency

Beep Frequency Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 30 [13]*, [6]**

* [13] is the default for 17XX, 11XX. ** [6] is the default for 6400.

Beep Length Beeper (Error Tone)

Length

Beeper (Error Tone)

Volume

Beep Volume

Numeric, minimum= 1 , maximum= 10 [3]

Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [95]

Key Click

Frequency

KeyClick Freq Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 30 [13]*, [6]**

* [13] is the default for 17XX, 11XX. ** [6] is the default for 6400.

Key Click Length KeyClick Length Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 10 [1]*, [6]**

* [1] is the default for 59XX, 17XX, 11XX. ** [6] is the default for 6400, 5055.

Key Click Volume KeyClick Volume Numeric, minimum = 0, maximum = 255 [95]

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX

59XX

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX

6400, 5055, 11XX,

17XX, 59XX

59XX

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 195

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

More (Main Menu 2) Options

Options

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Foreground Session Foreground Sess

Session Name

Set Hot Key

Type-Ahead

(Main Menu 2)

Option

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Session Name

Set Hot Key

Type-Ahead

Values

Terminals using this option

None 2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X with

WTP protocol stack,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

700 Series, CK30, CV60 String, minimum length =

0, maximum length = 64

[null string]

F1 through F24, [Disabled] 2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X with

WTP protocol stack,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

[Enabled], Disabled 2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

Additional Parameters

These parameters do not have equivalent TE configuration menu options.

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Additional Parameters

Parameters

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60) Values

Terminals using this parameter

Alternate Screen

Columns

Alt Screen Cols Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255

[17]*, [40]**, [16]***

6400, 5055, 17XX

* [17] is the default for 17XX. ** [40] is the default for 5055. *** [16] is the default for 6400.

Alternate Screen

Rows

Alt Screen Rows Numeric, minimum = 1, maximum = 255,

[8]*, [12]**, [16]***

6400 Wide Display,

5055, 17XX

* [8] is the default for 17XX. ** [12] is the default for 5055. *** [16] is the default for 6400 Wide Display.

Key Repeat Key Repeat Enabled, [Disabled] 59XX

196 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Additional Parameters (continued)

Parameters

Program Name

(appears on initialization and version screens)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CV60)

Program Name

Program Version

(appears on initialization and version screens)

Program Version

Set-Up Parms Menu

Password

Values

String, minimum length =

1, maximum length = 8

String, minimum length =

1, maximum length = 4

String, minimum length =

1, maximum length = 10

[CR52401]

Terminals using this parameter

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

2415, 2425, 2435A,

2455, 2475, 248X,

6400, 5020, 5055,

11XX, 17XX, 59XX,

700 Series, CK30, CV60

TE_SETTINGS.INI Settings

For 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals with TE 2000 application versions 8.00 or greater, the following settings are available.

Upgrading from CONFIG.DAT Configuration

Note that the settings from the CONFIG.DAT file are the same as the settings for the TE_SETTINGS.INI file. For example, the

CONFIG.DAT setting:

[Host A].Host

would appear as session_1|host_a|host = 136.179.84.76

in the

TE_SETTINGS.INI file.

All values follow the [iccu values] section and use the pipe character to separate the names. The settings and literals are the same as the old

CONFIG.DAT with the exception of the use of the different naming convention using the pipe (”|”).

Below are a few values from the CONFIG.DAT file as they appear in the

TE_SETTINGS.INI file.

[iccu values] session_1|host_a|host = 136.179.84.76

session_1|host_a|port_number = 23 session_1|destructive_bs = 0

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 197

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

198

TE_SETTINGS.INI Configuration

“enable_sip“ = 0 or 1

This enables or disables the interaction between the TE 2000 application and the onscreen keyboard. If this value is 1, the TE 2000 application displays the SIP when it starts and when it gains focus. If this value is 0, the

TE 2000 application does not display the SIP and it does not toggle the

SIP when you click the SIP toggle button.

“sip_settings“ = {674EC110-EFF0-47D3-B828-CDB2A6CCD3EB}

This is a GUID (globally unique identifier) that identifies the SIP that the

TE 2000 application is to use as its default. This can be the GUID of any registered SIP in the system.

These are for debugging purposes only. They inform which version of the

TE 2000 application created the TE_SETTINGS.INI file.

S program_name = FWP700H0

S program_version = 7.53

TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameter Formats

Each parameter in the setup file is followed by one of three different formats that indicates the type of parameter and the values it can contain.

Formats are as follows:

S Literal strings.

List of fixed values to choose from. Session 1 or 2 may qualify Screen Mode. It may take the value Center Cursor, Corner

Mode, Page Mode, Lazy Mode, or Locked Mode. Session 1 is the default qualifier. These configuration lines are valid: screen_mode = Lazy Mode; session_1|screen_mode = Lazy Mode; session_2|screen_mode = Lazy Mode;

S Numeric parameters.

Numeric parameters have minimum and maximum values. Parameters can be either decimal or hexadecimal:

S Decimal parameters consist of digits 0 through 9.

S Hexadecimal parameters consist of 0x or 0X, followed by 1 to 4 digits of 0 through 9, a through f, or A through F. These are equivalent:

160, 0xA0, and 0Xa0.

Port Number is a variable with a minimum value of 0 and a maximum of 65535. These lines are valid: port_number = 1; session_1|host_a|port_number = 1; session_2|host_a|port_number = 1;

S String parameters.

String parameters are variables with minimum and maximum lengths. Program Name is unqualified. It must have eight characters. These configuration lines are valid: program_name = ABCDEFGH; program_name = FWP248H0;

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

TE_SETTINGS.INI Parameters and Qualifiers

Note : If parameters are duplicated, an error is not generated. Instead, the terminal processes the entire file and uses the last entered value of the duplicated parameter.

Parameters in the set-up file apply to all model numbers unless otherwise noted here. The following pages list each parameter and its qualifiers.

Some qualifiers have default values. If you want to use the default value, you can omit the qualifier from the parameter set-up file.

Note : Only WTP terminals support dual sessions (“Session 2”). For a list of terminals with WTP, see Chapter 1, “ Getting Started .”

Set-Up Parameters Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Set-Up Parameters Options

Options

Data Stream

Host Name

Port Number

Radio Number

( same as unit number )

RTC over TCP

Server IP

SNA

Telnet

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values host_a|data_stream (default) host_b|data_stream host_c|data_stream

Native (blank if UDP

Plus or TCP/IP) ,

3270, 5250,

String, minimum = 0, maximum = 16 [null string]

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 65535

[23]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 127

[127]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Numeric, minimum =

1, maximum = 16

[16]

Terminals using this option

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled} 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 199

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Set-Up Parameters Options (continued)

Options

Terminal Type

Unit Number

(same as radio number)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Values

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 255

[255]

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 127

[127]

Terminals using this option

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Bar Code Parameters

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Bar Code Parameters

Parameters

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

BC Type Character bc_type_char

Values

Code 39 Encoded

Concatenate code_39_encoded concatenate

Terminals using this parameter

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

MOD 10 Check mod_10_check

ParmsBySession parmsbysession

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Scan All Fields scan_all_flds

Scan Postamble

Character

Scan Preamble

Character

Scanner Type scan_postchar scan_prechar scanner_type

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 255

[0]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 255

[0]

[No Scanner], Wand,

Laser, Wand Emulate,

Auto Detect

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Stream Scan

Use Wedge Mode stream_scan use_wedge_mode

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

200 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Bar Code Symbologies

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Bar Code Symbologies

Symbologies

ABC Codabar

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values abc_codabar Scanner_type = 33

Codabar

Code 11

Code 39

Code 93

Code 128

Computer Identics

2 of 5

EAN

Interleaved 2 of 5

Plessey

Straight 2 of 5

UPC codabar code_11 code_39 code_93 code_128 ci_2of5 ean int_2of5 plessey str_2of5 upc

Scanner_type = 32

Scanner_type = 56

Scanner_type = 40

Scanner_type = 72

Scanner_type = 64

Scanner_type = 50

Scanner_type = 17

Scanner_type = 51

Scanner_type = 8

Scanner_type = 49

Scanner_type = 16

Terminals using this symbology

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 201

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Generic Bar Code Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Note : Generic bar code options must be qualified by one of the bar code symbology strings. For example: “session_1|upc|max_length = 13;”

Generic Bar Code Options

Options

Drop Leading

Drop Trailing

Fixed Length 1

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values

Numeric, minimum =

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 15 [0]

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 99 [0]

Terminals using this option

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

202 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Generic Bar Code Options (continued)

Options

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Fixed Length 2

Values

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 99 [0]

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 99 [0]

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 99 [0]

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 99 [0]

Terminals using this option

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 203

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Generic Bar Code Options (continued)

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Options

Values

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 99 [0]

Terminals using this option

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

UPC Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

UPC Options

Options

Add-On 2

Add-On 5

Expand E to A

System 0 UPCE

System 1 UPCE

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

204 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

EAN Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

EAN Options

Options

Add-On 2

Add-On 5

Expand 8 to 13

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) ean|add-on_2

Values

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 ean|add-on_5 ean|expand_8to13

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Code 39 Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Code 39 Options

Options

Auto-Encoded

Check Digit

Data Decode

Element Decode

Encoded

Extended

Full ASCII

Quiet Zone

START Decode

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values code_39|auto-encoded code_39|chk_digit

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 code_39|data_decode code_39|element_decod code_39|encoded code_39|extended

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 code_39|full_ascii code_39|quiet_zone code_39|start_decode

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 205

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Interleaved 2 of 5 Option

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Interleaved 2 of 5 Options

Options

Interleaved 2 of 5

Chk Digit

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) interleaved_2_of_5_chk_digit

Values

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Code 11 Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Code 11 Options

Options

Check Digit 1

Check Digit 2

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values code_11|chk_dig_1 code_11|chk_dig_2

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Plessey Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Plessey Options

Options

Allow Alpha

MOD 10 Check

MOD 11 Check

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values plessey|allow_alpha plessey|mod10_chk

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 plessey|mod11_chk Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

206 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Code 128 Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Code 128 Options

Options

No UCC Type

UCC/EAN

UCC F1 Value

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values code_128|no_ucc_type code_128|ucc/ean

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 255

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

3270 Protocol Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

3270 Protocol Options

Options

Allow Negotiate

About Window Size

(NAWS)

Any Auto Enter

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 allow_naws

(700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60 any_auto_enter

Auto Enter Scan

Auto Tab Scan

Bright (BRT) Auto

Enter

Device Name

Emulate 3210 auto_entr_scn auto_tab_scan brt_auto_enter devicename emulate_3210

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

String, minimum length=0, maximum length=10 [null string]

Default is NULL for

700 Series.

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 207

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

3270 Protocol Options (continued)

Options

Keyboard Unlock

Origin Set

Skip Field Exit

Transmit BS

Use PC Character

Set

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) keybrd_unlock origin_set skip_fldexit transmit_bs use_pc_char_set

Values

Terminals using this option

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30, CL31,

CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Enabled, [Disabled] 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Display Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Display Options

Options

Backlight State

Backlight Timer

Code Page

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) backlight_state backlight_timer

Values

Terminals using this option

[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series code_page

Numeric, minimum =

[0], maximum = 255

[English], Cyrillic

(Russian), Greek,

Hebrew, Central

Europe, Latin 2

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Cursor Mode

Font Quality cursor_mode font_quality

Underln Blink

Block Blink

Underline

[Block]

[Standard], Clear

Type

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

CK30, CK31

Select Font select_font Lucida]*, [Courier

New]**, [Courier

New Bold]***,

Tahoma

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

* [Lucida] is the default for CK30, CK31. ** [Courier New] is the default for CV60. *** [Courier New Bold] is the default for 700 Series.

208 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

More Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

More Options

Options

Change Menu

Password

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values change_menu_password String, minimum length = 1, maximum

Terminals using this option

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

You must enable and set the password to access the Main Menu before you can change it. To set the password, see above.

Main Menu

Password menu_password

You must enable and set the password to access the Main Menu.

To enable or disable the password, see above.

Print Device print_device

To enable the password, see “Main

Menu password.”

Enabled, [Disabled] password.”

Printer Address

Printer Port printer_address printer_port

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

[RS232 Print],

IRDA Print (700

Series, CV60)

RF Print (700 Series,

CK30, CK31, CV60)

Pan Print (700 Series,

CK30 Bluetooth

Printing)

String, minimum length=0, maximum length=16 [null string]

Numeric, minimum =

0, maximum = 65535

[23]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

LCD Options

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

LCD Options

Options

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values

Terminals using this option

Annunciator Format annun_format [Vertical]*,

[Horizontal]**

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

* [Vertical] is the default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31. ** [Horizontal] is the default for CV60.

Annunciator

Position annun_position Upper Right, Upper

Left, [Lower Right]*,

Lower Left,

[Stealth]**

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

* [Lower Right] is the default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31. ** [Stealth] is the default for CV60.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 209

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

LCD Options (continued)

Options

Define Height

(Scroll Window)

Define Width

(Scroll Window)

Key Uppercase

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) define_height define_width key_uppercase

Values

Numeric, minimum =

1, maximum = 24 [8]

Numeric, minimum =

1, maximum = 80 [8]

Terminals using this option

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Screen Columns screen_cols Numeric, minimum =

1, maximum = 255

16, 17, 19, 20, 40,

[80]*, [16]**

* [80] is the default for CV60. ** [16] is default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31.

Screen Mode screen_mode

Screen Rows screen_rows

Center Cursor,

[Corner Mode], Page

Mode, Lazy Mode,

Locked Mode

Numeric, minimum =

1, maximum = 255

8, 8, [10]*, 16, 17,

[25]**, 16

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

* [10] is the default for 700 Series, CK30, CK31. ** [25] is the default for CV60.

Scroll Window scroll_window Screen Size, Scroll

Setting,

[Tab Size]

XOrigin xorigin Numeric minimum =

0, maximum = 79 [0]

YOrigin yorigin Numeric minimum =

0, maximum = 23 [0]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

210 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

(Main Menu 2)

Option

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

More (Main Menu 2) Options

Options

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Foreground Session foreground_sess

Values

None

Session Name

Set Hot Key

Type-Ahead session_name set_hot_key type-ahead

Terminals using this option

String, minimum length = 0, maximum length = 64 [null string]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

F1 through F24,

[Disabled]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

Additional Parameters

These parameters do not have equivalent TE configuration menu options.

Note that brackets indicate default settings and values.

Additional Parameters

Parameters

Program Name

[Session 1]

Session 2

Session 3 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60)

Session 4 (700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60) Values program_name String, minimum length = 1, maximum length = 8

(appears on initialization and version screens)

Program Version program_version String, minimum

Terminals using this parameter

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

700 Series, CK30,

(appears on initialization and version screens) length = 4

Return Result

Set-Up Parms Menu

Password return_result password

[Enabled], Disabled 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

(this is a test feature for VT/ANSI emulation; if disabled, extended commands (for #K only) will not return a result to the host application)

String, minimum length = 1, maximum length = 10

[CR52401]

700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 211

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Changing Text

Modify CFGLIT.DAT to change the text of TE configuration menus, configuration parameters, or system messages. This file contains the strings that appear in the configuration menus, parameter set-up files, and system messages.

An identification (ID) number identifies each literal string. To create your own literal file, you create a text file that associates these numbers with the actual literal strings. You then use MAKELIT.EXE to convert the text file to a format the configuration program can use.

Each line in the literal text file begins with the literal ID number. After the

ID number, you type the quoted string that is used when that ID number is referenced. If you omit an ID number, its string appears as “Bad Literal

File” when you run the program in the terminal.

Literal ID numbers are available upon request from Intermec. Contact your Intermec representative for more information about ID numbers.

You can create a sample file containing the default literal strings using

MAKELIT.EXE to “reverse engineer” the standard CFGLIT.DAT file. To do this, type the following command line to unpack CFGLIT.DAT into a

CFGLIT.TXT text file: makelit -r cfglit.dat cfglit.txt

The CFGLIT.TXT file this command creates contains all the default strings the configuration program uses. One line in CFGLIT.TXT looks like this:

0x2f10 “RS232 PORT\nIN USE\n\nPLEASE WAIT!”

“0x2f10” is the literal ID number for the RS-232 port-in-use message that appears when a personal computer sends an RS-232 command to the TE program. The message text follows the ID number in a quoted string. The embedded “\n” sequence within the quoted string indicates a “new line” character and outputs a carriage return/line feed. To change the text of the message that appears, change the quoted string. For example, change the above line to look like this:

0x2f10 “Printing\nPlease Wait!”

When you have a text file with one line for every ID number, use

MAKELIT.EXE to convert the file to an indexed literal file. If your text file is named CFGLIT.TXT, you would type the following command which creates the new literal CFGLIT.DAT file. For instructions on how to download the file, see “Downloading Files” on page 229.

makelit cfglit.txt cfglit.dat

212 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Preinitializing the 3270 TE Program

You can preinitialize the 3270 TE program. You must name the 3270 initialization file as 3270.INI. The file is processed when you reset or warm start the terminal. The file is processed as if the radio had received the data, and must be in the “on-air” format. For instructions on how to download the file, see “Downloading Files” on page 229.

Data is encoded in binary format. To create 3270.INI, you may need a

HEX editor or other special program.

3270.INI contains 3270 data stream commands and orders. It contains

ASCII data because Intermec controllers perform EBCDIC to ASCII translation for the data stream.

Following is the format for the 3270 data stream. The information assumes you have a working knowledge of the data stream command formats or escape sequences, or both.

The following 3270 commands are supported:

S 0x31 Write

S 0x32 Read buffer

S 0x34 Toggle SSCP command mode

S 0x35 Erase write

S 0x36 Read modified

S 0x3d Erase write alternate

S 0x3e Read modified all

S 0x3f Erase all unprotected

The following 3270 orders are supported:

S 0x07 Beep (Intermec extension)

S 0x09 Program tab

S 0x11 Set buffer address

S 0x12 Erase unprotected to address

S 0x13 Insert cursor

S 0x14 Repeat to address

S 0x1d Start of field

S 0x1f Scanner (Intermec extension)

The following example shows how to display “HELLO WORLD” and beep the beeper from within a data stream initialization file. The line of hexadecimal digits represent the binary values that must be stored in the initialization files.

00 07 48 45 4c 4c 4f 20 57 4f 52 4c 44

H E L L O W O R L D

FIrst byte is discarded, should be zero

Bell character

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 213

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Remapping the Terminal’s Keys

Note : These instructions assume the REMAP.CFG file is downloaded onto your terminal. For instructions on how to download the file to the terminal, see “ Downloading Files ” on page 229.

You may need to remap the terminal’s keys if your users need to press a key in 3270 that is not on a standard 101-key keyboard. You can also remap a terminal key to transmit a text string or message to the computer.

To remap the terminal keys, you create the REMAP.CFG file and add a

Remap command to remap a terminal key. You can remap a single key or a two-key sequence. You can add a Remap command or create a macro in the REMAP.CFG file that remaps a single key or a two-key sequence.

You can remap any terminal key or two-key sequence that does not perform a specific function on the terminal. For example, you can remap the

[B] key because it only types the lowercase letter B.

Note : On the 2425, 2455, 2475, and 248X, you cannot remap the twokey sequence ) [ because it moves the window/viewport up on the

Trakker Antares Terminals.

Each terminal key or two-key sequence generates a 4-digit hexadecimal remap code as listed in the “ Key Code ” table starting on page 216. The key code table gives the 4-digit hexadecimal codes for ASCII characters for the terminals. These codes identify the key or keys pressed. For example:

Key

[B]

[SHIFT] [B]

Action

Types a lowercase B

Types an uppercase B

4-Digit Hex Key Code

0062

0042

Remapping a Key or Two-Key Sequence

Note : For terminals made before 1997, refer to the “ Using FLSHCONV ” section for the proper -e parameter value.

1 Choose the key or two-key sequence to remap and determine the current 4-digit hexadecimal code of the keys and the code you will enter to remap the keys. For help, see the “ Key Code ” table on the next page.

2 Connect the terminal to your personal computer.

3 Using any text editor, enter the keys you want remapped on individual lines in this format: remap=<key>=”string” or remap=<key>=<key>

S remap is the command you enter in REMAP.CFG.

S key is the 4-digit hexadecimal key or keys to which or from which you are remapping.

S string is the new function for the key or keys, which can be a text string, ASCII mnemonic, or another 2-byte hexadecimal code. Enclose the entire string in quotation marks.

214 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

4 Save the new file as REMAP.CFG.

5 Download REMAP.CFG to drive C: on your terminal.

Example 1

Suppose you want to remap “+” on your terminal to send a message and then enter a carriage return. In the REMAP.CFG file, add this command: remap=<002b>=“My battery is low.<CR>”

Example 2

To remap the function of the function keys to another key, replace string with the transmitted code for the function and replace key with the 4-digit hexadecimal key that will do the function. For example, to remap the [F6] function to the “B” key, add this command to the REMAP.CFG file: remap=<0042>=“<ESC>[17~”

Example 3

This is an example of multiple hexadecimal codes in the right-most argument which makes a key into a text sequence with embedded EHLLAPI values for the [F4] and [F5] keys.

r emap=<xxxx>=”EHLLAPI value”<1034>”EHLLAPI value

2”<1035>”END

Creating a Macro

1 Using any text editor, add the macro=< key >= “string” Macro command to the end of the REMAP.CFG file, where:

S macro is the command you enter in REMAP.CFG.

S key is the 4-digit hexadecimal key or keys you are remapping.

S string is the new action for the key or keys. The string can be a text string, ASCII mnemonic, or another 2-byte hexadecimal code. Enclose the entire string in quotation marks.

2 At the end of the macro, type runmacro=<key> where key is the

4-digit hexadecimal code that identifies the keys that activate the macro.

3 Save the file name as REMAP.CFG for the macros to work.

4 Append the new remap to the original hex file using one of the following commands. Replace ??? with your type of terminal:

S 59XX Terminals

FLSHCONV -a –eE000 FWP59??H0.HEX REMAP.CFG –oNEW.HEX

S 17XX, 11XX Terminals

FLSHCONV -a –eFFC0 FWP1???H0.HEX REMAP.CFG –oNEW.HEX

5 Download REMAP.CFG to drive C on your terminal.

Example

You can assign “+” to activate a macro that remaps [B] to send the message, “Change the battery pack now.” In the REMAP.CFG file, add this command: macro=<0042>=”Change the battery pack now.<CR>” runmacro=<002b>

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 215

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Nesting

Macros do not nest. The right-most argument is processed as key strokes and not scanned for macro values. For example:

// swap “3” and “5” keys remap=<0033>=“5” // map “3” key to a “5” key remap=<0035>=“3” // map “5” key to a “3” key

The “3” key produces a “5” key. If nesting was allowed, the “5” key is recognized as a macro that produces the “3” key and the “3” is recognized as a

“5” key that produces the “7” key, and so forth.

Remapping Keys for Each Session

Use the following syntax to remap keys for each session. The session number can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 for 700 Series, CK30, CK31, and CV60 Terminals. The 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X Terminals only support session 1 and 2. 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, and 11XX

Terminals do not allow this feature.

remap=Session1<keyval>=”string”

Macro=Session1<keyval>=”string”

Runmacro=Session1<keyval>

Note : The string comparison for the “Session” string is case-sensitive.

Key Code Table

Note : Values not listed here may work but are not supported.

remap=<0020>= “string” /* SPACE key */ remap=<0021>= “string” /* ! key */ remap=<0022>= “string” /* ” key */ remap=<0023>= “string” /* # key */ remap=<0024>= “string” /* $ key */ remap=<0025>= “string” /* % key */ remap=<0026>= “string” /* & key */ remap=<0027>= “string” /* ’ key */ remap=<0028>= “string” /* ( key */ remap=<0029>= “string” /* ) key */ remap=<002a>= “string” /* * key */ remap=<002b>= “string” /* + key */ remap=<002c>= “string” /* , key */ remap=<002d>= “string” /* - key */ remap=<002e>= “string” /* . key */ remap=<002f>= “string” /* / key */ remap=<0030>= “string” /* 0 key*/ remap=<0031>= “string” /* 1 key*/ remap=<0032>= “string” /* 2 key*/ remap=<0033>= “string” /* 3 key*/ remap=<0034>= “string” /* 4 key*/ remap=<0035>= “string” /* 5 key*/

216 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration remap=<0036>= “string” /* 6 key*/ remap=<0037>= “string” /* 7 key*/ remap=<0038>= “string” /* 8 key*/ remap=<0039>= “string” /* 9 key*/ remap=<003a>= “string” /* : key */ remap=<003b>= “string” /* ; key */ remap=<003c>= “string” /* < key */ remap=<003d>= “string” /* = key */ remap=<003e>= “string” /* > key */ remap=<003f>= “string” /* ? key */ remap=<0040>= “string” /* @ key */ remap=<0041>= “string” /* A key*/ remap=<0042>= “string” /* B key*/ remap=<0043>= “string” /* C key*/ remap=<0044>= “string” /* D key*/ remap=<0045>= “string” /* E key*/ remap=<0046>= “string” /* F key*/ remap=<0047>= “string” /* G key*/ remap=<0048>= “string” /* H key*/ remap=<0049>= “string” /* I key*/ remap=<004a>= “string” /* J key*/ remap=<004b>= “string” /* K key*/ remap=<004c>= “string” /* L key*/ remap=<004d>= “string” /* M key*/ remap=<004e>= “string” /* N key*/ remap=<004f>= “string” /* O key*/ remap=<0050>= “string” /* P key*/ remap=<0051>= “string” /* Q key*/ remap=<0052>= “string” /* R key*/ remap=<0053>= “string” /* S key*/ remap=<0054>= “string” /* T key*/ remap=<0055>= “string” /* U key*/ remap=<0056>= “string” /* V key*/ remap=<0057>= “string” /* W key*/ remap=<0058>= “string” /* X key*/ remap=<0059>= “string” /* Y key*/ remap=<005a>= “string” /* Z key*/ remap=<005b>= “string” /* [ key */ remap=<005c>= “string” /* \ key */ remap=<005d>= “string” /* ] key */ remap=<005e>= “string” /* ^ key */ remap=<005f>= “string” /* _ key */ remap=<0060>= “string” /* ‘ key */ remap=<0061>= “string” /* a key*/ remap=<0062>= “string” /* b key*/ remap=<0063>= “string” /* c key*/ remap=<0064>= “string” /* d key*/ remap=<0065>= “string” /* e key*/ remap=<0066>= “string” /* f key*/

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 217

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

218 remap=<0067>= “string” /* g key*/ remap=<0068>= “string” /* h key*/ remap=<0069>= “string” /* i key*/ remap=<006a>= “string” /* j key*/ remap=<006b>= “string” /* k key*/ remap=<006c>= “string” /* l key*/ remap=<006d>= “string” /* m key*/ remap=<006e>= “string” /* n key*/ remap=<006f>= “string” /* o key*/ remap=<0070>= “string” /* p key*/ remap=<0071>= “string” /* q key*/ remap=<0072>= “string” /* r key*/ remap=<0073>= “string” /* s key*/ remap=<0074>= “string” /* t key*/ remap=<0075>= “string” /* u key*/ remap=<0076>= “string” /* v key*/ remap=<0077>= “string” /* w key*/ remap=<0078>= “string” /* x key*/ remap=<0079>= “string” /* y key*/ remap=<007a>= “string” /* z key*/ remap=<007b>= “string” /* { key */ remap=<007c>= “string” /* | key */ remap=<007d>= “string” /* } key */ remap=<007e>= “string” /* ~ key */ remap=<007f>= “string” /* Del key */ remap=<1030>= “string” /* Home key */ remap=<1031>= “string” /* F1 key */ remap=<1032>= “string” /* F2 key */ remap=<1033>= “string” /* F3 key */ remap=<1034>= “string” /* F4 key */ remap=<1035>= “string” /* F5 key */ remap=<1036>= “string” /* F6 key */ remap=<1037>= “string” /* F7 key */ remap=<1038>= “string” /* F8 key */ remap=<1039>= “string” /* F9 key */ remap=<103c>= “string” /* Backspace key */ remap=<1042>= “string” /* Back Tab key */ remap=<1043>= “string” /* Clear key */ remap=<1044>= “string” /* Del key */ remap=<1045>= “string” /* Enter key */ remap=<1046>= “string” /* Erase End of Field (EOF) */ remap=<1049>= “string” /* Insert key */ remap=<104c>= “string” /* Window/viewport left key */ remap=<104e>= “string” /* New line */ remap=<1052>= “string” /* Reset key */ remap=<1054>= “string” /* Tab key */ remap=<1055>= “string” /* Window/viewport up key */

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration remap=<1056>= “string” /* Window/viewport down key */ remap=<105a>= “string” /* Window/viewport right key */ remap=<1061>= “string” /* F10 key */ remap=<1062>= “string” /* F11 key */ remap=<1063>= “string” /* F12 key */ remap=<1064>= “string” /* F13 key */ remap=<1065>= “string” /* F15 key */ remap=<1066>= “string” /* F16 key */ remap=<1067>= “string” /* F17 key */ remap=<1068>= “string” /* F18 key */ remap=<1069>= “string” /* F19 key */ remap=<106a>= “string” /* F20 key */ remap=<106b>= “string” /* F21 key */ remap=<106c>= “string” /* F22 key */ remap=<106d>= “string” /* F23 key */ remap=<106e>= “string” /* F24 key */ remap=<1078>= “string” /* PA1 */ remap=<1079>= “string” /* PA2 */ remap=<107a>= “string” /* PA3 */ remap=<2041>= “string” /* Auto-Login Restart key */ remap=<206c>= “string” /* Menu key */ remap=<304c>= “string” /* Page left key */ remap=<3055>= “string” /* Page up key */ remap=<3056>= “string” /* Page down key */ remap=<305a>= “string” /* Page right key */

Remapping Characters

You can use display character translation files to remap characters as they are written to the display. The translation file name for TE 2000 3270 terminal emulation must be 3270.XLT. For instructions on how to download the file to the terminal, see “ Downloading Files ” on page 229.

Display character translation files are binary files consisting of ordered pairs of eight bit values. Each pair of values remaps a displayable character to a different displayable character.

S The first byte of a pair is the ASCII value of the character to replace.

S The second byte of a pair is the ASCII value that replaces the first.

These translations are only made when a character is written to a display device. If the character is sent to the host (such as keystroke or scan data) or sent to an external device (such as a printer), it is sent as the original, untranslated value.

Suppose you want a terminal running 3270 emulation to replace the uppercase B with the Greek letter beta, and replace the uppercase Z with the

Greek letter omega. Create a file named 3270.XLT that is four bytes long

(two ordered pairs of two bytes each). The file should contain the 0x42,

0xE1, 0x5A, and 0xEA bytes in this order. These represent the ASCII display character set values for B, beta, Z, and omega, respectively.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 219

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Implementing ITCCOLOR.DAT Attribute Colors

Note : The ITCCOLOR.DAT attribute colors were implemented for Wal-

Mart Stores Incorporated.

These changes are in place for the 5055 Data Collection PCs, 700 Series

Computers, and CV60 Vehicle Mount Computers. The registry keys for

Text and Back are still in place for these terminals.

You must name the file ITCCOLOR.DAT and you may place this where the other TE 2000 configuration files are placed for discovery by the TE

2000 application.

The two registry keys for the default foreground (Text) and background colors are still used and are set before the color file is read from the following keys:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Intermec\TE2000\BackGroundColor

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Intermec\TE2000\ForeGroundColor

Both keys must exist or the default colors of black background and white text is used.

The color file contains lines defining the color Index and the Color for eight normal foreground (Text) and background (Back) color pairs and eight inverse color pairs for a total of 32 colors. Each line is a maximum of

80 characters. A line can be empty, have leading spaces, have a comment indicated by a semicolon character, have a pair of values (color Index and

Color). All characters from a semicolon to the end of the line are ignored.

A line is terminated by a carriage return, line feed character, or both. Invalid lines are ignored. You may define all, none, or any of the colors in the file and in any order. The file may exist or not. The normal Text colors are defaulted to black and the Inverse Text color is defaulted to black.

If an Index-Color is not defined or the file does not exist, default colors are used.

The color Index is a decimal value of 0 through 31. It specifies the character attributes associated with Color. The index values are documented in the sample ITCCOLOR.DAT file on the next page.

Color is a 32-bit hex value used to specify an RGB color (0x00bbggrr). In

RGB format, the low-order (rr) byte contains a value for the relative intensity of red; the second byte (gg)contains a value for green; and the third byte (bb) contains a value for blue. The high-order byte must be zero. The maximum value for a single byte is 0xFF.

220 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Example

This is a sample color file:

Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

======================================================================

; comment

; Normal

00 0x00000000 ;Text

01 0x007f7f7f ;Back

02 0x000000ff ;Text Bold

03 0x007f7f00 ;Back Bold

04 0x0000ff00 ;Text Blink

05 0x007f007f ;Back Blink

06 0x0000ffff ;Text Bold Blink

07 0x007f0000 ;Back Bold Blink

08 0x00ff0000 ;Text Underline

09 0x00007f7f ;Back Underline

10 0x00ff00ff ;Text Bold Underline

11 0x00007f00 ;Back Bold Underline

12 0x00ffff00 ;Text Blink Underline

13 0x0000007f ;Back Blink Underline

14 0x00ffffff ;Text Bold Blink Underline

15 0x00000000 ;Back Bold Blink Underline

; Inverse

16 0x00000000 ;Text

17 0x00ffffff ;Back

18 0x0000007f ;Text Bold

19 0x00ffff00 ;Back Bold

20 0x00007f00 ;Text Blink

21 0x00ff00ff ;Back Blink

22 0x00007f7f ;Text Bold Blink

23 0x00ff0000 ;Back Bold Blink

24 0x007f0000 ;Text Underline

25 0x0000ffff ;Back Underline

26 0x007f007f ;Text Bold Underline

27 0x0000ff00 ;Back Bold Underline

28 0x007f7f00 ;Text Blink Underline

29 0x000000ff ;Back Blink Underline

30 0x007f7f7f ;Text Bold Blink Underline

31 0x007ffff7 ;Back Bold Blink Underline

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 221

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Substituting National Characters

This topic tells how to create a file that remaps one character in the terminal’s Terminal Font Set for another character in the set. Use this information to provide characters on the terminal in the local language.

Intermec provides a table for converting from characters used in English

(U.S.) to German, Danish, Finnish, Italian, Spanish, French, Belgian, and

English (UK). The procedure for converting the characters appears first.

Then two slightly longer procedures show how to remap any character to another. One procedure describes the steps with the symbol’s EBCDIC value. The other one describes the steps without a value. Finally, examples show the remap files for German characters and a few English symbols.

For all procedures, you need the terminal’s Terminal Font Set table. The table lists characters and their decimal and hexadecimal values. For the

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, and 248X Terminals, refer to the terminal’s user manual. For the 5020, 5055, 6400, 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal, see Appendix D, “ Terminal Font Set Table .”

Creating the File

Follow these steps to create a table that substitutes characters in the local language for characters normally used in U.S. English. These steps apply if the EBCDIC value is 4A, 4F, 5A, 5B, 5F, 6A, 79, 7B, 7C, 7F, A1, C0,

D0, or E0.

1 Find the character to replace in the “EBCDIC Values” table on page

223 and determine its EBCDIC value.

2 Find the default translation value in the “ASCII Equivalents for

EBCDIC Values (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal)” table on page 223 or the “ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC Values

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, or 700 Series Terminal)” table on page 224.

3 Using the default value from step 2, search the terminal’s Terminal Font

Set for the character. If the default character is correct, you are done. If incorrect, go to step 4.

4 Search the terminal’s Terminal Font Set for the character you want.

5 Create file 3270.XLT. Put the default value of the font character (found in step 2) as the first byte in the file. Put the replacement value (found in step 4) as the second byte in the file.

6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 until all replacement characters are complete.

7 Download 3270.XLT to your terminal and restart the terminal emulation program for the changes to take effect. For downloading information, see “ Downloading Files ” on page 229.

222 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

EBCDIC Values

Character Set EBCDIC

English (US)

Austrian/German

Austrian/German (alternate)

Danish/Norwegian

Danish/Norwegian (alternate)

Finnish/Swedish

Finnish/Swedish (alternate)

French

Italian

Portuguese

Spanish

Spanish (alternate)

English (UK)

Belgian

Brazilian/Portuguese

Japanese (English)

Spanish Speaking

Canadian (French)

International

4A 4F 5A 5B 5F 6A 79 7B 7C 7F A1 C0 D0 E0

| !

¬ ¦ ‘

# @ ~ { } \

Ä !

Ü $ ^ ö ‘ # § β ä ü Ö

ö |

ü Ü ¬ β Ä

# !

¤ Å ^ ø ‘ Æ Ø ü æ å \

ø |

å Å ¬ ¦ Æ

§ !

¤ Å ^ ö é Ä Ö ü ä å É

ö | å

Å ¬ ¦

§ $ ^

ù ‘

· · é è

é $ ^ ò

£ §

ì à

[ !

] $ ^ õ

‘ Ã

ç ã ’ Ç

[ | ] Pts ¬

ñ ‘ Ñ

@ · · { } \

| !

Pts ¬ ¦ Ñ

$ | !

£ — ¦ ‘ # @ – { } \

[ !

] $ ^

ù ‘ #

· ·

é è ç

É !

$ Ç ^ ç ã Õ Ã

~ õ é \

£ | !

¥ ¬ ¦ ‘ # @ – { } $

[ | ] $

¬ ñ ‘ Ñ

@ · · { } \

’ $ ^

ù ‘ # @ · ·

é è

[ !

] $ ^ ¦ ‘

# @ “ ~ { } \

ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC Values (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)

ASCII

English (US)

German

Danish/Norwegian

Finnish/Swedish

Italian

Spanish

French

Belgian

English (UK)

4A 4F 5A 5B 5F 6A 79 7B 7C 7F A1 C0 D0 E0

BD 7C 21 24 AA DD 60 23 40 22 7E 7B 7D 5C

8E 21 9A 24 5E 94 60 23 F5 22 E1 84 81 99

23 21 0F 8F 5E 9B 60 92 90 22 81 91 86 5C

F5 21 0F 8F 5E 94 82 8E 99 22 81 84 86 90

F8 21 82 24 5E 95 97 9C F5 22 8D 85 8A 87

5B 7C 5D — AA A4 60 A5 40 22 F9 7B 7D 5C

F8 21 F5 24 5E 97 60 9C 85 22 F9 82 8A 87

5B 21 5D 24 5E 97 60 23 85 22 F9 82 8A 87

24 7C 21 9C AA DD 60 23 40 22 16 7B 7D 5C

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 223

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC Values (6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

English (US)

German

Danish/Norwegian

Finnish/Swedish

Italian

Spanish

French

Belgian

English (UK)

ASCII

4A 4F 5A 5B 5F 6A 79 7B 7C 7F A1 C0 D0 E0

9B 0E 21 24 AA 7C 60 23 40 22 7E 7B 7D 5C

8E 21 9A 24 5E 94 60 23 15 22 E1 84 81 99

23 21 0F 8F 5E ED 60 92 05 22 81 91 86 5C

15 21 0F 8F 5E 7C 82 8E 99 22 81 84 86 90

F8 21 82 24 5E 95 97 9C 15 22 8D 85 8A 87

5B OE 5D — AA A4 60 A5 40 22 06 7B 7D 5C

F8 21 15 24 5E 97 60 9C 85 22 06 82 8A 87

5B 21 50 24 5E 97 60 23 85 22 06 82 8A 87

24 OE 21 9C AA 7C 60 23 40 22 5F 7B 7D 5C

For characters other than those in the “ASCII Equivalents for EBCDIC

Values (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X)” table on page 223, refer to the appropriate IBM character set. Languages and set numbers are in the following table.

IBM Character Sets

Number

Language

English (U.S.)

German

Danish/Norwegian

Swedish/Finnish

Italian

Spanish

French

Belgian

IBM Set

037–850

273–850

277–850

278–850

280–850

284–850

297–850

500–850

224 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

EBCDIC to ASCII Table

0x00

0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x7F

0x00 0x00 0x00 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F

0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x00 0x00 0x08 0x00

0x18 0x19 0x00 0x00 A_DUP 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x40

0x20 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x00 0x00 0x9b 0x2E 0x3C 0x28 0x2B 0x0e

0x26 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x00 0x00 0x21 0x24 0x2A 0x29 0x3B 0xaa

0x60

0x2D 0x2F 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x00 0x00 0x7C 0x2C 0x25 0x5F 0x3E 0x3F

0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x00 0x60 0x3A 0x23 0x40 0x27 0x3D 0x22

0x80

0x00 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x65 0x66 0x67

0x68 0x69 0x00 0xc2 0xc1 0xc3 0xc5 0x00

0x00 0x6A 0x6B 0x6C 0x6D 0x6E 0x6F 0x70

0x71 0x72 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xb4 0x00 0x00

0xa0

0x00 0x7E 0x73 0x74 0x75 0x76 0x77 0x78

0x79 0x7A 0x00 0xc0 0xda 0xb3 0x00 0x00

0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x00 0x00 0x00 0xd9 0xbf 0x00 0x00 0xc4

0xc0

0x7B 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x45 0x46 0x47

0x48 0x49 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x7D 0x4A 0x4B 0x4C 0x4D 0x4E 0x4F 0x50

0x51 0x52 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0xe0

0x5c 0x00 0x53 0x54 0x55 0x56 0x57 0x58

0x59 0x5A 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37

0x38 0x39 0x00 0x00 x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 225

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Examples

S The first example remaps three characters. It applies only to the 2415,

2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal. It does not apply to the

6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal because U.S. English values are correct in these terminals.

S The second example applies to the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or

248X Terminal. This example remaps 14 characters appropriate to U.S.

English to 14 characters more appropriate to Austrian/German.

S The third example applies to the 6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, or

11XX Terminal. This example also remaps 14 characters appropriate to

U.S. English to 14 characters more appropriate to Austrian/German.

Example 1

ASCII hexadecimal file 3270.XLT remaps 3 characters

0x9B 0xBD

0x0E 0x7C

0x7C 0xDD

EBCDIC Hex Value

7C |

Original to be Replaced Replacement for Display

ø ¢

‡ |

226 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Example 2

ASCII hexadecimal file 3270.XLT remaps for German

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 284X)

0x9B 0x8E

0x0E 0x21

0x21 0x9A

0x24 0x24

0xAA 0x5E

0x7C 0x94

0x60 0x60

0x23 0x23

0x40 0xF5

0x22 0x22

0x7E 0xE1

0x7B 0x84

0x7D 0x81

0x5C 0x99

EBCDIC Hex Value

}

{

Original to be Replaced Replacement for Display

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 227

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Example 3

ASCII hexadecimal file 3270.XLT remaps for German

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

0x9B 0x8E

0x0E 0x21

0x21 0x9A

0x24 0x24

0xAA 0x5E

0x7C 0x94

0x60 0x60

0x23 0x23

0x40 0x15

0x22 0x22

0x7E 0xE1

0x7B 0x84

0x7D 0x81

0x5C 0x99

EBCDIC Hex Value

}

{

Original to be Replaced Replacement for Display

228 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Downloading Files

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X Terminals

You can use one of several methods to download a file to a 2415, 2425,

2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal, including:

S LOADER.EXE file loader utility.

Note that using this utility will automatically restart the TE 2000 application.

S T24FCOPY.EXE through a serial connection from your Trakker Antares terminal to your personal computer

S The Download Server feature on the Intermec Application Server to a

Trakker Antares terminal loaded with UDP Plus

S A TFTP application on a personal computer or host to a Trakker Antares terminal loaded with TCP/IP

To use these methods, refer to your terminal’s user manual for help.

To restart your TE application, do one of the following:

S Scan the following bar code label. You can also send the Reset Firmware command over the network. For help, see your terminal’s user manual.

Reset Firmware

*/M.*

*-.*

S Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to configure the Resume Execution command to resume “not allowed.” Choose Terminal

Menu from the Configuration Menu and then choose Power Management. Each time you press œ to turn on the Trakker Antares terminal, it boots and restarts your application. See the terminal’s user manual.

S Access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System and select the TE application through the File Manager option. For help, see your terminal’s user manual.

The Trakker Antares terminal restarts your TE application using the configuration saved in CONFIG.DAT.

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60 Terminals

From your web browser, use the ftp://<IP address> URL to download files.

For the terminal, use the Microsoft ActiveSync application like described on page 170.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 229

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

6400, 5055 Terminals

Before you can download a file to a 6400 Computer or 5055 Data

Collection PC, configure INTERLNK on a desktop or laptop PC.

INTERLNK, part of MS-DOS, is a device driver that connects your 6400

Computer or 5055 PC and personal computer through their serial ports.

This connection enables you to exchange files. It also enables you to edit the 6400 or 5055 configuration files, such as CONFIG.DAT.

INTERSVR is the INTERLNK server and is a communications option on your 6400 Computer or 5055 PC. INTERLNK and INTERSVR are provided with DOS and shipped with your 6400 or 5055 toolkit. For complete installation instructions, refer to the README.TXT file provided with 6400 Computers and 5055 PCs.

Reprogramming Flash Memory

Flash upgrades can be ordered on diskette from Intermec (contact a representative), or downloaded from the Intermec Knowledge Central (see

Before You Begin ). Read all instructions before proceeding.

Note : Keep terminals on charge when setting up, reprogramming, or reflashing.

Prerequisites for INTERLNK Flash Update

S A working 6400 Computer or 5055 PC to do this procedure (if the flash is corrupted, perform a serial master mode boot).

S A RAM drive (D:) of at least 960 KB.

S A disk file contains the flash archive, 50BDXXXX.EXE. The last four numbers indicate the flash version ( 0129 indicates flash version 1.29).

S A standard host PC for connecting to the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC.

INTERLNK.EXE must be loaded by the CONFIG.SYS file. For more detailed information on running INTERLNK, refer to a DOS manual.

S A NULL modem cable to connect the host PC’s communications port to the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC with a single dock or communication adapter.

INTERLNK Installation

Use the following instructions if you have a version of flash that includes

INTERSVR as a possible Comm option on your 6400 Computer or 5055

PC. If you do not have INTERSVR, you must update the flash using a serial master mode boot.

The following instructions assume that you have placed all files from the self-extracting archive in a directory (on your host personal computer) called C:\PENKEY\FLASH. If you choose to place these files in a different location, adjust the instructions accordingly.

Note : Delete the self-extracting file from this directory once the files are extracted.

230 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

Your host personal computer must be running INTERLNK, which is part of MS-DOS. Load INTERLNK as a device driver in your CONFIG.SYS

file, using the following statement, at the end of the CONFIG.SYS file

(after any other statement that creates a drive letter):

DEVICE=C:\DOS\INTERLNK.EXE /DRIVES:3

The previous statement assumes that MS-DOS is located in the host PC

C:\DOS directory. The /DRIVES: 3 parameter allows mapping of three drives from the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC.

INTERLNK and INTERSVR

INTERLNK is a device driver that interconnects a 6400 Computer or

5055 PC and a host personal computer through serial ports. INTERSVR is the INTERLNK server, a communication option in the Norand

Utilities program. These two resources are provided with ROM DOS 6.22

and are shipped with the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC toolkit. A standard null modem cable connects the personal computer to the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC. A TTY TCOM cable also works. A dock is needed for the

6400 Computer or 5055 PC or a communication adapter that plugs onto the bottom end of the terminal.

INTERLNK causes the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC drives to appear as virtual drives on the host personal computer, with drive letters immediately beyond the highest drive letter currently used on the host personal computer. Typing “INTERLNK” from the host personal computer command line displays the designations of the redirected drives.

For details of INTERLNK and INTERSVR topics, refer to the DOS on-line help text.

INTERLNK is installed on a host PC, using the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe /drives:4

After installation, you can copy the application files to the 6400 Computer or 5055 PC. To terminate INTERSVR, press [ALT] + [F4].

59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals

For a 59XX, 17XX, or 11XX Terminal, use utility program

CHECKCFG.EXE to verify the correctness of your configuration.

Using CHECKCFG to Compile and Decompile Custom Configurations

CHECKCFG reads your configuration and literal files, and reports any syntax errors. It also converts your data files to the proper format for the

TE program.

The ASCII text of the configuration file converts to a compressed binary format to save space in the terminal. CHECKCFG can reverse the operation by converting a binary file into its ASCII source. CHECKCFG can also list set-up parameters, their types, and their allowable values.

To display the program version number and a short message that lists the different command line formats for the program, type checkcfg

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 231

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

232

Converting Files from ASCII to Binary

To convert an ASCII parameter file into binary format before downloading it to a terminal, use the following command line: checkcfg <input config file> cfglit.dat

<output config file>

S <input config file> is the name of your ASCII text parameter file

S <output config file> is the name of the file that you must append to your

TE hex file. The output file must be named CONFIG.DAT.

Converting Files from Binary to ASCII

To convert a binary parameter file back into its ASCII equivalent, use the following command line: checkcfg -r <config file> cfglit.dat

<output file>

S <config file> is the name of your binary parameter file

S CFGLIT.DAT is the name of your terminal literal file

S <output file> is the name of the file that will contain the converted

ASCII output

Listing Parameters and Values

To display a list of all possible setup parameters and their values, use the following command line: checkcfg -p cfglit.dat

Note : The output from this command is about seven hundred lines long.

You may want to redirect it into another file for viewing.

Using FLSHCONV.EXE to Build Customized HEX Files

FLSHCONV.EXE is a utility program that creates Intel-hex files in the proper format for downloading to an 11XX, 17XX, or 59XX Terminal.

FLSHCONV can do the following:

S Locate and append .EXE programs for download in an Intel-hex file

S Append data and configuration files to an existing Intel-hex file

(FLSHCONV cannot locate and append .EXE programs to an existing hex file)

To display the program version number and a short message that lists command line formats, type: flshconv

The following lists FLSHCONV command line options, where <hexnum> represents a hexadecimal segment address and <number> represents a decimal number.

S –f <hexnum>

<hexnum> is the starting address of Flash memory for the terminal.

Default: 8000 (absolute address 0x80000).

S –e <hexnum>

<hexnum> is the ending address of Flash. If you omit this parameter,

FLSHCONV does not report an error if your Flash image is too big.

S –d <hexnum>

<hexnum> is the starting address of memory space for .EXE programs.

Default: 200 (absolute address 0x2000) . You should ordinarily use 60

(absolute address 0x600).

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

S –o <filename>

<filename> is the Intel-hex output file name.

S –v <number>

<number> indicates “verbosity.” Default: 0, meaning no information appears on the standard output device . Intermec recommends a value of 1 to generate a report of where each file is located. You can use higher values, but they may not produce useful information for the end user.

S –a

This option tells FLSNCONV to append data files to an existing Intelhex file. The hex file must be the first file name on the command line.

The following chart lists FLSHCONV command line arguments.

Terminal

11XX, 256K Flash

11XX, 512K Flash

17XX, 512K Flash

5928-5948, 384K Flash

-f <hexnum> -e <hexnum> -d <hexnum>

-f8000 -eC000 -d60

-f8000

-f9000

-eFFC0

-eE000

-d60

Locating and Appending .EXE Files

As an example, suppose you are building a customized version of the

17XX Flash program FWP170H0.HEX. As a minimum, you must have the following files:

S 1700BIOS.EXE

17XX BIOS program

S KERNEL.EXE

Intermec multitasking services

S FWP170H0.EXE

17XX VT/ANSI TE program

S NORAND.FNT

Display character font file. This may be the standard font file or a customized user replacement.

S CFGLIT.DAT

Terminal literal file. This may be the standard literal file or a customized user replacement.

To bind these files into an Intel-hex file that is ready for download to a

17XX, use the following single command line to build a file called

NEW.HEX: flshconv -f8000 -effcO -d60 1700bios.exe kernel.exe

fwp170h0.exe norand.fnt cfglit.dat -onew.hex

Or, you can create a file that contains each file name on a separate line.

Assuming that file was named 1700FILE.LST, use the following command line for the same results: flshconv -f8000 -effc0 -d60 @1700file.lst

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 233

Chapter 5 — Customizing Your Configuration

234

Appending Data Files To Intel-Hex Files

In the above example, you could have bound the .EXE files together by typing the following (single) command line: flshconv -f8000 -effc0 -d60 1700bios.exe kernel.exe

fwp170h0.exe -o1700exe s.hex

You can then customize the 1700EXES.HEX file with different font files and literal files by typing the following (single) command line: flshconv -effc0 -a 1700exes.hex norand.fntcfglit.dat

–onewlang.hex

You can provide keyboard translation file pairs to change the default key values. The (single) command line is: flshconv -effc0 -a newlang.hex vt220eml.key vt220eml.xlt

-onewkeys.hex

You can specify more than one file pair. For example, you could provide all four file pairs (eight files) to modify the keyboard for each of the four data streams.

Downloading a Hex File

Use these to download a .HEX file to 59XX, 17XX, 11XX Terminals:

S PROGDUX.EXE

(provided with the terminal’s Flash)

S Personal computer

S INTERMEC r cable P/N: 216-806-001, which is a powered Flash cable that plugs into the personal computer’s COM port (note that power is not required for download)

To download a .HEX file:

1 Ensure the terminal is powered ON and PROGDUX.EXE is loaded on the personal computer.

2 Use cable P/N: 216-806-001 to connect the 11XX or 17XX Terminal to the PC. Use cable P/N: 216-831-001 to connect the 59XX Terminal to the personal computer. Power the terminal off. For help, refer to the terminal’s user manual.

Power is not required for download.

3 To receive the .HEX file, the terminal must be in download mode. To enter this mode, press and hold down the terminal’s [I] key as you power up the terminal. For the 17XX 37-key keyboard, press and hold down the [F1] key as you power up the terminal.

4 At the DOS prompt, type: progdux -?

to display a list of command line options.

5 Erase the terminal’s original Flash and download the new .HEX file by typing: progdux -e <newfile> where <newfile> is the name of the

.HEX file.

A successful download will boot the terminal into the TE application. If communications is interrupted, PROGDUX.EXE sends out a negative acknowledgement (NAK) and reset itself to try sending again. No interaction is required except to restore communications.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Data Stream Commands

This chapter describes 3270 SNA/SDLC and asynchronous display data stream commands and orders that the host application can send to the terminals. Orders govern format and data expectations within a data stream command. Also included in this chapter is information on formatting data to be displayed on the terminals.

This chapter is not intended as a specific guide for programming, but a comparison with your existing system. The information helps identify differences between your screen-generating utilities and features supported by the terminals.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 235

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Screen Design Aid

This chapter, along with your Screen Design Aid (SDA) documentation, can help you resolve occasional questions concerning discrepancies that may arise regarding attribute selection and the capabilities of the terminals.

This chapter includes information you may not need, because you can use your SDA to do much, if not all, of the programming to handle commands and orders for the network.

This information is provided to assure you have the most accurate and detailed information available and to describe variations from the 3270 data stream where they occur.

If you are comfortable using the SDA on your host computer, you can flip through this chapter to find out which commands and orders the terminals support. You can then read Chapter 7, “ Extended Commands ,” which describes the extended commands you can use to do operations beyond the capability of the 3278 Model 2 Terminal.

Applications

If you need to write applications specifically for the terminal, it is recommended that you use the corner mode window onto the 3278 Model 2

Terminal and write programs using the portion of the display available without moving the window. This is the most efficient method for developing custom applications for the terminal.

3270 Data Stream Commands

The 3270 data stream consists of application data, commands and structured field functions, and orders which are transmitted between the controller and the host system. The terminals support a subset of the IBM

3270 command structure to display and accept keyboard or scanner input.

The following chart lists the SNA/SDLC and asynchronous commands that the terminals support.

Command

Erase All Unprotected

Erase/Write

Erase/Write Alternate

Read Buffer

Read Modified

Read Modified All

Reset Terminal

System Services Control Point

Write F1

SNA/SDLC (Hex)

Not applicable

Syntax

Asynchronous

236 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Erase All Unprotected Command

The Erase All Unprotected command performs the following functions at the selected terminals:

S Clears unprotected buffer locations to nulls.

S Resets to 0 the MDT bit for each unprotected field.

S Positions cursor address to the first location of the buffer.

Erase/Write Command

The Erase/Write command performs both an erase operation and a write operation, as follows:

1 The erase operation clears the device buffer to nulls, positions the cursor address at the first location in the buffer, and resets the buffer address to its first location.

2 The Erase/Write command performs the write and write control character (WCC) operations in the same manner as the Write command. If no

WCC is sent, the Erase/Write command will not erase the buffer.

Erase/Write Alternate Command

The Erase/Write Alternate command performs the same function in the terminal as the Erase/Write command, and allows both the erase and write operations to take place.

Read Buffer (RB) Command

The RB command causes buffer data from the terminal to be transmitted to the main storage in the central processing unit. All buffer data and nulls from the beginning to the end of the buffer location are included in the transfer. The default setting for the beginning of buffer data transfer is 0.

If the RB command is chained from the Write or Erase/Write command, data transfer will begin from the current buffer address with all nulls suppressed.

The RB response starts with a 3-byte heading that includes the AID character and a 2-character cursor address. The controller inserts a Start Field order to identify the beginning of each field. Alphanumeric data for each field then follows the RB command header.

The RB command data stream uses the following format:

Note : Response times increase for the Read Buffer command because of the large quantity of data processed during the read buffer operation.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 237

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Read Modified Command

A major feature of the Read Modified command is null suppression. During read modified command operations, null codes are not sent.

During a Read Modified command, all modified fields are transferred to the program. All nulls are suppressed during data transfer and thus are not included in the read data stream. As a field is modified by the operator, the

MDT bit is set in the attribute byte for that field. Then, when a read-modified operation is performed, successive attribute bytes are examined for a set MDT bit. When the bit is found, the data in the associated field is read

(with nulls suppressed) before the next attribute byte is examined. If the screen is unformatted the entire screen (with nulls suppressed) is sent.

Read Modified All Command

The Read Modified All command is the same as the Read Modified command.

Reset Terminal

The Reset Terminal command is an asynchronous command that returns the terminal to its first “state,” a known condition. All terminals are reset when “t” is omitted. Terminals respond to a poll with their power-up message.

Function Syntax

Resets terminal(s) Gt<cr> [t only]

G<cr> [all]

Controller

OK<cr>

R Response tP,x<cr>

Variables

S t = Terminal number (network address)

S x= Terminal type code (071 for 3270)

Example

Command: G002<cr>

Response: Controller resets terminal 002

System Services Control Point (SSCP) Command

The SSCP command reads in new data from the host and places it at the current cursor position. If a 0x15 new line character is among the data, the terminal performs a newline function. The SSCP command has no orders or WCC character associated with it. The command generates an unformatted screen.

238 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Write Command

A Write command from the host computer consists of a command code, a

WCC, and any orders or new buffer data (or both) required to modify the existing buffer contents. Execution of the Write command is in two steps:

1) The WCC is processed and 2) Buffer data and orders are processed.

Data may be any ASCII character in the range of 0x20 to 0x7E, and must define the character content of a field.

Buffer data characters may be written into any buffer location without erasing or modifying data in other locations. Data is stored in successive buffer locations until orders alter buffer addresses, or all data is entered.

During the write operation, the buffer address advances one location as each character is stored. If the SBA order does not immediately follow the

WCC command, terminals will write data from the first buffer location.

Write Control Character

Bits 0, 1, and 2 of the WCC cause action in the terminal. The following describes the format of the WCC byte.

S 0 Reset MDT bits

When set to 1, all MDT bits in the selected buffer are reset before any data is written or orders are executed.

S 1 Keyboard restore bit

When set to 1, the terminal allows input. The stations locks out all data when it sends data to the host and will not accept input until it receives a command with this bit set.

S 2 Sound alarm bit

When set to 1, selected terminals emit three short beeps after operation.

S 3–7 Unused (“do not care”) bits.

Note : Bit numbers are in the opposite order of those described in the IBM

3270 Information Display System Component Description manual.

The terminal ignores all WCC bits defined as “unused.” Only the three least significant bits of the WCC byte cause action in the terminal. These are converted to ASCII characters. Appendix C, “ Conversion Tables ,” contains a binary to ASCII conversion table.

Orders and buffer data follow the WCC. Data characters are any of the displayable ASCII characters in the range hexadecimal 20 through 7E.

They define the character content of a protected or unprotected field.

Buffer data characters may be written into any specific location of the buffer without erasing or modifying the data in other buffer locations.

Data characters are stored in successive buffer locations until an order alters the buffer address, or until all data is entered.

During the write operation, the buffer address is advanced one location as each character is stored. If the Set Buffer Address order does not immediately follow WCC, the terminal starts writing data from the first buffer location.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 239

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

3270 Data Stream Format

The 3270 data stream terminal command format (WtDxyz) is an asynchronous format that an asynchronous host uses to send data to the terminal.

Syntax

WtDxyz<cr>

Controller Response

None

R Response tKas{Atu.../Atu}<cr>

Variables

S t = Terminal number

S x = 3270 data stream command:

Erase All Unprotected

5 Erase/Write

= Erase Write Alternate

2 Read Buffer

6 Read Modified

> Read modified all

G Reset terminal

4 SSCP

1 Write

S y = 3270 write control character (WCC)

Bit 0 Reset MDT bits

Bit 1 Keyboard restore

Bit 2 Sound alarm

S z = Terminal orders or <1024 characters

S a = AID key code

S s = 4-byte right-justified, zero-filled address of the current cursor position when the AID key was pressed (values 0-1919)

S /At = Set Buffer order followed by a 4-byte right-justified, zero-filled address of the field from where the data is returned

S u = Data entered or modified for this field

S {} = Optional

240 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Example

Command: W000D5G/A0000/F’ID:/F@%/A0017/F’/A0081/

DESCRIPTION:/A0160/F@%/A0177/F’/A0241/

QUANTITY:/F@&/A0253/F’<cr>

This command is for a terminal in the window and 16x9 display mode.

The command displays the following on the terminal:

ID:%

DESCRIPTION:

QUANTITY:&

If the user enters “210458236” for the ID field, “PEACH CRATES” for the description field, and “85” for the quantity field, the screen displays:

ID:210458236

DESCRIPTION:

PEACH CRATES

QUANTITY: 85

When the terminal operator presses [ENTER], the host receives the following response:

000K’0252/A0004210458236/A0161PEACH CRATES/A025085

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 241

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Orders

Terminal orders may be included in each 3270 data stream command, either alone or intermixed with display data. Terminal orders are executed sequentially, and only after the complete data stream has been received by the terminal and checked for errors. Orders are not stored in the display buffer with other data in the data stream. For the asynchronous data stream, they are added to the data stream following a “/” character.

Buffer control orders position, define, and format data being written into the buffer. They also erase selected unprotected data in the buffer and reposition the cursor address. The following table lists the orders.

3270 Data Stream Orders

Code

Order

EUA

SCN

SBA

SNA/SDLC Async.*

12 /Exxxx

/Rxxxxy

Byte 2

1st address byte

Not used

1st address byte

Byte 3 Byte 4

2nd address byte Not used

Not used

2nd address byte Character to be repeated

/Sttt**

/Axxxx

Bar code control byte 1st option byte 2nd option byte

1st address byte 2nd address byte Not used

Not used 1D /Fa Attribute character Not used xxxx = a 4-byte buffer address, 0 to 1919, right-adjusted, zero-filled y = character to be repeated ttt = scanner order designator a = an attribute byte

/Sttt applies only to the 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX.

The following pages describe buffer control orders executed sequentially at the selected terminal after the complete data stream was received by the station and checked for data integrity. These orders are not stored in the display buffer.

Most of the buffer control orders position, define, and format data written into the buffer, erase selected unprotected data in the buffer, and reposition the cursor address. The Scanner order is an extension of the 3270 data stream and is not supported by the 3278 Model 2.

242 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

EUA Order

The Erase Unprotected to Address (EUA) order inserts nulls in all unprotected buffer locations, starting at the current buffer address and ending at

(but not including) the specified stop address. For the asynchronous data stream, the stop address is specified by address bytes “xxxx” which immediately follow the EUA order in the write data stream. For SNA/

SDLC (non-Telnet), the stop address is specified by the two address bytes which immediately follow the EUA in the write data stream.

If an invalid stop address is specified (that is, an address outside the range of the terminal’s display buffer) the following occur in random order:

S The write operation is terminated at this point.

S The character is not stored.

S The terminal recognizes this as an error condition and performs a clear memory operation.

S The display buffer is set to nulls.

S A clear AID character is transmitted to the terminal control unit for forwarding to the host computer.

When the stop address is lower than the current buffer address, the EUA order wraps from the end of the buffer to the beginning of the buffer and continues. When the stop address equals the current buffer address, all unprotected character locations in the buffer are erased (set to nulls).

Insert Cursor (IC) Order

The IC order changes the stored cursor address to the location specified by the current buffer address. The current buffer address does not change.

For example, if the IC order is issued when the current buffer address is

320 and the present stored cursor address is 0 (zero), the cursor address changes from 0 to 320. The current buffer address at the end of this operation remains at address 320. If multiple IC orders appear in the write data stream, the last one encountered is used in subsequent operations.

If the IC order is placed at a location past the end of display on the terminal, the current buffer address will be updated so that the cursor address will be located on the display.

At the end of write data stream, after all orders have been executed by the terminal and all required data has been entered into the buffer, the stored cursor address determines which unprotected field should be displayed to the user first. The following algorithm is used:

1 The terminal searches the buffer backward to find the first protected field attribute before the stored cursor address. Unprotected attributes are not considered.

2 The terminal executes a forward tab (or equivalent) to an unprotected field.

3 If a protected field attribute is not found before the first location of the display buffer is found (location 0), then an unconditional forward tab equivalent is executed to display the first unprotected field in the buffer.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 243

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Program Tab (PT) Order

The PT order advances the current buffer address of the first character position to the next unprotected field. Special conditions are as follows:

S If the PT order is issued when the current buffer address is the location of an attribute byte of an unprotected field, the buffer address is set to the next location of that field (location 1).

S If a PT order follows data, the rest of the field is null-filled.

S If a PT order in the write data stream does not follow a control command, order (or order sequence such as WCC), IC order, or RA order

(4-character sequence), nulls are inserted from the current buffer address to the end of the field.

S When the PT order follows a control command, order, or sequence order, the buffer content is not modified for that field.

The PT order stops its search at the last location in the buffer. If an attribute character for an unprotected field is not found by this point, the buffer address is set to 0 (first location of the buffer). If the PT order finds an unprotected attribute in the last location of the buffer, the buffer address is still set to location 0.

To continue the search for an unprotected attribute, a second PT order must be issued immediately following the first one. Since the current buffer address was set to 0 by the first PT order, the second PT order begins its search starting at location 0. If the previous PT order was inserting nulls in each character location when it was terminated at the last buffer location, the new PT order will continue to insert nulls from buffer location 0 to the end of the current field.

Repeat Address (RA) Order

The RA order stores a character “y” in all buffer locations starting at the current buffer address and ending at (but not including) the specified stop address. For the asynchronous protocol, the stop address is “xxxx.” The stop address and the character to be repeated are identified by the five bytes immediately following the RA order in the write data stream.

For the SNA/SDLC protocol, the third character following the RA order is always interpreted as the character to be repeated. If an invalid stop address is specified (such as an address outside the range of the terminal’s display buffer), the following occur (not necessarily in the order listed):

S The write operation is terminated at that point.

S The character is not stored.

S The terminal recognizes this as an error condition.

S The terminal automatically performs a clear memory operation.

S The entire display buffer is set to nulls.

S A clear AID character is transmitted to the terminal control unit for forwarding to the host.

244 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

When the stop address is lower than the current buffer address, the RA operation wraps from the end of the buffer to the beginning of the buffer and continues. When the stop address equals the current buffer address, the specified character is stored in all buffer locations.

Attribute characters will be overwritten by the RA order if they occur before the RA order stop address.

/Sttt Scanner (SCN) Order

Note : /Sttt applies only to the 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX.

The SCN order is an extension to the 3270 data stream and is not supported by IBM display terminal. The order tells the terminal which bar code algorithm to apply to the bar code data read by the bar code reading device, and what the minimum and maximum length range of a valid decode is.

When auto-discriminating bar codes, the probability of a cross-substitution increases. To reduce this probability, the application can enable only certain algorithms and specify the minimum and maximum number of characters needed for a good decode.

The SCN parameters are stored in the terminal and do not need to be sent with every Write command. These parameters are in effect for all data fields (that is, they are not specific to any one field). If the decoded data is not within the bounds of the SCN parameters, then the decode is considered to be bad. If the decode meets the SCN parameters, then the data is passed to the keyboard handler which may reject the data if it does not fit the target field attributes.

The SCN order has the following format:

Syntax: (/Sttt)

S S = SCN order

S First t = bar code control

S Second t = option byte 1

S Third t = option byte 2

The “bar code control” byte indicates the method by which the option bytes are to be decoded. You may need to send multiple SCN orders to handle all parameters and bar codes that may be used. The terminal contains the bar code algorithms for those bar codes listed in the table on the next page. For additional bar code scanning options for the terminal using the 3270 extended command set, see “Scan (#S)” in Chapter 7, “ Extended

Commands .”

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 245

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Scanner Order Byte Definitions

Parameter

Bar code length

UPC bar codes

EAN bar codes

CODE 39 bar codes

PLESSEY bar codes

CODABAR bar codes

CODE 93 bar codes

2 of 5 bar codes

Bar Code

Control Byte (Hex)

Option Byte 1 Option Byte 2 Bit Definitions

Maximum length Minimum length

Bit 5 = Enable UPC

Bit 4 = Enable UPC with add-ons

Bit 3 = Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

Bit 2 = UPC-E System 1

Bit 5 = Enable EAN

Bit 4 = Enable EAN with add ons

Bit 5 = Enable CODE 39

Bit 4 = Enable Extended CODE 39

Bit 5 = Enable PLESSEY

Bit 4 = Retain 2nd check digit

Bit 3 = Validate 1st check digit

Bit 2 = Retain 1st check digit

Bit 1 = MOD 10 1st check digit

Bit 0 = MOD 11 1st check digit

Bit 5 = Enable ABC CODABAR

Bit 4 = Enable CODABAR

Bit 5 = Enable CODE 93

Bit 5 = Enable Straight 2 of 5

Bit 4 = Enable Computer Identics 2 of 5

Bit 3 = Enable Interleaved 2 of 5

Redundancy

Scanning options

Bit 3 = Enable CCD 20/20 scanning

Bit 2 = Enable HP wand scanning

Bit 1 = Enable CCD 20/20 redundancy

Bit 0 = Enable laser beam redundancy

Bit 6 = Enable use of bits 1 and 2

Bit 5 = Enable bar code type character

Bit 4 = Enable scanning concatenation

Bit 3 = Enable auto scan/forward tab

Bit 2 = Enable auto scan/enter

Bit 1 = Laser Scanner voltage: 0-5 volts,

1-12 volts (RT3210 Radio Terminal)

Bit 0 = Enable MOD 10 check digit

1 The maximum and minimum values for bar code lengths must be a value between hexadecimal 01 and hexadecimal 20 (decimals 1 and 31). If an LS order (bar code control byte hexadecimal 00) is not sent to the terminal, the default setting is a minimum length of 1 and maximum length of 32.

All values above (hexadecimal yy) are hex values for the lower six bits of the bytes. With the 3270 data stream, these values need to be converted into EBCDIC display characters. An EBCDIC conversion chart is provided in Appendix C, “ Conversion Tables .”

2 The bar code control byte for 2 OF 5 (hexadecimal 09) requires four additional bytes of information, which directly follow option byte 2. These fields must have a value in the lower 6 bits between hexadecimal 01and 20 (decimals 1 and 32), and be converted to display characters by using the

EBCDIC conversion chart in Appendix C, “ Conversion Tables .” The required extra fields are:

3 Scanning options may also be set through the terminal’s firmware menus or TE configuration menus.

246 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

The following chart shows an example of an SCN order in a write data stream. In this example Code 39 and Extended Code 39 are enabled with a maximum length of 24 and a minimum length of 8. CCD redundancy is also enabled.

Byte Value (Hex) Meaning

1F Scanner order (SCN)

Bar code control byte, Code 39

Option byte 1

Option byte 2, enable Code 39 and Extended Code 39

Scanner order (SCN)

Bar code control byte, bar code lengths

Option byte 1, maximum length of 24 (decimal)

Option byte 2, minimum length of 8 (decimal)

Scanner order (SCN)

Bar code control byte, redundancy

Option byte 1

Set Buffer Address (SBA) Order

The 3-byte SBA order specifies a new buffer address from which operations are to start or continue. Operations start at address 0 by default.

Use the SBA order to write data into various areas of the buffer. An SBA order may also do the following:

S Precede another order in the data stream to specify the starting address for a PT , RA , or EUA order.

S Specify the address at which an attribute byte is stored by an SF order.

S Specify the cursor address for an IC order.

If the SBA order specifies an invalid address (that is, an address outside the range of the terminal’s display buffer) the following occur:

1 The write operation is terminated at that point.

2 The terminal recognizes this as an error condition.

3 The terminal automatically performs a clear memory operation.

4 The entire display buffer is set to nulls.

5 A clear AID character is transmitted to the terminal control unit for forwarding to the host.

The result of this action is the same as if the user had selected Function 7

(clear memory).

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 247

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Start Field (SF) Order

The SF order notifies the terminal that the next byte in the write data stream is an attribute character. The terminal stores the next byte and attribute character at the current buffer address. As the attribute character is stored, the terminal sets a control bit at the address. This bit identifies the byte as an attribute character during subsequent program or device operations with the buffer data.

Note : The byte immediately following the SF order in the data stream is always stored as an attribute character, even when the byte is intended as an order or an alphanumeric data character.

The byte following the SF order defines the characteristics or “attributes” of the data that follows. Each attribute character, plus all the data following it up to the next attribute character (or the last location of the buffer) is called a field.

In addition to defining the start of a field, attribute characters define these characteristics for all character locations contained within the field:

S Protected from modification by the user, or unprotected (available for the operator to modify or enter data). The unprotected definition classifies the field as an input field.

S Alphanumeric (an input field in which the operator can enter alphabetic, numeric, or symbol characters) or numeric (an input field in which the period, dash, and numbers 0-9 may be used).

S Field displayed or not displayed to the user.

248 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Each character occupies one of the character locations in the buffer, but cannot display. The following table lists attribute character bit assignments. During display operations, attribute characters appear as blanks.

3270 Attribute Character Bit Assignments

Byte # Description

3, 2

Not used

0 = Unprotected

1 = Protected

0 = Alphanumeric

1 = Numeric only

00 = Field is displayable, normal video mode

01 = Field is displayable, normal video mode

10 = Field is displayable, reverse video mode

11 = Field is nondisplayable

1 = Keyboard only data

0 = Keyboard or bar code reader input allowed

0 MDT bit identifies modified fields which must be sent to the controller when transmission begins:

0 = Field has not been modified.

1 = Field has been modified; may also be set by the application program in the data stream to force transmission of a particular field.

* Bits 5 and 4 equal to 11 cause an automatic skip.

Attribute characters are treated as characters that are protected from user intervention. They cannot be replaced by alphanumeric characters entered from the keyboard or scanner. However, the MDT of the attribute can be changed by the operator by using the previous table. Also, attribute characters are not protected from being overwritten by alphanumeric data that is included in a Write , Erase/Write , or Erase All Unprotected command data stream.

Additional SF features include Automatic Skip , Auto-Forward Tab , and

Auto Enter .

Automatic Skip

Automatic Skip automatically forwards tabs to the next input field when the current input field is full. This is done by setting the attribute byte of the next field to be protected and numeric (bits 5 and 4 of the attribute character are equal to 11). This indicates to the terminal that when the last byte in the input field is filled, the terminal should advance to the next input field.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 249

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

Auto-Forward Tab

The Auto-Forward Tab on a good bar code scan is used for unprotected

(input) fields to allow keystroke operations to be emulated upon the detection of a good scan. The Auto-Forward Tab will automatically advance to the next input field after processing bar code data.

For asynchronous communications, initiate this feature by inserting a “%” character in the first byte of an unprotected (input) field after the attribute byte of a SF order (/Fa%).

Auto Enter

The Auto Enter feature is also used for unprotected input fields to allow emulation of keystroke operations when a good scan is detected.

Auto Enter on a good bar code scan will automatically emulate the pressing of the

[Enter] key after processing bar code data. This sends the data to the host system.

For asynchronous communications, initiate this feature by inserting an

“&” character in the first byte of an unprotected input field after the attribute byte of a SF order (/Fa&).

Sending Data to the Host

Data is returned to the host computer when the operator presses the [Enter] key on the terminal’s keyboard. When this happens, the station transmits all modified data fields back to the host computer. Data is returned to the host computer in the following format:

250 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

3270 AID Keys

The 3270 AID keys request an application program from the host computer. Press [Enter], [F1]–[F24], [PA1], [PA2], [PA3], or the [CLEAR] key for the desired program. The AID key sends the AID code (an ASCII value) and any modified data. The [CLEAR], [PA1], [PA2], and [PA3] keys send only the AID code. This table lists AID keys and values.

3270 Function Key Conversions

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

Enter

Clear

PA1

PA2

PA3

F10

F11

F12

AID Key

Hexadecimal

’

ASCII

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 251

Chapter 6 — Data Stream Commands

252 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Extended Commands

Extended commands govern abilities unique to terminals. You can use extended commands to transmit or receive data over the terminal’s RS-232 port, send information to an RS-232 device (such as a printer or bar code printer), or collect data. The following chart lists the commands.

Name

Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port

Receive Only On RS-232 Port

Set Parameters (supported on 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Return Version

Tone

Scan

Get Optical Inputs (supported on 248X)

Read, Set, and Reset Relay Commands (supported on 248X)

Magnetic Card Reader (supported on 700 Series)

To use extended commands, you must enable the extended command option through the TE configuration menus. See Chapter 4, “ Using the Terminal Emulation Menus ,” for information about enabling the command on a terminal.

Characters

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 253

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port (#F)

Use the #F extended command to transmit and receive data on the terminal’s RS-232 port.

When constructing a Transmit and Receive command, the data to be sent should be placed at Line 2, Column 1. The data must be less than 1840 bytes in length (after “=yy” compression, where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte). The last character must be a “#”

(pound sign). The terminal sends the data to the RS-232 port until it detects a “#” character.

Line 2, Column 1, begins the start of transmit data. The host application must set up the screen with a transmit field to locate the RS-232 port I/O data. The field can be anywhere on the screen, beginning at position 80.

The host application must supply the receive field (for response from the

RS-232 port to the host). The receive field can be anywhere on the screen except for the position allocated for the return status field.

The output stream appears in ASCII character format. For bytes that are not displayable ASCII characters, you may insert the “=yy” characters, where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte. For example, insert “=0D” if your printer requires a carriage return, or insert

“=0A” for a line feed. Appendix D, “ Terminal Font Set Table ,” contains other hexadecimal values.

254 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Transmit and Receive Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–24

Column Description

2 Extended command

Transmit and Receive on RS-232 Port command

Speed (bits per second)

Character

1=1200; 2=2400; 3=4800; 4=9600; 5=19200;

6=38400

Data parity

Data bits

Stop bits

For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX: CTS flow control

For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020,

700 Series: Reserved

For 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX: DTR flow control

For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400,

5020, 700 Series: Reserved

XON/XOFF flow control 10

11–12 Flow control timeout value

13 Return AID key

14–15

16–17

Maximum characters to receive

Delimiter character

N=None; 0 (zero)=None; b=None; E=Even; O=Odd

7=Seven; 8=Eight

1=One; 2=Two

0=Disable; 1=Enable b

0=Disable; 1=Enable

XX=Number of seconds b=AID key is Enter (default).

X=AID key character. See the “Return AID Keys” table on page 257 for return AID key characters.

bb=Default dd or Xd … dX, where: dd=00–99.

Default: 99.

d … d=Any number of decimal digits from 0–2000, inclusive.

Default: 99.

AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code that marks the end of data to be received. Range: 00-7E.

Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.

18–19 Number of delimiter characters

20–21

24–25

Start character

Return start character to host

Flag parity errors

Receive timeout length

XX=Number of characters accepted before sending return code to host. Range: 00–99.

Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.

AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code. Range: 00–99. Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.

F=Return character b=Do not return character

P=Flag b=Do not flag

XX=Number of seconds the terminal waits for input from the RS-232 port before it sends a timeout error. Uses the 5-second default when field contains spaces.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 255

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Flow Control

The Transmit command supports these types of flow control:

S RTS/CTS (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

S DTR/DSR (59XX only)

S XON/XOFF

Use CTS and DSR flow control lines to show XON/XOFF conditions from the output device. Also use them to prevent output when the terminal has no output device. The output device DTR should connect to either the DSR or CTS lines. On the 59XX Terminal, DTR is normally low and is raised to indicate that the terminal is prepared for an RS-232 data exchange.

XON/XOFF is the same XON/XOFF flow control most devices support.

The timeout value tells the terminal how long to wait for the flow control handshake before returning a one-byte error value.

256 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Return AID Key Characters

The following table lists the extended command AID keys and characters returned to the host. For example, if you want an F1 AID key, use “A” as the character. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Return AID Keys

F18

F19

F20

F21

F14

F15

F16

F17

F22

PA1

PA2

PA3

F10

F11

F12

F13

AID Key

Enter

Clear

Character b

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 257

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Return Codes for Transmit and Receive

Line 24, Column 1, has the return status field. The code returned in this position tells the host the extended command status. The codes are listed in this chart.

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

1 Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits or stop bits, or flow control timeout.

No delimiter (#) on data stream.

Timeout while using CTS flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX) .

Timeout while using DTR flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Timeout while using XON/XOFF flow control.

Improper return field.

Hexadecimal value is outside the range of 00–0F.

Error in AID code.

Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.

Incorrect setting for delimiter character.

Column

(None)

4, 6, 7, 11–12

Incorrect setting for number of delimiter characters.

Incorrect setting for CTS, DSR, or XON/OFF flow control.

Incorrect setting for start character.

Incorrect setting for data parity.

17–18

8, 9, 10

19–20

5, 22 f/F* Timeout.

o/O* Overrun of UART receive register; an error from the RS-232 device.

(None)

(None) p/P* Data parity or framing error.

R Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected).

(Applies only to the 17XX Terminal.)

(None)

An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the

RD5500 Remote Display (applies only to the 17XX Terminal).

(None)

15–16, 19–20

(None)

13–14

15–16

258 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Example of Transmit and Receive

The following example and chart show what would be sent to a terminal to cause data to be transmitted and received.

Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 23 b#F4N81bb000b500A0102bb10

This is data to send.#

Line 1

Line 2

Column Character Description

1 b This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Transmit and Receive command.

9600 baud.

No parity.

11–12 00

13 b

14–15 50

16–17 0A

18–19 01

20–21 02

23 b b

24–25 10

Eight data bits.

One stop bit.

No CTS flow control.

No DTR flow control.

No XON/OFF flow control.

No flow control timeout value.

AID key is Enter.

Receive a maximum of 50 characters.

Delimiter character is 0A hexadecimal (line feed).

Data will be sent to host after 1 delimiter character is received.

Start character is 02 hexadecimal (STX).

Start character will not be returned.

Do not flag parity errors.

Receive timeout length is 10 seconds.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 259

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port (#P)

The Transmit Only On RS-232 Port extended command lets the terminal send information to a slaved RS-232 device, such as a receipt printer or bar code printer. The command uses the RS-232 communications port to send data to the device. The terminal checks data from the host computer for a transmit sequence, then sends the requested data. The host computer signals the terminal for a transmit command by inserting the characters

“#P” into the display at Line 1, Columns 2 and 3. Characteristics of the transmission immediately follow the #P command.

When constructing a Transmit Only command, the data to be sent should be placed at Line 2, Column 1. The data must be less than 1840 bytes in length (after “=yy” compression). The last character must be a “#” (pound sign). The terminal sends the data to the RS-232 port until it detects a “#” character.

The output stream takes the form of ASCII characters. For nondisplayable

ASCII characters, you may insert the “=yy” characters, where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte. For example, insert “=0D” if your printer requires a carriage return, or insert “=0A” for a line feed.

Appendix D, “ Terminal Font Set Table ,” contains other values.

260 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings. Note that the line and column information refers to a 3278 unit with a 24-line by 80-column display and that “b” indicates a 1-byte space. The display buffer position refers to the same buffer but with a linear array ranging from 0–1919.

Transmit Only Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–12

Column Description Character

11-12

Extended command

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port command

Speed (bits per second)

Data parity

Data bits

Stop bits

For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX: CTS flow control

For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020,

700 Series: Reserved

For 6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX: DTR flow control

For 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020,

700 Series: Reserved

XON/XOFF flow control

Flow control timeout value

Return AID key

1=1200; 2=2400; 3=4800; 4=9600; 5=19200;

6=38400

N=None; 0 (zero)=None; b=None; E=Even; O=Odd

7=Seven; 8=Eight

1=One; 2=Two

0=Disable; 1=Enable

XX=Number of seconds b=AID key is Enter (default). X=AID key character.

See the “Return AID Keys” table on page 257 for characters.

Flow Control

Transmit Only supports RTS/CTS, DTR/DSR, and XON/XOFF. For descriptions, see page 256.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 261

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Return Codes for Transmit Only

The terminal puts the return code response in an input field in the display buffer at Line 24, Column 1. It simulates the [ENTER] key to return the value to the host.

Use the Start Field order to return a code for this operation. The following chart lists return codes.

Code Description Column f

Good status, transaction complete.

Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits, number of stop bits, or flow control timeout.

No delimiter (#) on data stream.

Timeout while using CTS flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX) .

Timeout while using DTR flow control (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX) .

Timeout while using XON/XOFF flow control.

Improper return field.

Error in AID code.

Incorrect setting for CTS, DTR, or XON/OFF flow control.

Incorrect setting for data parity.

Timeout. No acknowledgment was received from the RD5500 Remote Display (applies to the 17XX Terminal) .

(None)

4, 6, 7, 11–12

(None)

8, 9, 10

(None) o/O* Overrun of UART receive register.

p/P* Data parity or framing error.

(None)

Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected).

(Applies to the 17XX Terminal.)

(None)

An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the

RD5500 Remote Display (applies only to the 17XX Terminal).

262 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Example of Transmit Only

The following example and chart show what would be sent to a terminal to cause data to be transmitted. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space. Following the example is an explanation of Line 1.

Column 1 Column 11 b#P3N81bb005A

This is data to send.#

Line 1

Line 2

11–12

Column Character

1 b

Description

This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Transmit Only command.

4800 baud.

No parity.

Eight data bits.

One stop bit.

No CTS flow control.

No DTR flow control.

No XON/OFF flow control.

Flow control timeout is 5 seconds.

AID key is [F1].

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 263

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Receive Only On RS-232 Port (#G)

Note : There are no flow control settings for extended command #G.

The Receive Only On RS-232 Port extended command provides a way to use the RS-232 port on the terminal to collect data. A scale is one example of a use for this command. The host computer sends “#G” characters to alert the terminal for activity on the port.

Line 2, Column 1, is the start of the area on the screen where an input field may be placed for receive data. The host application must supply the input field for the data received on the RS-232 port. The host can place the input field anywhere on the screen except the position for the return status field.

The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Receive Only Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–24

Column Description Character

8–12

14–15

16–17

Extended command #

Receive Only On RS-232 Port command G

Speed (bits per second)

Data parity

1=1200; 2=2400; 3=4800; 4=9600; 5=19200; 6=38400

N=None; 0 (zero)=None; b=None; E=Even; O=Odd

Data bits

Stop bits

Reserved

Return AID key

Maximum characters to receive

Delimiter character

7=Seven; 8=Eight

1=One; 2=Two bbbbb b=AID key is Enter (default). X=AID key character. See the

“Return AID Keys” table on page 257 for characters.

bb=Default dd or Xd … dX, where: dd=00-99.

Default: 99.

d … d=Any number of decimal digits from 0–2000, inclusive.

Default: 99.

AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code that marks the end of data to be received. Range: 00–7E.

Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.

18–19 Number of delimiter characters

20–21

Start character

Return start character to host

Flag parity errors

24–25 Receive timeout length

XX=Number of characters accepted before sending return code to host. Range: 00–99.

Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.

AA=Hexadecimal ASCII code. Range: 00–99. Default of 00 or bb implies no start character.

F=Return character; b=Do not return character

P=Flag ; b=Do not flag

XX=Number of seconds the terminal waits for input from the

RS-232 port before it sends a timeout error. Uses the 5-second default when field contains spaces.

264 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Return Codes for Receive Only

Line 24, Column 1, is the return status byte. The host application defines the 1-byte return status field location. The following chart lists return status codes.

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

1 Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits, or number of stop bits.

No delimiter (#) on data stream.

Improper return field.

Hexadecimal value is outside the range of 00–0F.

Error in AID code.

Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.

Incorrect setting for delimiter character.

Incorrect setting for number of delimiter characters.

Incorrect setting for start character.

Incorrect setting for data parity.

Column

(None)

4, 6, 7 f/F* Timeout.

o/O* Overrun of UART receive register.

p/P* Data parity or framing error.

R Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected).

(Applies only to the 17XX Terminal.)

(None)

An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the

RD5500 Remote Display (applies only to the 17XX Terminal).

(None)

15–16, 19–20

(None)

13–14

15–16

17–18

19–20

5, 22

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 265

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Example of Receive Only

The following example and chart show what would be sent to the terminal to cause data to be received. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 23 b#G3N81bbbbbb500A0102FP10

Column Character

1 b

8–12

14–15

16–17

18–19

20–21

24–25

1 bbbbb b

Description

This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Receive Only command.

4800 baud.

No parity.

Eight data bits.

One stop bit.

Reserved.

AID key is Enter.

Receive a maximum of 50 characters.

Delimiter character is 0A hexadecimal (line feed).

Data sent to host after one delimiter character is received

Start character is 02 hexadecimal (STX).

Start character will be returned to host.

Parity errors will be flagged

Receive timeout length is 10 seconds.

266 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Set Parameters (#H)

Note : This extended command is supported only on 6400, 5055, 59XX,

17XX, and 11XX Terminals.

Use Set Parameters to set TE configuration parameters (part of the configuration menus) that you would otherwise set at the terminal.

Set most of the parameters once per terminal. You can set them when you install a network or when you add terminals to the network. Unless the terminal fails (perhaps a dead battery) or a user does something destructive

(such as a RAM test), you probably will not need to set them again. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Note : Some parameters do not apply to all terminal models. Refer to the terminal’s user manual for applicable parameters.

Set Parameters Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–36

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Column Description Character

4–6

7–9

Screen mode (value must be sent, but is ignored)

Remote display (17XX, 11XXs)

Shift key unlock (shift lock value must be sent, but it is ignored)

14 Keyboard lock

15–17 Beeper volume

18–20 Beeper frequency

21–23 Beeper length

24 Stream scan

25–27 Primary screen row size

28–30

31–33

34–36

Extended command

Set Parameters command

Backlight timer

H bbb=No change from current setting; 000=On continuously;

001–255=Seconds to remain on

Sleep timer delay (for legacy RT3210) bbb=No change from current setting; 000=Off;

001–255=Seconds of inactivity before sleep

Cursor mode b=No change from current setting, 1=Underline

2=Underline blink; 3=Block; 4=Block blink

(default) ;

Primary screen column size

Alternate screen row size

Alternate screen column size b=No change from current setting; 1=Center cursor; 2=Corner;

3=Page b=No change from current setting; 0=Not attached; 1=Attached b=No change from current setting; 0=Disable (default) ; 1=Enable b=No change from current; 0=Disable (default) ; 1=Enable bbb=No change from current; 000–255=Range in seconds bbb=No change from current; 000–030=Range (larger is higher) bbb=No change from current; 000–010=Duration in seconds b=No change from current setting; 0=Disable; 1=Enable bbb=No change from current setting;

000-255=Number of rows per display screen bbb=No change from current setting

000-255=Number of columns per display screen bbb=No change from current setting

000-255=Number of rows per display screen bbb=No change from current setting

000-255=Number of columns per display screen

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 267

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Return Codes for Set Parameters

Line 24, Column 1, has the return status field. The code returned in this position tells the host the status of the extended command. The Set

Parameters return code is the status sent to the host computer.

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

Backlight timer parameter invalid.

Sleep mode timer parameter invalid.

Normal cursor set parameter invalid.

Insert cursor set parameter invalid.

Remote display parameter invalid.

Shift key unlock parameter invalid.

Keyboard lock parameter invalid.

Beeper volume parameter invalid.

Beeper frequency parameter invalid.

Beeper length parameter invalid.

Stream scan parameter invalid.

Incorrect setting for number of rows.

Incorrect setting for number of columns.

15–17

18–20

21–23

25–27

28–30

Column

(None)

4–6

7–9

268 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Example of Set Parameters

This example and chart show data for Set Parameters. Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 19 Column 28 Column 36 b#H099bbb341002550220021010080020080

21–23

25–27

28–30

31–33

34–36

Column Character Description

1 b This column typically contains a space.

4–6

099

Extended command.

Set Parameters command.

Backlight stays on for 99 seconds.

7–9

15–17

18–20 bbb

3 b

255

022

No change from current

Cursor is in block mode.

No change from current setting.

Remote display is in use (17XX, 11XX)

Shift key unlock is disabled (ignored).

Keyboard lock is disabled.

(legacy RT3210 Terminal only)

Beeper volume is set at 255.

Beeper frequency setting is set at 22.

002

010

080

020

080

Beeper length is 2 seconds.

Stream scan setting is enabled.

Number of rows in primary screen size is 10.

Number of columns in primary screen size is 80.

Number of rows in alternate screen size is 20.

Number of columns in primary screen size is 80.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 269

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Return Version (#V)

The Return Version extended command returns the current terminal emulation name and version to the host computer. The following table lists columns in which characters must appear.

Return Version Characters — Line 1, Columns 2–3

Column Description

2 Extended command

3 Return Version command

Character

Line 2, Column 1, is the input field large enough to hold the program name and version number followed by the # sign, as shown below, where

“s” is the status.

’0000/A0080 “<program name><version>#”/A1841s

Line 24, Column 1, has the return status field. The code returned in this position tells the host the status of the extended command. The code is 0, which means good status or transaction complete.

270 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Tone (#T)

The Tone extended command causes the terminal to make a tone of a specified volume, frequency, and length ().

Note: For Trakker Antares terminals, volume and frequency are ignored.

The volume is user-selectable via the Trakker Antares firmware menus.

The frequency is set to 1200 Hz.

The following table describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings.

Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Tone Options — Line 1, Columns 2–12

Column Description

4–6

Extended command

Tone command

Volume

7–9 Frequency

10–12 Length

Character

T bbb=No change from current setting;

000–255=Range from quiet to loud bbb=No change from current setting;

000–030=Range from low to high bbb=No change from current setting; 001–010=Duration in 500 ms from short to long (keyboard response time)

The return code is the status sent to the host computer; the code indicates if the extended command was successful. The terminal returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the \\X<CR> format.

X is the return code listed in the following chart.

Code Description

Good status, transaction complete.

Incorrect setting for volume.

Incorrect setting for frequency.

Incorrect setting for length.

Column

(None)

4–6

7–9

10–12

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 271

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Scan (#S)

The Scan extended command allows host systems to have the same capabilities as terminals using the Native data stream to set bar code parameters and scan.

By inserting characters “#S” in the display buffer at Line 1, Columns 2 and 3, the host computer tells the terminal to expect a Bar Code Scanner extended command. Appropriate descriptive characteristics should follow the “#S” characters. The terminal returns a code to indicate if the command was successful. Then it simulates the [Enter] key to return a value to the host computer.

Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Due to possible system fragmentation of a data stream, the “#” in Line 1,

Column 2, should be the last character placed on the screen. This will ensure that all data is present before the extended command is parsed (removed). The following table lists the command. Other tables list options.

Scan Bar Code Parameters — Line 1, Columns 2–3

Column Description

Extended command

Scan command

Character

272 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

CC Byte 1

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Control Character Byte 1 (CC Byte 1) implementation differs among the terminals. The tables below and on the next page show the CC Byte 1 options for scanning.

A “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

CC Byte 1 Options Supported by Characters —

Line 1, Column 4

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series)

Disable

Scanner

No Change From

Current Setting CC Byte 1

F b

Laser

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 273

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Note : 6400 Computers do not support HP Wand Select.

CC Byte 1 Options Supported by Characters —

Line 1, Column 4

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

D b

CC Byte 1

HP Wand Select Redundancy Laser No Redundancy

X X

Disable scanner.

No change from current setting.

274 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

CC Byte 2

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

CC Byte 2 implementation differs among the types of terminals. The following tables show CC Byte 2 options.

Note: “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

CC Byte 2 Options Supported by Characters

(2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 700 Series)

CC Byte 2

0–3

4–7

8–F b

Scan Termination Character

None

Auto Enter Scan

Auto Tab Scan

No change from current setting

CC Byte 2 Options Supported by Characters —

Line 1, Column 5

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

CC Byte 2

Scan Termination Character Modulo 10 Check Digit

None

[Enter] key

[Tab] key

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 275

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

CC Byte 3

Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

CC Byte 3 Options Supported by Characters —

Line 1, Column 6

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Enable Stream

Scanning Reserved

Return Bar

Code Type

D b

CC Byte 3

No change from current setting.

Bar Code

Concatenated

Bar Code Length

Bar Code Length sets the minimum and maximum character lengths for all types of bar codes scanned. Setting the minimum and maximum values to their optimum can increase scanning performance. If the terminal scans bar codes that are outside the minimum and maximum value, the terminal ignores the bar code.

Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Bar Code Length — Line 1, Columns 7–10

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Column Character and Description

7–8

9–10

XX=Bar code length. Maximum length: 99. bb=No change from current setting

XX=Bar code length. Minimum length: 00. bb=No change from current setting

276 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

UPC

Note : 6400 Computers do not support UPC-E Number System 1.

Use the UPC command to select the combinations of characters listed in the following table.

Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Character

15 b

UPC Bar Code Characters

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

UPC-E #

System 1

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

UPC-E #

System 0

Disables all.

Add-ons UPC-A

X X

No change from current setting.

EAN Algorithms

Use EAN Algorithms to select combinations of EAN options.

Note that a

“b” is a 1-byte space.

EAN Algorithms — Line 1, Column 12

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

3 b

Character Description

0 EAN disabled

EAN with Add-ons enabled

EAN enabled

EAN and EAN with Add-ons enabled

No change from current setting

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 277

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Code 39

Code 39 sets the scanner to read simple Code 39 bar codes that do not include extended or encoded sequences.

Note that a “b” is a 1-byte space.

Extended Code 39 is a superset of Code 39 and scans all regular Code 39 bar codes. You cannot select both Code 39 and Extended Code 39. Encoded Code 39 combines key presses with normal bar code data.

Appendix A, “ Bar Code Scanning ,” contains Encoded Code 39 sequences.

Code 39 Algorithms Characters — Line 1, Column 13

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

3 b

Character Description

0 Code 39 disabled

Encoded Code 39 enabled

Extended Code 39 enabled

Code 39 enabled

No change from current setting

278 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Plessey

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Note : 6400 Computers do not support Plessey alpha characters.

If the Plessey bar code scanning algorithm is enabled, set its check digits according to your requirements. Refer to the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for more information on check digits.

Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Plessey Characters — Line 1, Column 14

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Character Description

1 b

Plessey disabled

Plessey enabled

No change from current setting

The Xs in the following table indicate the Plessey check digits the characters support.

Plessey Check Digit Characters — Line 1, Column 15

Keep

2nd Digit

Check

Do Not

Validate 1st

Check Digit

Keep

1st Check

Digit

Mod 10

1st Check

Digit

F b

Character

X X

X X X

No change from current setting.

Mod 11

1st Check

Digit

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 279

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Codabar

The Codabar options (Codabar and ABC Codabar) are mutually exclusive coding algorithms and cannot be selected at the same time.

Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Codabar Characters — Line 1, Column 16

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Character Description

2 b

Codabar disabled

Codabar enabled

ABC Codabar enabled

No change from current setting

Code 11

The following table lists Code 11 characters.

Note that a “b” indicates a

1-byte space.

Code 11 Characters — Line 1, Column 17

(59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Character Description

1 b

Code 11 disabled

Code 11 enabled

No change from current setting

Code 93

Code 93 and Code 128 options can be enabled.

Note that a “b” indicates a

1-byte space.

Code 93 Characters — Line 1, Column 18

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Character Description

1 b

Code 93 disabled

Code 93 enabled

No change from current setting

280 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Code 128

The following table lists Code 128 characters.

Note that a “b” indicates a

1-byte space.

Code 128 Characters — Line 1, Column 19

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Character Description

1 b

Code 128 disabled

Code 128 enabled

No change from current setting

Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5

If the Straight or Computer Identics bar code is enabled, select the maximum and minimum lengths and the first and second fixed bar code lengths according to your requirements.

Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space. Refer to the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for more information.

2 of 5 Characters

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Character Description

21–22

0=Straight and Computer Identics 2 of 5 disabled; 1=Computer Identics 2 of 5 enabled; 2=Straight 2 of 5 enabled; b=No change from current setting

XX=Maximum length Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting

23–24

25–26

27–28

XX=Minimum length Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting

XX=1st fixed bar code length for Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting

XX=2nd fixed bar code length for Straight or Computer Identics 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 281

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Interleaved 2 of 5

If Interleaved 2 of 5 is enabled, select the maximum and minimum lengths and the first and second fixed bar code lengths according to requirements.

Note that a “b” indicates a 1-byte space. Refer to the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for more information.

Interleaved 2 of 5 Characters — Line 1, Columns 29-37

(6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX)

Character Description

29 0=Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled; 1=Interleaved 2 of 5 enabled; b=No change from current setting

30–31

32–33

34–35

36–37

XX=maximum length Interleaved 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting

XX=minimum length Interleaved 2 of 5; bb=No change from current setting

XX=1st fixed length for Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code; bb=No change from current setting

XX=2nd fixed length for Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code; bb=No change from current setting

Return Codes for Scan Bar Code

The Scan Bar Code Parameters return code is the status sent to the host computer; the code indicates if the extended command was successful. The terminal returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the \\X<CR> format where X is the return code listed in the following chart. The terminal simulates the [Enter] key to return a value to the host computer. If a hexadecimal number is entered wrong, the return code defaults to “0.”

Code

Description

Good status, transaction complete

Bad status, transaction incomplete

282 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Example of Scan Bar Code Parameters

The following example and chart show data for Scan Bar Code parameters.

Note that “b” indicates a 1-byte space.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 23 Column 36 b#S07F32012211120012080108080bbbbbbbb

Column Character Description

1 b This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Scan Bar Code Parameter command

No Control Byte 1 options are returned

[Enter] key terminates all scans, 12-volt laser is enabled, Mod

10 Check Digit

Bar code type is returned and concatenated 6

7–8

9–10

Maximum length is 32 characters

Minimum length is 1 character

Decode UPC System 0

EAN is enabled

Encoded code 39 is enabled

Plessey is enabled

Mod 10 first digit is checked

ABC Codabar is enabled

Code 11 is disabled

Code 93 is disabled

Code 128 is enabled

20 2

21–22 08

23–24 01

25–26 08

27–28 08

29 0

30–31 bb

32–33 bb

34–35 bb

36–37 bb

Straight 2 of 5 is enabled

Straight 2 of 5 maximum length is 8

Straight 2 of 5 minimum length is 1

Straight 2 of 5 1st fixed length is 8

Straight 2 of 5 2nd fixed length is 8

Interleaved 2 of 5 is disabled

No change from current setting

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 283

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Get Optical Inputs (#I)

Note : This extended command is supported on 248X Terminals only.

The Get Optical Inputs extended command returns a value representing the state of all four optical inputs. This value is represented by an ASCII character in the A–P range. If the ASCII value of the letter “A” is subtracted from the value returned, the result will be a number from 0 to 15, representing the state of the four inputs by bit positions: bit 0 is the optical input 1; bit 1 is the optical input 2; etc. If a bit is “0” (or off), then the input is off. If a bit is “1” (or on), then that input is on. The following table itemizes all possible combinations.

Get Optical Input Returned Values

Value Returned Optical Inputs: 1 2 3 4

Off Off Off Off

On Off Off Off

Off On Off Off

On On Off Off

Off Off On Off

On Off On Off

Off On On Off

On On On Off

Off Off Off On

On Off Off On

Off On Off On

On On Off On

Off Off On On

On Off On On

Off On On On

On On On On

Line 1, Columns 2 and 3, contains the extended command “#I”. Line 2,

Column 1, receives the returned data in the following format, where “X” is the return value:

\\0X<cr>

Line 24, Column 1, has the return status field. The status value returned here will be “0” (the character for zero, not the value zero) for a good status, indicating that the transaction is complete and without error. An error will occur if this command is attempted from the wrong type of terminal.

However, no error is detected when you have a 248X Terminal without terminal blocks. The status value returned when an error occurs is “1” (the character, not the value).

284 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Relay (Set, Reset, Read) Commands (#R)

Note : These extended commands are supported on 248X Terminals only.

There are three relay commands: Set , Reset and Read . All three use the same extended command “#R” followed by two numeric characters. The first character is the relay number and the second is a command byte. The relay number can be “1”, “2”, “3” or “4”, since there are four relays in a

248X Terminal equipped with terminal blocks. Also, the relay number can be “5” when you want to choose all four relays at once. The command byte will be “0” for Reset , “1” for Set , and “2” for Read .

Each Set and Reset command includes a Read , which provides verification that the chosen operation was successful. The Read command returns a value represented by an ASCII character in the A–P range. If the ASCII value of the letter “A” is subtracted from the value returned, the result will be a number from 0 to 15, representing the state of the four relays by bit positions: bit 0 is relay 1; bit 1 is relay 2; etc. If a bit is “0,” that relay is reset (or off); if “1,” it is set (or on).

If you Set , Reset or Read a single relay, the value returned represents only the state of that relay, and not the state of the other three relays. If all four relays are Set , Reset , or Read as a group, the value returned represents all relays. The following table itemizes all possible combinations:

Relay Commands Returned Values

Value Returned

Optical Inputs: 1 2 3 4

Off Off Off Off

On Off Off Off

Off On Off Off

On On Off Off

Off Off On Off

On Off On Off

Off On On Off

On On On Off

Off Off Off On

On Off Off On

Off On Off On

On On Off On

Off Off On On

On Off On On

Off On On On

On On On On

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 285

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Line 1, Columns 2 and 3, contains the extended command “#R”. Line 2,

Column 1, receives the returned data in the following format, where “X” is the return value:

\\0X<cr>

However, no error is detected when you have a 248X Terminal without terminal blocks. The status value returned when an error occurs is “1” (the character, not the value).

286 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Magnetic Card Reader (#M)

Note: The Magnetic Card Reader (#M) command for Magnetic Card

Reader support is included in software build versions 7.12 and greater.

On the following Intermec printers, you can access the Magnetic Card

Reader from the host by sending an extended #M command to the TE

2000 application.

S 782T CR

S PW40 with CR

S 6808 CR

The Magnetic Card Reader extended command is supported for 3270,

5250, and VT/ANSI terminal emulations but not the Native terminal emulation. 3270 and 5250 terminal emulations require an input field to hold the card data. Data beyond the size of the field will be discarded.

When the 700 Series Computer with the TE 2000 application receives the

Magnetic Card Reader (#M) command, the display will show:

Please SWIPE Card

NOW!

(Press any key) to cancel.)

The operator should then swipe the card through the reader to cancel the process. The card reader data buffer is cleared just after displaying the waiting message, thus do not swipe the card until prompted by the display.

Pressing a key instead of swiping a card will cancel the process (see return code “K” on the next page).

Extended Command Syntax

The Magnetic Card Reader extended command syntax is in the #Mttddd format.

Magnetic Card Reader Options — Line 1, Columns 2–8

Column Description

2 Extended command

4–5

Magnetic Card Reader command

Timeout

6–8 Maximum characters to accept

Character

01–99=2-digit data receive timeout in seconds.

Default is 30 seconds when “tt” has two blank characters.

001–250=Limit of maximum characters to accept.

Default is 250 when “ddd” has three blank characters.

Data characters received past the maximum are discarded. For 3270 and 5250 emulation, data characters past the input field size are discarded.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 287

Chapter 7 — Extended Commands

Return Codes for Magnetic Card Reader

X is the return code listed in the following chart.

Code Description

Good status, transaction complete.

Not enough memory for card data buffer.

No 3270 or 5250 input field available to hold the magnetic card data.

Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.

Incorrect setting for timeout value.

Timeout error, no data.

Key pressed to abort card read.

Communication with the Magnetic Card Reader failed, check cabling, reader power, no data.

OK, the data is returned, but is truncated by the lesser of the input field size

(for 3270 and 5250) or “ddd.”

#M will return the data in the following format:

”{T1:” <Track 1> ”|T2:” <Track 2> ”|T3:” <Track 3> ”}” where <Track n> is:

S 0 to 81 alphanumeric data characters for Track 1.

S 0 to 42 numeric data digits for Track 2.

S 0 to 109 alphanumeric or numeric data characters (depending on ISO or

AAMVA conformance) for Track 3.

Note: If the track data is “B,” then the track was not read. An “N” means the track is not on the magnetic card.

The maximum possible characters is 245.

Magnetic Card Reader CAB File

For the Magnetic Card Reader to work, the MAGCARD.CAB file must be installed (which installs and registers the MAGCARD.DLL file).

Contact your Intermec representative to get this file, then install this file in your 700 Series Computer. The TE 2000 application will only look for the MAGCARD.DLL file when it gets a Magnetic Card Reader (#M) extended command from the host.

288 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Bar Code Scanning

This appendix lists bar code labels for TE 2000 3270 commands and functions. It also contains Encoded Code 39 key press sequences.

Note : To scan the bar code labels, configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode.

Note : For the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X Terminal, configure the mode through the TRAKKER Antares

2400 Menu System.

See the terminal’s user manual for help.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 289

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

DK, Display Column Spacing

The spacing parameters define the number of pixels to be added between each row or column of characters. Note that font arrays have one or two lines built in for character separation.

DK<param1><param2><param3> where:

S param1 represents the font type and is one character

S param2 represents column spacing and is two characters

S param3 represents row spacing and is two characters

2415 and 2425 Terminal Displays

Below are the examples that apply to the 2415 and 2425 Terminal displays:

10 Columns

10 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK20000*

*$+DK20000*

12 Columns

12 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK90116*

*$+DK90116*

12 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK90105*

*$+DK90105*

12 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK90100*

*$+DK90100*

12 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK80502*

*$+DK80502*

290 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

12 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK80500*

*$+DK80500*

12 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70700*

*$+DK70700*

17 Columns

17 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK80122*

*$+DK80122”

17 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK80111*

*$+DK80111*

17 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK80106*

*$+DK80106*

17 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK80102*

*$+DK80102*

17 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK80100*

*$+DK80100*

17 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70300*

*$+DK70300*

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 291

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

292

17 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60400*

*$+DK60400*

20 Columns

20 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK10000*

*$+DK10000*

20 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK00000*

*$+DK00000*

22 Columns

22 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK70124*

*$+DK70124*

22 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK70113*

*$+DK70113*

22 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK70108*

*$+DK70108*

22 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK70104*

*$+DK70104*

22 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK70102*

*$+DK70102*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

22 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70100*

*$+DK70100*

22 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60200*

*$+DK60200*

26 Columns

26 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK70024*

*$+DK70024*

26 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK70013*

*$+DK70013*

26 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK70008*

*$+DK70008*

26 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK70004*

*$+DK70004*

26 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK70002*

*$+DK70002*

26 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70000*

*$+DK70000*

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 293

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

26 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60100*

*$+DK60100*

32 Columns

32 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60000*

*$+DK60000*

2435A Terminal Display

Below are the examples that apply to the 2435A Terminal display:

9 or 10 Columns

Note : For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.10 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 9 columns x 8 rows bar code. If the icons are disabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 10 columns x 8 rows bar code.

9 Columns

9 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK20016*

*$+DK20016*

9 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK20005*

*$+DK20005*

9 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK20000*

*$+DK20000*

294 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

10 Columns

10 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK20016*

*$+DK20016*

10 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK20005*

*$+DK20005*

10 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK20000*

*$+DK20000*

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

12 Columns

12 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK90116*

*$+DK90116*

12 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK90105*

*$+DK90105*

12 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK90100*

*$+DK90100*

12 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK80502*

*$+DK80502*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 295

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

12 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK80500*

*$+DK80500*

12 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70700*

*$+DK70700*

17 Columns

17 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK80122*

*$+DK80122*

17 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK80111*

*$+DK80111*

17 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK80106*

*$+DK80106*

17 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK80102*

*$+DK80102*

17 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK80100*

*$+DK80100*

17 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70300*

*$+DK70300*

296 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

17 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60400*

*$+DK60400*

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

19 or 20 Columns

Note : For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.10 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 19 columns x 8 rows bar code. If the icons are disabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 20 columns x 8 rows bar code.

19 Columns

19 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK10000*

*$+DK10000*

19 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK00000*

*$+DK00000*

20 Columns

20 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK10000*

*$+DK10000*

20 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK00000*

*$+DK00000*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 297

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

22 Columns

22 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK70124*

*$+DK70124*

22 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK70113*

*$+DK70113*

22 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK70108*

*$DK70108*

22 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK70104*

*$+DK70104*

22 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK70102*

*$+DK70102*

22 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70100*

*$+DK70100*

22 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60200*

*$+DK60200*

298 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

26 Columns

26 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK70024*

*$+DK70024*

26 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK70013*

*$+DK70013*

26 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK70008*

*$+DK70008*

26 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK70004*

*$+DK70004*

26 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK70002*

*$+DK70002*

26 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70000*

*$+DK70000*

26 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60100*

*$+DK60100*

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 299

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

300

31 or 32 Columns

31 Columns

31 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK60002*

*$+DK60002*

32 Columns

32 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK60002*

*$+DK60002*

Note : For 2435A Terminals with Terminal Emulation version 6.60 or greater and TE 2000 application version 7.15 or greater, if icons are enabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 31 columns x 16 rows bar code. If the icons are disabled in the firmware, then the 2435A Terminal uses the 32 columns x 16 rows bar code.

31 Columns

31 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDKB0000*

*$+DKB0000*

31 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60000*

*$+DK60000*

32 Columns

32 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDKB0000*

*$+DKB0000*

32 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60000*

*$+DK60000*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

2455 Terminal Display

Note : The following bar codes are for 2455 Terminals with Terminal

Emulation version 6.73 or greater and TE 2000 application version

7.15.09, 7.15.77, or greater.

Below are the examples that apply to the 2455 Terminal display:

20 Columns

20 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK21509*

*$+DK21509*

20 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK21500*

*$+DK21500*

20 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDKC2000*

*$+DKC2000*

33 Columns

33 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK20309*

*$+DK20309*

33 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK20300*

*$+DK20300*

33 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDKC0700*

*$+DKC0700*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 301

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

40 Columns

40 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK20009*

*$+DK200009*

40 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK20000*

*$+DK20000*

40 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDKC0400*

*$+DKC0400*

53 Columns

53 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK90000*

*$+DK90000*

53 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDKC0000*

*$+DKC0000*

80 Columns

80 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK10000*

*$+DK10000*

80 columns x 20 rows

*/D/KDK80000*

*$+DK80000*

302 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

80 columns x 25 rows

*/D/KDK00000*

*$+DK00000*

2475 and 248X Terminal Displays

Below are the examples that apply to the 2475 and 248X Terminal displays:

10 Columns

10 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK20000*

*$+DK20000*

12 Columns

12 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK90116*

*$+DK90116*

12 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK90105*

*$+DK90105*

12 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK90100*

*$+DK90100*

12 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK80502*

*$+DK80502*

12 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK80500*

*$+DK80500*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 303

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

12 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70700*

*$+DK70700*

17 Columns

17 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK80122*

*$+DK80122*

17 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK80111*

*$+DK80111*

17 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK80106*

*$+DK80106*

17 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK80102*

*$+DK80102*

17 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK80100*

*$+DK80100*

17 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70300*

*$+DK70300*

17 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60400*

*$+DK60400*

304 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

20 Columns

20 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK10000*

*$+DK10000*

20 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK20000*

*$+DK20000*

20 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK00000*

*$+DK0000*

22 Columns

22 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK70124*

*$+DK70124*

22 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK70113*

*$+DK70113*

22 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK70108*

*$+DK70108*

22 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK70104*

*$+DK70104*

22 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK70102*

*$+DK70102*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

305

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

22 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70100*

*$+DK70100*

22 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60200*

*$+DK60200*

26 Columns

26 columns x 4 rows

*/D/KDK70024*

*$+DK70024*

26 columns x 6 rows

*/D/KDK70013*

*$+DK70013*

26 columns x 8 rows

*/D/KDK70008*

*$+DK70008*

26 columns x 10 rows

*/D/KDK70004*

*$+DK70004*

26 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK90000*

*$+DK90000*

26 columns x 16 rows

*/D/KDK70000*

*$+DK70000*

306 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

26 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60100*

*$+DK60100*

32 Columns

32 columns x 21 rows

*/D/KDK60000*

*$+DK60000*

40 Columns

40 columns x 12 rows

*/D/KDK10000*

*$+DK10000*

40 columns x 20 rows

*/D/KDK80000*

*$+DK80000*

40 columns x 25 rows

*/D/KDK00000*

*$+DK00000*

53 Columns

53 columns x 25 rows

*/D/KDK70000*

*$+DK70000*

64 Columns

64 columns x 25 rows

*/D/KDK60000*

*$+DK60000*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

307

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

Cursor Keys

Window/Viewport up (up one line)

*/EUP*

*%UP*

Window/Viewport down (down one line)

*/EDN*

*%DN*

Window/Viewport right (right one character)

*/ERT*

*%RT*

Window/Viewport left (left one character)

*/ELF*

*%LF*

Paging Keys

308

Page up

*/EPGUP*

*%PGUP*

Page down

*/EPGDN*

*%PGDN*

Page right

*/EPGRT*

*%PGRT*

Page left

*/EPGLT*

*%PGLT*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Tab Keys

Back Tab

*/EBTAB*

*%BTAB*

Forward Tab

*%TAB*

3278 SNA Keys

Cursor Home (Home)

*/EH+M*

*%Hm*

Delete (Del)

*/EDEL*

*%DEL*

EOF

*/EEOF*

*%EOF*

Erase Input (Clr)

*/EEINP*

*%EINP*

Insert

*/EINS*

*%INS*

New Line (Return)

*/ENL*

*%NL*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

309

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

Reset

*/ERST*

*%RST*

AID-Generating Keys

Clear

*/ECLR*

*%CLR*

Enter

310

*%CR*

*/EF1*

*%F1*

*/EF2*

*%F2*

*/EF3*

*%F3*

*/EF4*

*%F4*

*/EF5*

*%F5*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

*/EF6*

*%F6*

*/EF7*

*%F7*

*/EF8*

*%F8*

*/EF9*

*%F9*

F10

*/EF10*

*%F10*

F11

*/EF11*

*%F11*

F12

*/EF12*

*%F12*

F13

*/EF13*

*%F13*

F14

*/EF14*

*%F14*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

311

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

312

F15

*/EF15*

*%F15*

F16

*/EF16*

*%F16*

F17

*/EF17*

*%F17*

F18

*/EF18*

*%F18*

F19

*/EF19*

*%F19*

F20

*/EF20*

*%F20*

F21

*/EF21*

*%F21*

F22

*/EF22*

*%F22*

F23

*/EF23*

*%F23*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

F24

*/EF24*

*%F24*

PA1

*/EPA1*

*/PA1*

PA2

*/EPA2*

*/PA2*

PA3

*/EPA3*

*/PA3*

Auto-Login Restart

*/EALRS*

*%ALRS*

Symbols

Cent (¢)

*/ECENT*

*%CENT*

Not (¬)

*/ENOT*

*%NOT*

3270 Additional Functions

TE configuration menus

*/ETECFG*

*%TECFG*

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

313

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

Encoded Code 39

The following table lists escape characters and key press sequences for Encoded Code 39. The “(t)” in the table indicates a terminating key. Any bar code data following this key code is ignored. The “t” sequences, therefore, should be located only at the end of the bar code. If you attempt to use an invalid sequence (termed “reserved” in the table) the terminal will beep and the data stream will be flushed.

Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39

Sequence

Enter (t)

Erase

Clear

Reserved

PF1 (t)

PF2 (t)

PF3 (t)

PF4 (t)

PF5 (t)

PF6 (t)

PF7 (t)

PF8 (t)

PF9 (t)

PF10 (t)

Key

New Line

Del

Forward Tab

Back Tab

Reserved

Backspace

Reserved

Insert

Home

Sequence

+D u v w t s x y z r p q m n o i g h f e l j k b c d

Key a

314 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39 (continued)

Sequence

(None)

] (right brace)

^ (circumflex)

_ (underscore)

{ (left brace)

| (vertical bar)

} (right brace)

~ (tilde)

Delete

Reserved

@ (at) i (grave accent)

Reserved

PF13 (t)

Key

Clear AID (t)

PF11 (t)

PF12 (t)

PA1

PA2

PA3

; (semicolon)

< (less than)

= (equal)

> (greater than)

? (question mark)

[ (left brace)

\ (backslash)

Sequence

Key

! (exclamation mark)

” (double quote)

# (pound)

$ (dollar)

% (percent)

& (ampersand)

’ (single quote)

( (left parenthesis)

) (right parenthesis)

* (asterisk)

+ (plus)

, (comma)

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

- (hyphen)

F14

/ (forward slash)

F15

F21

F22

F23

F24

: (colon)

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 315

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

Terminating Keys

Terminating keys are the nonprintable ASCII sequences and action keys.

When the terminal encounters them in a bar code, an action is taken, and the terminal sends the data in the buffer to the host computer. Terminating keys should appear only at the end of the bar code. If they are located in the middle of a bar code, they are executed normally, but the data following them in the bar code is ignored. Terminating keys cause a terminal-to-base station transmission. The terminal ignores data in the bar code buffer following these keys once a transmission takes place.

For example, the terminal interprets the following sequence:

123$V456 as

123F6

The terminal will not send “456” to the host computer, because it follows terminating key F6.

ASCII sequences can be used any time before a terminating key. For example, the terminal interprets

+H+E+L+L+O$M as hello <Enter>

Escape Characters

The four escape characters in the previous table yield a 3270 data stream key press equivalent when followed by another character. The escape characters are: $ (dollar sign)

% (percent)

+ (plus)

/ (forward slash)

For example:

S If a bar code contains the sequence “%U” somewhere within it, the terminal converts this sequence to an [ENTER] key and processes it as soon as encountered in the scanning buffer.

S “+B” is converted to the lower case “b.”

S “%B” is converted to an F11 key press.

If you want the Encoded Code 39 option but the bar codes to be scanned already contain the “$,” “%,” “+,” or “/,” character, then each place where these characters occur must be expanded to a special “/” sequence:

S Every bar code where the “$” is maintained must be expanded to a “/D” sequence.

S Percent signs (%) must be expanded to “/E”.

S Forward slashes (/) must be expanded to the letter “/O”.

S Plus signs (+) must be expanded to “/K”.

316 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

Overriding Auto Tab Scan and Auto Enter Scan

When the terminal is in Auto Entr Scan or Auto Tab Scan mode, eight

Encoded Code 39 functions will override these modes when they are scanned. They are:

S Forward Tab

S Back Tab

S Home

S Clear

S End of Field

S Backspace

S Insert

S Delete

These codes are all of the screen editing type, where an automatic [Enter] would not be desired. The encoded operations listed will never allow an

Auto Entr Scan to occur. For example, suppose Auto Entr Scan was enabled (through the TE configuration menus) and a “$C” (Forward Tab) is scanned. The terminal will forward tab to the next field but not cause an

[Enter] operation, even though the Auto Entr Scan feature was enabled.

The encoded forward tab overrides the Auto Entr Scan mode in this case.

However, if a “+D” (d) is scanned, the terminal places a “d” at the current cursor location. The Auto Entr Scan mode then causes an [Enter] to be executed.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 317

Appendix A — Bar Code Scanning

318 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Bar Code Symbologies

This appendix contains a brief explanation of each bar code symbology that the TE 2000 3270 application decodes. It explains some of the general characteristics and uses of these bar code types.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 319

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

Bar Code Algorithms

You can enable specific bar code algorithms using the setup menus or the host computer. Once the computer correctly decodes a bar code, the computer encodes data with descriptive information about the symbol. Response time is improved by limiting the computer to bar codes being used.

Bar Code Data String Formats

Bar Code

Type Character

“S”

“P”

“Q”

“R”

“J”

“0”

“1”

“2”

“3”

“4”

“5”

“6”

“7”

“8”

“9”

“:” (colon)

“;” (semicolon)

“<” (less than)

“=” (equal sign)

“>” (greater than)

“@” (ampersand)

Symbology Type

UPC short (UPC-E)

EAN short (EAN-8)

UPC long (UPC-A)

EAN long (EAN-13)

UPC short add-on 2

EAN short add-on 2

UPC long add-on 2

EAN long add-on 2

UPC short add-on 5

EAN short add-on 5

UPC long add-on 5

EAN long add-on 5

Interleaved 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5

Plessey

Codabar

Code 11

Code 39

Extended Code 39

Code 93

Code 128

Data Format nddddddc fndddddc nddddddddddc fnddddddddddc nddddddcaa fndddddcaa nddddddddddcaa fnddddddddddcaa nddddddcaaaaa fndddddcaaaaa nddddddddddcaaaaa fnddddddddddcaaaaa d......d

d......d

d......dc

sd....ds

d......d

Data Length

Scan device dependent

Note : These bar code data definitions apply to the Data Format column in the previous table: a Add-on code digits c Check digits d Bar code digits f EAN flag 1 characters n Number system digits s Start and stop digits

If MOD 10 or MOD 11 check digits are enabled, the digit falls at the end of a bar code data string. Each check digit enabled extends the bar code data string length by one character.

320 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

The 3270 Terminal Emulation application recognizes eleven of the most widely used bar code symbologies. With bar code symbologies, like languages, there are many different types. A bar code symbology provides the required flexibility for a particular inventory tracking system.

A symbology may be for particular industries, such as food and beverage, automotive, railroad, or aircraft. Some of these industries have established their own bar code symbology because other symbologies did not meet their needs.

Without going into great detail on the bar code structure, note that no two products use the same bar code. Each product gets a unique bar code.

Industries that use a particular type of bar code symbology have formed regulating committees or are members of national institutes that issue and keep track of bar codes. This ensures that each organization that contributes to a particular industry conforms to its standard. Without some form of governing body, bar coding would not work.

S UPC (Universal Product Code) with/without add-ons

S EAN (European Article Numbering Code) with/without add-ons

S Codabar

S C11 (Code 11)

S C39 (Code 39)

S C93 (Code 93)

S C128 (Code 128)

S I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code)

S S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5)

S Plessey

S MSI (a variant of Plessey)

UPC

The UPC (Universal Product Code) is the symbology used throughout the grocery and retail industries. This bar code symbology contains two pieces of numerical information encoded on the bar code, producer identification, and product identification information.

The UPC symbol is 12 characters long. The first character of the UPC symbol is a number system character, such as “0” for grocery items and “3” for drug- and health-related items.

The UPC symbology is for retail environments such as grocery stores, convenience stores, and general merchandise stores.

Some retail items are so small that a standard UPC bar code cannot fit on the packaging. When this occurs there is a permitted shorter version of the

UPC symbology, referred to as UPC-E. UPC-E is six characters long

(eight including number system and check digit), approximately half the size of a standard UPC bar code.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 321

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

EAN

EAN (European Article Numbering) symbology is similar to UPC symbology, except that it contains 13 characters and uses the first two to identify countries.

The EAN symbology is used throughout most of Europe in the retail environment. Although similar to UPC symbology, the two are not interchangeable.

Codabar

Codabar was for retail price-labeling systems. Today it is widely accepted by libraries, medical industries, and photo finishing services.

Codabar is a discrete, self-checking code with each character represented by a stand-alone group of four bars and three intervening spaces.

Four different start or stop characters get defined and designated “a”, “b”,

“c”, and “d”. These start and stop characters are constructed using one wide bar and two wide spaces. A complete Codabar symbol begins with one of the start or stop characters followed by some number of data characters and ending in one of the start or stop characters.

Any of the start or stop characters may be used on either end of the symbol. It is possible to use the 16 unique start or stop combinations to identify label type or other information.

Since Codabar is variable-length, discrete, and self-checking, it is a versatile symbology. The width of space between characters is not critical and may vary significantly within the same symbol. The character set consists of “0” through “9”, “-”, “$”, “:”, “/”, “.”, and “+”.

The specific dimensions for bars and spaces in Codabar optimize performance of certain early printing and reading equipment. Codabar has 18 different dimensions for bar and space widths. So many different dimensions often result in labels printed out of specification and cause Codabar printing equipment to be more expensive.

Code 11

322

Code 11 satisfies the requirements for a very high density, discrete numeric bar code. The name Code 11 derives from 11 different data characters that can be represented, in addition to a start or stop character.

The character set includes the 10 digits and the dash symbol. Each character is represented by a stand-alone group of three bars and two intervening spaces. Although Code 11 is discrete, it is not self-checking. A single printing defect can transpose one character into another valid character. One or two check digits obtain data security.

The specifications for Code 11 suggest that this code should have a narrow element width of 7.5 mils. This results in an information density of 15 characters per inch.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

Code 39

Code 39 (C39) is the most widely used symbology among the industrial bar codes. Most major companies, trade associations, and the federal government find this code to fit their needs. The main feature of this symbology is the ability to encode messages using the full alphanumeric character set, seven special characters, and ASCII characters.

Programming for this symbology can be for any length that the application requires. The application program handles symbology that is at least one character but no more than 32 characters in length.

When programming the computer for Code 39, it is important to set the symbology limit as close as possible (minimum and maximum bar code lengths being scanned). Doing so keeps the computer bar code processing time to a minimum and conserves battery power.

Bar code readers can respond to Uniform Symbology Specification symbols in non-standard ways for particular applications. These methods are not for general applications, because of the extra programming required.

Code 39 Full ASCII is one example of non-standard code.

Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation)

If the first data character of a symbol is a space, the reader may be programmed to append the information contained in the remainder of the symbol to a storage buffer. This operation continues for all successive symbols that contain a leading space, with messages being added to the end of previously stored ones. When a message is read which does not contain a leading space, the contents are appended to the buffer, the entire buffer is transmitted, and the buffer is cleared.

Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII)

If the bar code reader is programmed for the task, the entire ASCII character set (128 characters) could be coded. This is done using two character sequences made up of one of the symbols (“$”,“.”,“%”,“/”) followed by one of the 26 letters.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 323

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

Code 93

The introduction of Code 93 provided a higher density alphanumeric symbology designed to supplement Code 39. The set of data characters in

Code 93 is identical with that offered with Code 39. Each character consists of nine modules arranged into three bars and three spaces.

Code 93 uses 48 of the 56 possible combinations. One of these characters, represented by a square, is reserved for a start or stop character, four are used for control characters, and the remaining 43 data characters coincide with the Code 39 character set. An additional single module termination bar after the stop character concludes the final space.

Code 93 is a variable length, continuous code that is not self-checking. Bar and spaces widths may be one, two, three, or four modules wide. Its structure uses edge-to-similar-edge decoding. This makes the bar code immune to uniform ink spread, which allows liberal bar width tolerances.

Code 93 uses two check characters. Its supporters believes this makes it the highest density alphanumeric bar code. The dual check digit scheme provides for high data integrity. All substitution errors in a single character are detected for any message length.

Code 128

324

Code 128 (C128) is one of the newest symbologies used by the retail and manufacturing industries. It responds to the need for a compact alphanumeric bar code symbol that could encode complex product identification.

The fundamental requirement called for a symbology capable of being printed by existing data processing printers (primarily dot-matrix printers) that produce daily, work-in-progress, job, and product traceability documents. The ability to print identification messages between 10 and 32 characters long, on existing forms and labels deemed an important requirement.

Code 128 uniquely addresses this need as the most compact, complete, alphanumeric symbology available.

Additionally, the Code 128 design with geometric features, improves scanner read performance, does self-checking, and provides data message management function codes.

Code 128 encodes the complete set of 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements. Code 128 contains a variable-length symbology and the ability to link one message to another for composite message transmission. Code 128, being a double-density field, provides two numeric values in a single character.

Code 128 follows the general bar code format of start zone, data, check digit, stop code, and quiet zone. An absolute minimum bar or space dimension of nine mils (0.010 inch minimum nominal

0.001 inch tolerance) must be maintained.

Characters in Code 128 consist of three bars and three spaces so that the total character set includes three different start characters and a stop character.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

UCC/EAN-128 Shipping Container Labeling is a versatile tool that can ease movement of products and information. The Shipping Container Labeling bar code can take any form and usually has meaning only within the company or facility where applied.

Because this random data can get mistaken later for an industry standard code format, the UCC and EAN chose a symbology uniquely identified from these other bar codes. This standard is for maximum flexibility, to handle the diversity of distribution in global markets by cost efficiency.

The UCC/EAN-128 Container Labeling specification calls for a FUNC1 to immediately follow the bar code’s start character. FUNC1 also follows any variable-length application field. The specification also calls for the computer to send “]C1” for the first FUNC1. The specification requires that the computer send a “<GS>” (hex 1D) for subsequent FUNC1 codes in the bar code.

Because “<GS>” is not compatible with computer emulation data streams, the Uniform Code Council has been asked to change the specification.

This change is made to send the same three character sequence “]C1” to identify the embedded FUNC1 codes.

This implementation should provide for clean application coding by identifying the same sequences for the same scanned codes. If the communication of Norand bar code types is enabled, the Shipping Container Label codes precede with a “J”. These strings will appear on the computer display. The application may have to allow for strings longer than 48 characters (maximum length indicated in the specification). Actual length variance depends on the number of variable-length data fields. Allowing for 60 characters should be sufficient. Within the Code 128 specification, the computer can link bar codes together. If this is to happen, allow for more characters (computer limit is 100 characters).

The Application Identifier Standard, that is part of the UCC/EAN Shipping Label concept, complements, rather than replaces, other UCC/EAN standards. Most UCC/EAN standards primarily identify products.

Several industries expressed the need to standardize more than product identification. The UCC/EAN Code 128 Application Identifier Standard supplies this tool. The standard adds versatility for inter-enterprise exchanges of perishability dating, lot and batch identification, units of use measure, location codes, and several other information attributes.

For more detailed information on Code 128 UCC/EAN Shipping Label bar code and Application Identifier Standard, refer to the UCC/EAN-128

Application Identifier Standard specification.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 325

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

I 2 of 5 (Interleaved)

I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code) is an all-numeric symbology, widely used for warehouse and heavy industrial applications. Its use has been particularly prevalent in the automobile industry. The I 2 of 5 symbology can be placed on smaller labels than what the standard UPC symbology requires.

I 2 of 5 also provides a little more flexibility on the type of material it can print on. Interleaved 2 of 5 Code has its name because of the way the bar code is configured.

I 2 of 5 bars and spaces both carry information. The bars represent the odd number position digits, while spaces represent the even number position digits. The two characters are interleaved as one. Messages encoded with this symbology have to use an even number of characters since two numeric characters always get interleaved together.

S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5)

The code S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5 Code) is designed primarily for:

S Warehouse inventory handling

S Identification of photo finishing envelopes

S Airline tickets

S Baggage and cargo handling

The code S 2 of 5 is simple and straightforward. All information is contained in the widths of the bars, with the spaces serving only to separate the individual bars.

Bars can either be wide or narrow, and the wide bars are usually three times the widths of the narrow bars. Spaces may be any reasonable width but are typically equal to the narrow bars. Narrow bars are identified as zero bits and wide bars as one bits.

Remember the code structure by associating the bar positions from left to right with weighting factors 1, 2, 4, 7, and parity. Exceptions to this rule are zero, start, and stop. This code is a discrete code, since the white spaces between the characters are not part of the code. Because the white spaces carry no information, their dimensions are not critical.

The S 2 of 5 code is self-checking, meaning a scanner passing through a printing void would detect the proper ratio of wide bars to total bars.

When the scanner spots an error, a non-read will occur.

326 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

Plessey

Plessey finds its origin in the pulse width modulated (PWM) code developed in England. It is widely used for shelf markings in grocery stores.

Pulse width modulated codes represent each bit of information by a bar and space pair. A zero bit consists of a narrow bar followed by a wide space, while a one bit consists of a wide bar followed by a narrow space. It is mainly a numeric symbology (0–9) with six extra characters available for assigning any symbol or letter desired.

Plessey codes are not self-checking and employ a variety of check characters. Plessey employs a polynomial-based Cyclic Redundancy Check

(CRC). For start and stop characters, Plessey employs a 1101 and previously used a 0101.

This symbology is very limited about what information can be encoded. It is not considered for new applications.

MSI Code (Variant of Plessey)

In addition to Plessey characteristics, the MSI Code employs a Modulus

10 Check. For start and stop checks, MSI employs a single bit pair of 1 as a start symbol and a single bit pair of 0 as a stop symbol. MSI reverses the

1-2-4-8 BCD pattern for bit pair weighting to 8-6-2-1.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 327

Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies

328 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Conversion Tables

This appendix contains decimal-to-hex and binary-to-EBCDIC conversion tables.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 329

Appendix C — Conversion Tables

Decimal to Hexadecimal

Following are decimal and hexadecimal values for nondisplayable ASCII and displayable graphic characters.

Hex

Decimal

Char.

”

SUB

ESC

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

DLE

DC1

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

Hex

311

Decimal

106

107

108

109

110

102

103

104

105

111

112

113

100

101

Char.

;

)

(

’

Hex

Char.

l m n k j h i f g o p q d e b c a

‘

]

[

330 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix C — Conversion Tables

Hex

Decimal

134

135

136

137

130

131

132

133

138

139

140

141

142

126

127

128

129

122

123

124

125

118

119

120

121

114

115

116

117

147

148

149

150

143

144

145

146

151

152

153

154

Char.

}

{ z

DEL x y v w s r t u

Decimal

193

194

195

196

189

190

191

192

197

198

199

200

201

185

186

187

188

181

182

183

184

177

178

179

180

173

174

175

176

206

207

208

209

202

203

204

205

210

211

212

213

SS3

DCS

PU1

PU2

STS

CCH

SPA

EPA

IND

NEL

SSA

ESA

HTS

HTJ

VTS

PLD

PLU

SS2

Hex

D5 d

Char.

Decimal

244

245

246

247

240

241

242

243

236

237

238

239

232

233

234

235

252

253

254

255

248

249

250

251

Hex

Char.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 331

Appendix C — Conversion Tables

Hex

Decimal

167

168

169

170

163

164

165

166

171

172

159

160

161

162

155

156

157

158

Char.

CSI

OSC

APC

Decimal

226

227

228

229

222

223

224

225

230

231

218

219

220

221

214

215

216

217

Hex

Char.

Decimal Hex Char.

332 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix C — Conversion Tables

Binary to EBCDIC

The following table includes binary to EBCDIC conversion values.

Bits 0–7

01 1010

01 1011

01 1100

01 1101

01 1110

01 1111

10 0000

10 0001

10 0010

10 0011

10 0100

10 0101

01 0010

01 0011

01 0100

01 0101

01 0110

01 0111

01 1000

01 1001

00 1010

00 1011

00 1100

00 1101

00 1110

00 1111

01 0000

01 0001

00 0000

00 0001

00 0010

00 0011

00 0100

00 0101

00 0110

00 0111

00 1000

00 1001

EBCDIC Code

Display Graphic

)

;

—

(

<space>

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 333

Appendix C — Conversion Tables

EBCDIC Code

Bits 0–7

11 0111

11 1000

11 1001

11 1010

11 1011

11 1100

11 1101

11 1110

10 1111

11 0000

11 0001

11 0010

11 0011

11 0100

11 0101

11 0110

10 0110

10 0111

10 1000

10 1001

10 1010

10 1011

10 1100

10 1101

10 1110

11 1111

1000 0000

1000 0001

1000 0010

1000 0011

1000 0100

1000 0101

1000 0110

1000 0111

1000 1000

1000 1001

1000 1010

1000 1011

1000 1100

1000 1101

1000 1110

1000 1111

334 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Display Graphic

’

”

EBCDIC

> e f g h i c d a b

Bits 0–7

1001 0000

1001 0001

1001 0010

1001 0011

1001 0100

1001 0101

1001 0110

1001 0111

1001 1000

1001 1001

1001 1010

1001 1011

1001 1110

1001 1101

1001 1110

1001 1111

1010 0000

1010 0001

1010 0010

1010 0011

1010 0100

1010 0101

1010 0110

1010 0111

1010 1000

EBCDIC Code

Appendix C — Conversion Tables

Display Graphic p q r n o l m k j u v w x z t s y

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 335

Appendix C — Conversion Tables

336 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Terminal Font Set Table

Note : The Terminal Font Set table in this appendix applies to 6400,

5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, and 700 Series Terminals. For the Terminal Font Set table for the 2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, or 248X

Terminals, refer to the terminal’s user manual.

6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, and 700 Series terminals use a font set that supports English and Western European languages, such as

French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, and others. You can develop applications that display any character in the terminal font set. Depending on the type of keyboard, you can also enter many of the characters.

For help, see Chapter 3, “ Using the Terminal’s Keyboard.”

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 337

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

338

The following table lists the characters you can display on the terminal. It also lists the decimal and hexadecimal index values.

Terminal Font Set

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character

(“radio” annunciator)

Decimal

∅

—

Space

∆

(“communications loss” annunciator) 18

(5250 dup character) 19

(“input inhibited” annunciator)

(“message waiting” annunciator)

Unused

→

(”transmit” annunciator)

←

(”receive” annunciator)

(“battery” annunciator)

Space

27 1B

Hexadecimal

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

< (less than)

= (equal sign)

> (greater than)

? (question mark)

@ (ampersand)

)

(

’

, (comma)

- (dash)

. (period)

Terminal Font Set (continued)

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character

Space

Decimal

Hexadecimal

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 339

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

Terminal Font Set (continued)

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character f g d e

W a b

‘

_ c

[ (left bracket)

\ (backslash)

] (right bracket)

Decimal

100

101

102

103

Hexadecimal

340 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

Terminal Font Set (continued)

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character v w t u s r q o p l k m n j i h x y z

{ (left curly bracket)

} (right curly bracket)

Decimal

116

117

118

119

111

112

113

114

115

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

124

125

126

127

120

121

122

123

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

Hexadecimal

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 341

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

⌐ (not symbol)

Terminal Font Set (continued)

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character

Decimal

152

153

154

155

147

148

149

150

151

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

156

157

158

172

173

174

175

167

168

169

170

171

163

164

165

166

159

160

161

162

Hexadecimal

342 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

 e







⊦

‖

⊧

—

†



⊧



⊩

Terminal Font Set (continued)

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character Decimal

176

177

178

= 205

206

207

208

209

194

195

196

197

190

191

192

193

198

199

200

210

202

186

187

188

189

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

203

204

Hexadecimal

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 343

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

≥

≤

∞





≡

⎧

∑

Ω

▄

▌

▐

▀

∝

‡

⎦

Terminal Font Set (continued)

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character

214

215

216

217

218

Decimal

210

211

212

213

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

Hexadecimal

344 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

Terminal Font Set (continued)

(6400, 5020, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series)

Character

⎭

≈

_ d

Space

Decimal

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

Hexadecimal

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 345

Appendix D — Terminal Font Set Table

346 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index

The General Index covers all topics. Those in italics are figures, those in bold are tables.

The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers, applications, utilities, batch files, or other files within this publication.

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 347

Index

General Index

Symbols

. (period)

700 series, 56 key remapping code, 216

, (comma)

700 series, 56 encoded sequence, 315 key remapping code, 216

# (pound), 165

#F (Transmit and Receive) extended command, 254

#G (Receive Only) extended command, 264

#M (Magnetic) card reader operation, 287

#P (Transmit Only) extended command, 260

#R (Relay) extended commands, Set, Reset, Read, 285

#I (Get Optical Inputs) extended command, 284

#S (Scan) extended command, 272

#T (Tone) extended command, 271

#V (Return Version) extended command, 270

$ (escape sequence), 314, 316

% (escape sequence), 315, 316

+ (escape sequence), 316

- (hyphen)

700 series, 56 encoded sequence, 315

/ (escape sequence), 315, 316

_ (underscore), 700 series, 56

¢ (Cent sign)

11XX, 48

17XX, 44

5055, 38

59XX, 41

6400, 30

¢ (cent sign), bar code to scan, 313

Numbers

11XX terminal

AID-generating keys, 50

Auto-Login Restart, 50 cursor keys, 49 display annunciators alphabetic character shift mode, 76 battery is charging, 77 communication loss, 76 input inhibited, 76 insert mode, 76 laser scanner in use, 77 left shift mode, 76 low battery condition, 77 message, 76 receiving data, 76 right shift mode, 77 transmitting data, 76 downloading files to, 231 keyboard, 48

Main menu, 84 paging keys, 49 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 85

348 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 135

Set-up Parms menu, 85 shift keys, 48

SNA keys, 49 tab keys, 49 user’s guide, xx, 48

12-volt FLASH cloning cable, 156

17XX terminal

AID-generating keys, 47

Auto-Login Restart, 47 cursor keys, 46 display annunciators alphabetic character shift mode, 76 bad battery, 77 battery is charging, 77 communication loss, 76 error, 77 input inhibited, 76 insert mode, 76 laser scanner in use, 77 left shift mode, 76 low battery condition, 77 message, 76 receiving data, 76 right shift mode, 77 temperature, 77 transmitting data, 76 downloading files to, 231 keyboards, 44

Main menu, 84 paging keys, 46 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 85 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 134

Set-up Parms menu, 85 shift keys, 44

SNA keys, 46 tab keys, 46 user’s guide, xx, 44

2415 terminal

AID-generating keys, 14

Auto-Login Restart, 14 configuring TE parameters, 160 cursor keys, 12

DK, display column spacing, 290 downloading files to, 229 keyboards, 12

Main menu, 82 paging keys, 12 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 83 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 129 serial scanning, 10

Set-up Parms menu, 83 setting up, 2 shift keys, 12

SNA keys, 13

Tab keys, 12 user’s manual, xx, 12

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

2425 terminal

AID-generating keys, 17

Auto-Login Restart, 17 configuring TE parameters, 160 cursor keys, 15

DK, display column spacing, 290 downloading files to, 229 keyboard, 15

Main menu, 82 paging keys, 15 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 83 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 129 serial scanning, 10

Set-up Parms menu, 83 setting up, 2 shift keys, 15

SNA keys, 16

Tab keys, 15 user’s manual, xx, 15

2435A terminal additional 5250 functions, 22

AID-generating keys, 21

Auto-Login Restart, 22 configuring TE parameters, 160 cursor keys, 18

DK, display column spacing, 294 function keys, 19 keyboards, 18

Main menu, 82 paging keys, 19 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 83 screen sizes disabled icons, 129 enabled icons, 130 serial scanning, 10

Set-up Parms menu, 83 shift keys, 18

SNA keys, 20 standard keys, 19 tab keys, 19 user’s manual, xx, 18

2455 terminal

AID-generating keys, 25

Auto-Login Restart, 25 configuring TE parameters, 160 cursor keys, 23

DK, display column spacing, 301 downloading files to, 229 keyboard, 23

Main menu, 82 paging keys, 23 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 83 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 130 serial scanning, 10

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index

Set-up Parms menu, 83 setting up, 2 shift keys, 23

SNA keys, 24

Tab keys, 23 user’s manual, xx, 23

2475 terminal

AID-generating keys, 28

Auto-Login Restart, 28 configuring TE parameters, 160 cursor keys, 26

DK, display column spacing, 303 downloading files to, 229 keyboard, 26

Main menu, 82 paging keys, 26 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 83 screen sizes, 131 serial scanning, 10

Set-up Parms menu, 83 shift keys, 26

SNA keys, 27

Tab keys, 26 user’s manual, xx, 26

248X terminal

AID-generating keys, 28

Auto-Login Restart, 28 configuring TE parameters, 160 cursor keys, 26

DK, display column spacing, 303 downloading files to, 229

Get Optical Inputs (#I), 284 keyboard, 26

Main menu, 82 paging keys, 26 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 83

Relay Commands (#R), 285 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 131 serial scanning, 10

Set-up Parms menu, 83 setting up, 2 shift keys, 26

SNA keys, 27

Tab keys, 26 user’s manual, xx, 26 with terminal blocks, 285 without terminal blocks

Get Optical Inputs (#I) extended command, 284

Relay (#R) extended commands, 286

3210 emulation, 109

3270

CONFIG.DAT option, 189 data stream format, 240

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

349

Index

3270 options, 108 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 109 any auto enter, 110 auto entr scan, 109 auto tab scan, 109

BRT (bright) auto enter, 109 device name, 109 emulate 3210, 109 keybrd unlock, 108 origin set, 109 telnet, 109

3278 SNA keys.

See SNA keys

5-volt FLASH cloning cable, 156

5020 data collection pc

Auto-Login Restart, 37

Break key, 36 caps lock disabling, 37 enabling, 37 typing lowercase letter while enabled, 37 color-coded key combinations, 34 cursor keys, 35 downloading files to, 229 keyboards, 34

Main menu, 86 paging keys, 35 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 86 screen sizes, 133

Set-up Parms menu, 86

SNA keys, 35 standard keys, 35 top-row function keys, 36 user’s manual, xx, 34

5055 data collection pc

AID-generating keys, 40

Auto-Login Restart, 40 configuring TE parameters, 161 cursor keys, 39 display annunciators alphabetic character shift mode, 76 caps lock, 77 communication loss, 76 input inhibited, 76 insert mode, 76 left shift mode, 76 message, 76 num lock, 77 radio, 75 receiving, 76 right shift mode, 77 sending, 76 downloading files to, 230

Exit emulation and return to DOS, 162 implementing attribute colors, 220 keyboards, 38

Main menu, 84 opening the main menu, 162 paging keys, 39 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 85 remapping keys, 214

350 screen sizes, 133

Set-up Parms menu, 85 shift keys, 38 standard keys, 53 terminal emulation, 161 user’s guide, xx, 38

5250 options, 106 allow alias, 107 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 107 auto tab scan, 106 beep on error, 106 destructive BS (backspace), 107 device name, 107 lock error msg (message), 108 period-comma, 107 skip fldexit (field exit), 107 telnet, 106 use color, 108

59XX terminal

AID-generating keys, 43

Auto-Login Restart, 43 cursor keys, 42 display annunciators alphabetic character shift mode, 76 communication loss, 76 current row/column position, 78 input inhibited, 76 insert mode, 76 left shift mode, 76 message, 76 receiving, 76 right shift mode, 77 sending, 76 downloading files to, 231 key repeat, 196 keyboard, 41

Main menu, 84 paging keys, 42 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 85 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 134

Set-up Parms menu, 85 shift keys, 41

SNA keys, 42 user’s guide, xx, 41

6400 computer

AID-generating keys, 32 alpha lock mode, 30

Auto-Login Restart, 33 configuring TE parameters, 160 cursor keys, 30 display annunciators alpha lock, 77 alphabetic character shift mode, 76 battery pack gas gauge, 78 communication loss, 76 input inhibited, 76 insert mode, 76 left shift mode, 76 message, 76

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index radio, 75 receiving, 76 right shift mode, 77 sending, 76 downloading files to, 230

Exit emulation and return to DOS, 161 keyboards, 29

Main menu, 84 opening the main menu, 160 paging keys, 31 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 85 remapping keys, 214 screen sizes, 132

Set-up Parms menu, 85 shift keys, 29

Tab keys, 31 user’s guide, xx, 29

700 series mobile computer

Auto-Login Restart, 57 auxiliary keys, 56

Break key, 56 configuration menus, 79 configuration settings file, 73 cursor keys, 52 downloading files to, 229 editing keys, 55 function keys, 55 implementing attribute colors, 220 keyboards, 51

Main menu, 86 paging keys, 52 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 86 screen sizes, 135

Set-up Parms menu, 86

Software Input Panels, 51 changing colors, 51 user’s manual, xx, 51

802.11 radio, 6

802.11 radio test, 6400, 5055, 147

802.1x supplicant radio driver, radio comm, 124 disconnection value, 124 user authentication, 124

902 MHz radio module, 6400, 5055, 94

ABC Codabar

CONFIG.DAT option, 180

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

ActiveSync, 169, 170, 229

Adapter, communication, 230, 231

Adaptive Poll protocol, 192

Add-On 2

CONFIG.DAT option, 184, 185

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 204, 205

Add-On 5

CONFIG.DAT option, 184, 185

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 204, 205

Additional 5250 functions

2435A, 22

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

CK30, 62

CK31, 66

AID-generating keys

11XX, 50

17XX, 47

2415, 14

2425, 17

2435A, 21

2455, 25

2475, 28

248X, 28

5055, 40

59XX, 43

6400, 32 bar code labels, 310

CK30, 61

CK31, 65

CV60, 71 description, 9 extended command characters, 257

Allow Alias, 5250 options, 107

Allow Alpha

CONFIG.DAT option, 188

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 206

Allow LineMode, VT/ANSI options, 116

Allow NAWS (negotiate about window size)

3270 options, 109

5250 options, 107

CONFIG.DAT option, 189

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

VT/ANSI options, 115

Alpha lock, display annunciators, 6400, 77

Alpha lock mode, 6400, 30

Alphabetic keys, key remapping codes, 217

Alternate screen columns, 196

Alternate screen rows, 196

Alternate screen size, 267

Annunciator format

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 209

Annunciator position

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 209

Annunciators, 8, 137

Answerback, 111

Any Auto Enter

3270 options, 110

CONFIG.DAT option, 189

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

Application keypad mode, 114 starting, 3

VT cursor mode, 115

Application Cursor mode, 115

Application mode, 114

ASCII, 222

Asynchronous commands, 236

Attribute colors, implementing, 220

Austrian character set, 223

351

Index

Auto Detect scanner

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Auto enter scan, 250

CONFIG.DAT option, 189

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

Auto entr scan, 109 vt/ansi options, 110

Auto tab scan

3270 options, 109

5250 options, 106

CONFIG.DAT option, 189

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207 vt/ansi options, 111

Auto wrap, VT/ANSI options, 116

Auto-forward tab, 250

Auto-Encoded Code 39

CONFIG.DAT option, 186

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Auto-login control characters, 166 description, 164 developing script files, 164 disabling, 170

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 170

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 170

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 171

6400, 5055, 171 loading the script file, 167

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 167

5020, 168

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 169

6400, 5055, 168

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 169 sample script files, 171 script file commands, 164

Auto-Login Restart

11XX, 50

17XX, 47

2415, 14

2425, 17

2435A, 22

2455, 25

2475, 28

248X, 28

5020, 37

5055, 40

59XX, 43

6400, 33

700 series, 57 bar code label, 313

CK30, 61

CK31, 65

CV60, 71 description, 173 key remapping code, 219

352

Automatic skip, 249

Auxiliary keys, 700 series, 56

Back Tab

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 12

2425, 15

2435A, 19

2455, 23

2475, 26

248X, 26

5055, 39

6400, 31

CV60, 70

Back Tab key

700 series, 55 bar code label, 309 remapped character, 218

Background RGB, display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,

122

Backlight display opts, 118

700 Series, 120

LCD parms, 138

Backlight intensity, CONFIG.DAT option, 194

Backlight state

CONFIG.DAT option, 191

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Backlight timer

CONFIG.DAT option, 191

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Backspace key, 314

2435A, 19

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

Bad battery, display annunciators, 17XX, 77

“Bad option name” message, 176

“Bad string length” message, 176

“Bad value” message, 176

Bar Code, symbologies, 319

Codabar, 322

Code 11, 322

Code 128, 324

Code 39, 323

Code 39 concatenation, 323

Code 39 full ASCII, 323

Code 93, 324 data string formats, 320

EAN, 322

I 2 of 5, 326

MSI code, 327

Plessey, 327

S 2 of 5, 326

UPC, 321

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index

Bar code parms

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5020, 97

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700 Series, CK30,

CK31, CV60, 98 code 39 encoded, 97 concatenate, 97

RS232 stream, 97 scan all flds, 97 scan options, 98 scanner type, 98 stream scan, 97

Bar code scanning

CONFIG.DAT options, 179 length, 276 length options, 103 scan options to enable, 101 additional bar codes, 102

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Basic Service Set ID (B SSID).

See Radio test (802.11)

Battery capacity icons, 78 low capacity levels, 78 low level status, 78

Battery gas icons for levels, 78 low capacity levels, 78 low level readings, 78

Battery is charging, display annunciators

11XX, 77

17XX, 77

Battery pack, charge level, 78

Battery pack gas gauge, display annunciators, 6400, 78

Baud rates, 192

BC type char, 99

BC Type Character

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Beep head set, 146, 195

Beep internal, 146, 195

Beep on error, 106

Beeper frequency, 195, 267 length, 195, 267 volume, 195, 267

Beeper select, 146

Beeper setup

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, CK30, CK31, 144 beep headset, 146 beep internal, 146 beeper select, 146 error tone, 146 key click, 145 frequency, 145 length, 145 volume, 145

Belgian character set, 223

Belgian IBM character set, 224

Block

6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 119

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121

Block (line edit mode), 113

Block blink

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 120

Bluetooth Device Manager application, 127

Brazilian character set, 223

Break key, 38

5020, 36

700 series, 56

BRT (bright) Auto Enter

3270 options, 109

CONFIG.DAT option, 189

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

“Can’t open file” message, 176

Canadian (French) character set, 223

Caps Lock, 5020 disabling, 37 enabling, 37 typing lowercase letter while enabled, 37

Caps lock, display annunciators, 5055, 77

Caps Lock key

2435A, 19

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CC Byte 1, 273

CC Byte 2, 275

CC Byte 3, 276

Center cursor, 136

Center Cursor mode

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Central Europe, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123

Change colors on SIPs

700 Series, 51

CV60, 67

Change size of SIPs, CV60, 67

Changing text, 212

Channel, CONFIG.DAT option, 177

Character mode, 113

Character sets, 224

Characters key remapping codes, 216 remapping, 219 substituting national, 222

Charge level icons, 78

Check Digit

CONFIG.DAT option, 186

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Check Digit 1

CONFIG.DAT option, 187

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 206

Check Digit 2

CONFIG.DAT option, 187

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 206

353

Index

CK30 handheld computer additional 5250 functions, 62

AID-generating keys, 61

Auto-Login Restart, 61 configuration settings file, 73 cursor keys, 59 downloading files to, 229 function keys, 60 keyboards, 58

Main menu, 86 paging keys, 60 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 86 screen sizes, 135

Set-up Parms menu, 86 shift keys, 59

SNA keys, 60 standard keys, 60 user’s manual, xx, 58, 59

CK31 handheld computer additional 5250 functions, 66

AID-generating keys, 65

Auto-Login Restart, 65 configuration menus, 79 configuration settings file, 73 cursor keys, 63 downloading files to, 229 function keys, 64 keyboards, 63

Main menu, 86 paging keys, 64 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 86 screen sizes, 135

Set-up Parms menu, 86 shift keys, 63

SNA keys, 64 standard keys, 64 user’s manual, xx, 63

Clear key

11XX, 49, 50

17XX, 46, 47

2415, 14

2425, 17

2435A, 21

2455, 25

2475, 28

248X, 28

5055, 39, 40

59XX, 42, 43

6400, 31, 32

700 series, 55 bar code label, 310

CK30, 61

CK31, 65

CV60, 71 description, 8, 9 encoded sequence, 315 escape sequence, 314 remapped character, 218

Clear type, font quality, CK30, CK31, 123

Cloning opts, 155

354

Clr key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 13, 55

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31 bar code label, 309

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8

Codabar, 280, 322

CONFIG.DAT option, 180

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Code 11, 280

CONFIG.DAT option, 180, 187

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201, 206

Code 128, 281

CONFIG.DAT option, 180, 188

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201, 207

Code 39

CONFIG.DAT option, 180

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Code 39 Encoded, 97

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Code 93, 280

CONFIG.DAT option, 180

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Code page

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123

CONFIG.DAT option, 191

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Codes

11, 322

128, 324

39, 323

39 concatenation, 323

39 full ASCII, 323

93, 324

Cold start, 125

Color-coded key combinations, 5020, 34

Columns remote display, CONFIG.DAT option, 191 terminal screen size, 196 wireless station screen size

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

COM select, 128

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

Commands

3270 data stream, 236

SNA/SDLC, 236

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index

Communication, 88

Communication Adapter, 230, 231

Communication loss, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

CompactFlash storage card, 169

Computer Identics 2 of 5, 281

CONFIG.DAT option, 181

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Concatenate, 97, 99

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Concatenation, 323

Configuring serial scanning, 10

Configuring TE parameters, 81

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 160

5055, 161

6400, 160

700 Series, CK31, CV60, 79

Contrast mode, CONFIG.DAT option, 191

Control characters, 166

Conversion tables, 330, 333

Copy setup, session menu, 157

Copying files, 229

Corner mode, 136

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Courier new, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121

Courier new bold, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,

121

CR to CRLF (carriage return to carriage return/line feed),

110

Current row/column position, display annunciators, 59XX,

Cursor keys

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 12

2425, 15

2435A, 18

2455, 23

2475, 26

248X, 26

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 30

700 series, 52 bar code labels, 308

CK30, 59

CK31, 63

CV60, 69 key remapping codes, 218

Cursor mode

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,

6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 120

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

CONFIG.DAT option, 191

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

VT cursor mode, 115

Custom configuration files

CFGLIT.DAT, 212

CONFIG.DAT

parameter formats, 175 parameters and qualifiers, 176 prompting for a value, 175 sample set-up file, 175 syntax, 174 verifying your configuration, 176

TE_SETTINGS.INI

parameter formats, 198 parameters and qualifiers, 199

CV60 vehicle mount computer

AID-generating keys, 71

Auto-Login Restart, 71 configuration menus, 79 configuration settings file, 73 cursor keys, 69 downloading files to, 229 implementing attribute colors, 220 keyboards, 67

Main menu, 86 paging keys, 69 passwords, Set-up Parms menu, 86 screen sizes, 135

Set-up Parms menu, 86 shift keys, 67

SNA keys, 70

Software Input Panels, 67 changing colors, 67 changing size, 67

Tab keys, 70 user’s guide, xx, 67

Cyrillic (Russian), code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,

123

Danish character set, 223

Danish IBM character set, 224

Data Decode

CONFIG.DAT option, 186

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Data stream, 105 commands, 235

CONFIG.DAT option, 177 initialization files, 213

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

WtDxyz, 240

Decimal values, 330

Default values

CONFIG.DAT, 176 restoring, 125

TE_SETTINGS.INI, 199

Define height, 138

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Define origin, 137

355

Index

Define width, 138

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

DEL (delete), 218

Del key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31

700 series, 55

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8 encoded sequence, 314

DEL to BS (delete to backspace), 110

Delete (DEL), 218

Delete key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31 bar code label, 309 description, 8 key remapping code, 218

Delimiter character, 255, 264

Destructive BS (backspace), 5250 options, 107

Developing auto-login script files, 164

Device name

3270 options, 109

5250 options, 107

CONFIG.DAT option, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

Direct Connect, 96

Disabling auto-login, 170

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 170

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 170

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 171

6400, 5055, 171

Disconnect Val, 124, 192

DiscreteBells, 112

Display annunciators, 75 position 0, radio, 75 position 1 communications loss, 76 message, 76 receiving, 76 receiving data, 76 sending, 76 transmitting data, 76 position 1-3, laser scanner in use, 77

356 position 2 input inhibited, 76 insert mode, 76 position 3 alphabetic character shift mode, 76 left shift mode, 76 right shift mode, 77 position 4 alpha lock, 77 battery is charging, 77 position 4-6, low battery condition, 77 position 4-8, current row/column position, 78 position 5, error, 77 position 5-8, battery pack gas gauge icons, 78 position 6 bad battery, 77 temperature, 77 positions 4 and 5 caps lock, 77 num lock, 77

Display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121

Display column spacing

2415 terminal, 290

2425 terminal, 290

2435A terminal, 294

2455 terminal, 301

2475 terminal, 303

248X terminal, 303

Display options

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,

6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 120 background RGB, display colors, 122 backlight, 118

700 Series, 120 block, 119

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121 block blink

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 120 central europe, code page, 123 clear type, font quality, 123 code page

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123 central europe, 123 cyrillic (russian), 123 english, 123 greek, 123 hebrew, 123 latin 2, 123 polish, 123 courier new, select font, 121 courier new bold, select font, 121 cursor mode

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,

6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 120 block, 119, 121 block blink, 118, 120

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index underline, 118, 120 underline blink, 118, 120 cyrillic (russian), code page, 123 display colors

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121 background RGB, 122 foreground RGB, 122 swap fore/back, 122 enabled, remote display, 119 english, code page, 123 font quality

CK30, CK31, 122 clear type, 123 standard, 122 foreground RGB, display colors, 122 greek, code page, 123 hebrew, code page, 123 latin 2, code page, 123 lucida, select font, 121 polish, code page, 123 remote baud, 119 remote display, 119 enabled, 119 remote baud, 119 remote type, 119 screen size, 119 remote type, 119 screen size, 119 select font

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121 courier new, 121 courier new bold, 121 lucida, 121 tahoma, 121 standard, font quality, 122 swap fore/back, display colors, 122 tahoma, select font, 121 underline

6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 120 underline blink, 120

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

Display test, 149

DK.

See Display column spacing

DNS, 89

Do gold key, VT/ANSI options, 116

Do UTF-8, VT/ANSI options, 116

DOS 6.22, terminal emulations, 161

Downloading files, 229

File Manager, 168 flash and utility files, 169

INTERLNK/INTERSVR, 168

RF communications, 167 serial ports, 167

Unit Manager, 168

Drop Leading

CONFIG.DAT option, 182

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 202

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Drop Trailing

CONFIG.DAT option, 182

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 202

Dual sessions, 5

EAN, 277, 322

CONFIG.DAT option, 181

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

EBCDIC, 222, 225

EBCDIC codes, 333

Editing files, 229

Editing keys, 700 series, 55

EHLLAPI values, 215

Element decode

CONFIG.DAT option, 186

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Emulate 3210, 109

CONFIG.DAT option, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

Emulation, 90

Enabled, remote display, 119

Encoded Code 39

CONFIG.DAT option, 186 key press sequences, 314

Scan Bar Code Parameters (#S) extended command,

278

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Encoded sequences, 314

End (viewport) command, 5

End key, 38

English, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123

English (UK) character set, 223

Enter auxiliary key

700 series, 56 using to navigate through menus, 74 key remapping code, 218

Enter key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31

700 series, 55 bar code label, 310

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8 encoded sequence, 314

357

Index

EOF key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31

700 series, 55 bar code label, 309

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8

Erase All Unprotected command, 236, 237

Erase EOF key, remapped character, 218

Erase Field, 5

Erase Input key, 309

Erase Last Word, 5

Erase Unprotected to Address order, 243

Erase/Write Alternate command, 236, 237

Erase/Write command, 236, 237

Error, display annunciators, 17XX, 77

Error messages, CONFIG.DAT, 176

Error tone, 146 beeper frequency, 195 length, 195 volume, 195

Escape characters (Encoded Code 39), 316

EUA order, 243

European Article Numbering code.

See EAN

Exchanging files, 229

Exit emulation

5055, 162

6400, 161

Exit menus, 153

Exit TE2000, 126

Expand 8 to 13

CONFIG.DAT option, 185

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Expand E to A

CONFIG.DAT option, 185

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 204

“Expected numeric” message, 176

Extended Code 39, 278

CONFIG.DAT option, 186

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Extended commands, 106

Get Optical Inputs (#I), 284

Magnetic Card Reader (#M), 287

Receive Only (#G), 264

Relay Commands (#R), Set, Reset, Read, 285

Return Version (#V), 270

Scan (#S), 272

358

Set Parameters (#H), 267

Tone (#T), 271

Transmit and Receive (#F), 254

Transmit Only (#P), 260

Fast Cursor Left command, 5

Fast Cursor Right command, 5

File Manager, downloading files, 168

FileCopy utility, 229

Files custom parameter set-up, 174 downloading, 229

Finnish character set, 223

Finnish IBM character set, 224

Fixed bar code lengths fixed length 1

CONFIG.DAT option, 182

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 202 fixed length 2

CONFIG.DAT option, 183

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 203 fixed length 3

CONFIG.DAT option, 183

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 203 fixed length 4

CONFIG.DAT option, 183

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 203

Flash and utility files, downloading files, 169

Flash memory reprogramming, 230 upgrades, 230

Fn key, 38

Font quality

CK30, CK31, 122

CONFIG.DAT option, 191

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Font set, 222, 337

Foreground RGB, display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,

122

Foreground session

CONFIG.DAT option, 196

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Forward Tab

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 12

2425, 15

2455, 23

2475, 26

248X, 26

5055, 39

6400, 31

CV60, 70

Forward Tab key

2435A, 19

700 series, 55 bar code label, 309

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

French character set, 223

French IBM character set, 224

Frequency beeper setup, 145

CONFIG.DAT option, 177

Full ASCII

CONFIG.DAT option, 186

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Function keys

11XX, 50

17XX, 47

2415, 14

2425, 17

2435A, 19, 21

2475, 28

248X, 28

5055, 40

59XX, 43

6400, 32

700 series, 55 bar code labels, 310

CK30, 60, 61

CK31, 64, 65 description, 9 encoded sequences, 314 key remapping codes, 218

German character set, 223

German IBM character set, 224

Get Optical Inputs (#I) extended command, 284

Greek, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123

Hard resets

5055, 162

6400, 161

Hebrew, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123

Help, where to find more on, INTERLNK, INTERSVR,

231

Hexadecimal values, 330

Histogram, 152

Home (viewport) command, 5

Home key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31

700 series, 55 bar code label, 309

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8 encoded sequence, 314

Host A, B, or C

CONFIG.DAT option, 177

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

Host Name

CONFIG.DAT option, 177

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

Host name, 89

Host setup, 89

Host view size, 105

HostName command (auto-login), 164

I 2 of 5.

See Interleaved 2 of 5

IBM character sets, 224

IBM mnemonics, 165

IBM-3278-2 terminal, 7

IC order, 243

Icons.

See Annunciators

Illustrations, keyboards

11XX, 48

17XX, 44

2415, 12

2425, 15

2435A, 18

2455, 23

2475, 26

248X, 26

5020, 34

5055, 38

59XX, 41

6400, 29

700 series, 52

CK30, 58

CK31, 63

CV60, 69

Initialization screens, 3, 81, 159

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 160

5055, 161

6400, 160

Input command, 164

Input Inhibited, 8

Input inhibited, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

InputHidden command, 164

Insert annunciator, 8

Insert Cursor order, 243

Index

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 359

Index

Insert key

11XX, 49

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5020, 35

6400, 31

700 series, 55 bar code label, 309

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8 encoded sequence, 314 remapping code, 218

Insert mode, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

Installing INTERLNK/INTERSVR, 230

Interleaved 2 of 5, 282, 326

CONFIG.DAT option, 181, 187

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201, 206

INTERLNK, 231 downloading files, 168 installation, 230 installing, 231 prerequisites for flash update, 230 where to find more help, 231

Intermec Application Server

DNS name, 89 host name, 89

IP address, 89

SNA, 90 system manual, xx

Telnet, 90

International character set, 223

INTERSVR downloading files, 168 used for, 231 where to find more help, 231

IP address, 88, 89

Italian character set, 223

Italian IBM character set, 224

ITC server, 88 host setup, 89 emulation, 90 host name, 89 port number, 90 upline protocol, 90

Japanese (English) character set, 223

360

Key click, 145 frequency, 145, 195 length, 145, 195 volume, 145, 195

Key code table, 216

Key repeat, 196

Key uppercase, 138

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Keyboard “0” command, 165

Keyboard “1” command, 165

Keyboard lock, 267

Keyboard opts, 154

Keyboard test, 150

700 Series, CK31, CV60, 80

Keyboard unlock

CONFIG.DAT option, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Keyboards

11XX, 48

17XX, 44

2415, 12

2425, 15

2435A, 18

2455, 23

2475, 26

248X, 26

5020, 34

5055, 38

59XX, 41

6400, 29

700 series, 51

CK30, 58

CK31, 63

CV60, 67 remapping keys, 214

Keybrd unlock, 108

Keypad mode, 114

Keypads.

See Keyboards

Lan ID, CONFIG.DAT option, 177

Laser scanner

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Laser scanner in use, display annunciators

11XX, 77

17XX, 77

Latin 2, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123

Lazy mode, 137

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

LCD contrast, 128, 194

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index

LCD parms (parameters), 128 annunciators, 137 backlight, 138 define height, 138 define width, 138 key uppercase, 138

LCD contrast, 128 menu settings, 139 screen mode, 136 center cursor, 136 corner mode, 136 define origin, 137 lazy mode, 137 locked mode, 137 page mode, 136 screen size, 129, 138

11XX, 135

17XX, 134

2415, 129

2425, 129

2435A (disabled icons), 129

2435A (enabled icons), 130

2455, 130

2475, 131

248X, 131

5020, 133

5055, 133

59XX, 134

6400, 132

700 series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 135 scroll window, 139

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020,

5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 138

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 139 define height, 138 define width, 138 screen size, 138 tab size, 138 tab size, 138 toolbar options, 140

Length, beeper setup, 145

Length options, 103

Line Edit (block) mode, 113

Loading auto-login script file, 167

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 167

5020, 168

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 169

6400, 5055, 168

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 169

Local echo, 111

Lock Error Msg (message), 5250 options, 108

Lock key, 700 series, 55

Lock mode, 113

Locked mode, 137

Low battery condition, display annunciators

11XX, 77

17XX, 77

Lucent radio test, 6400, 5055, 147

Lucida, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Macros creating, 215 nesting, 216

Magetic (#M) card reader operation, 287

Magnetic card reader operation (#M), 287

Main menu, 82

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 82

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 86

5055, 162

6400, 160

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 84 opening, 81, 82, 313 options, 81 password

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 209

Main menu 2, 154 cloning opts, 155 keyboard opts, 154

Save parms, 154 session menu, 157 copy setup, 157 session name, 157 set hot key, 157 switch, 157

Maximum bar code length

CONFIG.DAT option, 184

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 203

Memory, reprogramming flash, 230

Memory view test, 151

Menu password, 126

Menu settings, 139

Menus, opening, 81, 82, 313

Message, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

Microsoft ActiveSync, 169, 170, 229

Minimum bar code length

CONFIG.DAT option, 184

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 204

“Missing ‘;’ ” message, 176

“Missing ‘=’ ” message, 176

Mod 10 check, 99

CONFIG.DAT option, 179, 188

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200, 206

Mod 11 check

CONFIG.DAT option, 188

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 206

Mode, CONFIG.DAT option, 177

MSI Plessey, 327

Native, 106, 117 programmer’s guide, xx

NC1100 Power Supply and Charger, 156

361

Index

Network, 2

New Line key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

700 series, 55 bar code label, 309

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70

No UCC Type

CONFIG.DAT option, 188

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

Norand Utilities, 231

Norwegian character set, 223

Norwegian IBM character set, 224

Not symbol

11XX, 48

17XX, 44

5055, 38

59XX, 41

6400, 30 bar code to scan, 313

Num lock, display annunciators, 5055, 77

Numbers test, 152

Numeric, keypad mode, 114

Numeric Keypad mode, 114

Numeric keys, key remapping codes, 216

Object store, 169

Opening main menu

5055, 162

6400, 160

Opening TE menus, 81, 82, 313

Opening the TE application, 3

Optical inputs, 284 returned values, 284 , 285

Orders, 242

Origin set, 109

CONFIG.DAT option, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Overlays.

See Keyboards

PA keys

17XX, 47

2415, 14, 21, 50

2425, 17

2455, 25, 71

2475, 28

248X, 28

5055, 40

59XX, 43

6400, 32

362

700 series, 55 bar code labels, 313

CK30, 61

CK31, 65 description, 9 encoded code sequences, 315

Packet driver test, 151 histogram, 152 packet stats (statistics), 151

Packet stats (statistics), 151

Page mode, 136

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Paging keys

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 12

2425, 15

2435A, 19

2455, 23

2475, 26

248X, 26

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31

700 series, 52 bar code labels, 308

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 69 key remapping codes, 219

Pan print, 127

ParmsBySession, 100

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Part numbers, IBM character sets, 224

Passwords

Main Menu

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 209 saving parameters, 154

Set-up Parms menu

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 83

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 86

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 85

CONFIG.DAT option, 197

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Pause “xxxxx” command, 165

Pause key, 38

PC char set, 115

Period-Comma, 190

Period-comma, 5250 options, 107

Peripherals test, 147

Pg Dn key, 38

Pg Up key, 38

Plessey, 279, 327

CONFIG.DAT option, 181

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Polish, code page, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 123

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index

Port number, 90

CONFIG.DAT option, 177

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

Portuguese character set, 223

PRI (primary version).

See Radio test (802.11)

Print device, 127

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 209

Printer address, 127

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 209

Printer port

CONFIG.DAT option, 193

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 209

Program Access keys.

See PA keys

Program name, 6

CONFIG.DAT option, 197

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Program Tab order, 244

Program version, 6

CONFIG.DAT option, 197

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Programmable function keys.

See Function keys

PromptSessionStart command, 165

Protocol options

3210 emulation, 109

3270 options, 108

5250 options, 106

VT/ANSI, 110

Protocol opts, 104

3270 options, 108 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 109 any auto enter, 110 auto entr scan, 109 auto tab scan, 109

BRT (bright) auto enter, 109 device name, 109 emulate 3210, 109 keybrd unlock, 108 origin set, 109 telnet, 109

RS232 setup

RS232 baud rate, 112

RS232 data bits, 112

RS232 flow, 112

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

RS232 parity, 112

RS232 stop bits, 112

VT/ANSI options, 110 allow linemode, 116 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 115 answerback, 111 application (keypad mode), 114 application (cursor mode), 115 auto entr scan, 110 auto wrap, 116 block (line edit mode), 113 char (character mode), 113

CR to CRLF (carriage return to carriage return/line feed), 110 cursor (VT cursor mode), 115

DEL to BS (delete to backspace), 110 discretebells, 112 do gold key, 116 do utf-8, 116 keypad mode, 114 local echo, 111 lock mode, 113 native, 117 numeric (keypad mode), 114

PC char set, 115

RS232 setup, 112 screen lock, 111 send XON, 114 auto tab scan, 111 telnet, 113

Term (terminal) setup, 114 terminal ID, 116 terminal mode, 115 transmit BS, 113 userkey locked, 112

VT cursor mode, 115

VT220 mode, 113

Protocols

5250, 106

Adaptive Poll, 192

Native, 106

RTC, 192

SST, 192

TCP/IP Direct Connect, 96

UDP Plus, 6, 88 upline, 90

VT/ANSI, 104, 105, 106

WTP, 6

PT order, 244

Quiet Zone

CONFIG.DAT option, 186

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

RA order, 244

Radio, display annunciators

5055, 75

6400, 75

Radio baud rates, 192

363

Index

Radio comm, 123

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 124

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 124 disconnection value, 124 security ID, 125 user authentication, 124

Radio configuration number, CONFIG.DAT option, 177

Radio number

CONFIG.DAT option, 178

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

Radio protocols, 192

Radio test (802.11)

6400, 5055, 147

B SSID (Basic Service Set ID), 148

PRI (primary version), 148

RFLINK, 148

SEC (secondary version), 148

SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio), 148

SSID (Service Set ID), 148

TxRate, 148

RB command, 237

Read Buffer command, 236, 237

Read Modified All command, 236, 238

Read Modified command, 236, 238

Read Relay (#R) extended command, 285

Receive Only (#G) extended command, 264

Receiving, display annunciators

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

Receiving data, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

Redundancy, 98

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

Relay (#R) extended commands, Set, Reset, Read, 285

Remap command, 214

Remapping characters, 219, 222 creating a macro, 215

EHLLAPI values, 215 key code table, 216 key or two-key sequence, 214 nesting, 216

Remapping keys, 214 per session, 216

Remote baud, 119

CONFIG.DAT option, 191

Remote display, 119

CONFIG.DAT option, 191

Remote type, 119

Renaming auto-login script files, 170

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 170

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 170

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 171

6400, 5055, 171

Repeat to Address order, 244

Reprogramming, flash memory, 230

Reset key

11XX, 49

364

17XX, 46

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31

700 series, 55 bar code label, 310

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8

Reset Relay (#R) extended command, 285

Reset Terminal command, 236, 238

Reshow command, 5

Restart “x” command, 165

Return AID key, 257

Return key

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2435A, 19

700 series, 55

CK30, 60

CK31, 64 description, 8

Return result, TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Return Version (#V) extended command, 270

RF communications, downloading files, 167

RFLINK.

See Radio test (802.11)

RGB format, 220

RM60/70, 6400, 5055, 92

RM80/90, 6400, 5055, 92

Rows remote display, CONFIG.DAT option, 191 terminal screen size, 196 wireless station screen size

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

RS-232, stream, CONFIG.DAT option, 179

RS232 baud rate, 112

RS232 data bits, 112

RS232 flow, 112

RS232 parity, 112

RS232 setup, 112

RS232 stop bits, 112

RS232 stream, 97

RS232 test, 149

RT3210 hand-held computer, 109

RTC diag mode, 192

RTC over TCP

CONFIG.DAT option, 178

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

RTC protocol, 192

RTC/WTP, 90, 92

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

S 2 of 5.

See Standard 2 of 5

Sample auto-login script files, 171

Save parms, 154

“Save parms” message, 153

SBA order, 247

Scan (#S) extended command, 272

Scan All Fields

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Scan all flds (fields), 97, 99

Scan options, 98 length options, 103

Scan postamble character

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Scan postchar, 100

Scan preamble character

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Scan prechar, 100

Scan timeout, 99

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

Scanner order, 245

Scanner test, 150

700 Series, CK31, CV60, 80

Scanner type, 98

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

SCN order, 245

Screen columns, 196

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Screen Design Aid, 236

Screen lock, 111

Screen mode, 136 center cursor, 136

CONFIG.DAT option, 194 corner mode, 136 define origin, 137 lazy mode, 137 locked mode, 137 page mode, 136

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Screen rows, 196

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Screen size, 129, 138, 196

11XX, 135

17XX, 134

2415, 129

2425, 129

2435A disabled icons, 129 enabled icons, 130

2455, 130

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Index

2475, 131

248X, 131

5020, 133

5055, 133

59XX, 134

6400, 132

700 series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 135

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

CONFIG.DAT option, 194 remote display, 119

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Script files.

See Auto-login

ScrLk key, 38

Scroll setting

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Scroll window, 139

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 6400, 5020,

5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 138

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 139

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

SDA, 236

Secure Digital storage card, 169

Security ID, 125, 192

Select font

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121

CONFIG.DAT option, 192

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Send command, 165

Send XON, 114

Sending, display annunciators

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

Serial ports, downloading files, 167

Serial scanning, configuring options, 10

Server IP

CONFIG.DAT option, 178

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

Session menu, 157 copy setup, 157 session name, 157 set hot key, 157 switch, 157

Session name

CONFIG.DAT option, 196 session menu, 157

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Set Buffer Address order, 247

Set hot key

CONFIG.DAT option, 196 session menu, 157

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Set Parameters (#H) extended command, 267

Set Relay (#R) extended command, 285

365

Index

Set-up parms barcode parms (2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X,

5020) code 39 encoded, 97 concatenate, 97

RS232 stream, 97 scan all flds, 97 stream scan, 97 barcode parms (6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 700

Series) scan options, 98 scanner type, 98

COM select, 128 display options

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 5020,

6400, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 120 menu password, 126 print device, 127 radio comm, 123

RTC/WTP, 90, 92

TCP/IP settings, 94

WTP settings, 90, 92 scan options additional bar codes, 102 bc type char, 99 concatenate, 99 enable bar codes, 101 length, 103 mod 10 check, 99 parmsbysession, 100 redundancy, 98 scan all flds, 99 scan postchar, 100 scan prechar, 100 scan timeout, 99 stream scan, 99 use wedge mode, 100

Set-up Parms menu

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 83

5020, 700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 86

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 85

CONFIG.DAT option, 197

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

Setting up the network, 2

Setting up the terminal, 2

Setup key, 38

SF order, 248

Shift key unlock, 267

Shift keys, 74

11XX, 48

17xx, 44

2415, 12

2425, 15

2435A, 18, 19

2455, 23

2475, 26

248X, 26

5055, 38

366

59XX, 41

6400, 29

700 series, 55

CK30, 59, 60

CK31, 63, 64

CV60, 67

Shift mode, alphabetic character, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

Shift mode, left, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

5055, 76

59XX, 76

6400, 76

Shift mode, right, display annunciators

11XX, 77

17XX, 77

5055, 77

59XX, 77

6400, 77

SEC (secondary version).

See Radio test (802.11)

Service Set ID (SSID).

See Radio test (802.11)

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR).

See Radio test (802.11)

SIP toggle, CONFIG.DAT option, 192

Skip FldExit

CONFIG.DAT option, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Skip FldExit (field exit), 5250 options, 107

SNA, 90

CONFIG.DAT option, 178

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199

SNA keys

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 13

2425, 16

2435A, 20

2455, 24

2475, 27

248X, 27

5020, 35

5055, 39

59XX, 42

6400, 31 bar code labels, 309

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

CV60, 70 description, 8

Software Input Panels

700 series, 51 changing colors, 51

CV60, 67 changing colors, 67 changing size, 67

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Space bar key

2435A, 19

700 series, 55

CK30, 60

CK31, 64 key remapping code, 216

Spacing parameters

2415 terminal, 290

2425 terminal, 290

2435A terminal, 294

2455 terminal, 301

2475 terminal, 303

248X terminal, 303

Spanish character set, 223

Spanish IBM character set, 224

Special characters, encoded sequences, 315 , 315

SSCP command, 236, 238

SST diag mode, 192

SST protocol, 192

Standard, font quality, CK30, CK31, 122

Standard 2 of 5, 326

Standard keys

2435A, 19

5020, 35

700 series, 53

CK30, 60

CK31, 64

Start character, 255, 264

START decode

CONFIG.DAT option, 187

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 205

Start Field order, 248

Starting the TE application, 3

Status command, 5

Status line, 5

Straight 2 of 5, 281

CONFIG.DAT option, 181

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Stream Scan

CONFIG.DAT option, 180

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Stream scan, 97, 99, 267

Swap fore/back, display colors, 700 Series, CK30, CV60,

122

Swedish character set, 223

Swedish IBM character set, 224

Switch, session menu, 157

Symbologies, 319

CONFIG.DAT option, 180

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Symbols, key remapping codes, 216

“Syntax error” message, 176

Synthesized UHF radio, 6400, 5055, 94

SysReq key, 38

System 0 UPCE

CONFIG.DAT option, 185

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 204

System 1 UPCE

CONFIG.DAT option, 185

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 204

System messages, CONFIG.DAT, 176

System Services Control Point command, 238

Tab key bar code labels, 309 special function key, 700 series, 55

Tab keys

11XX, 49

17XX, 46

2415, 12

2425, 15

2435A, 19

2455, 23

CV60, 70

2475, 26

248X, 26

5055, 39

6400, 31 encoded sequences, 314

Tab size, 138

CONFIG.DAT option, 194

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Tahoma, select font, 700 Series, CK30, CV60, 121

TCP/IP Direct Connect, 2, 96

TCP/IP settings, 94

TD2400 Communications Dock, xx

TE application, opening, 3

TE configuration menus bar code label, 82, 313 configuring options, 81

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 160

5055, 161

6400, 160 key remapping code, 219 navigating through, 74 opening, 81 restarting, 158

Telnet, 90

3270 options, 109

5250 options, 106

CONFIG.DAT option, 178, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 199 vt/ansi options, 113

Temperature, display annunciators, 17XX, 77

Term (terminal) setup, 114

Terminal emulations, 161 updating 50DS1000, 161

Terminal Font Set table, 337

Terminal ID, VT/ANSI options, 116

Terminal mode, 115

Terminal type

CONFIG.DAT option, 178

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Terminating keys, 316

Index

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 367

Index

Tests, 147

802.11 radio, 6400, 5055, 147 display, 149 keyboard, 150

700 Series, CK31, CV60, 80 memory view, 6400, 5055, 17XX, 11XX, 151 numbers, 152 packet driver

6400, 5055, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 151 histogram, 152 packet stats (statistics), 151 peripherals, 147 radio test, 6400, 5055, 147

RS-232, 149 scanner, 150

700 Series, CK31, CV60, 80 timed numbers, 152

Timed numbers test, 152

Tone (#T) extended command, 271

Tool Kit, INTERLNK and INTERSVR, 231

Toolbar options, 140

Top-row function keys, 5020, 36

Trailing characters, 107

Transmit and Receive (#F) extended command, 254

Transmit BS

CONFIG.DAT option, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Transmit BS mode, 113

Transmit Only (#P) extended command, 260

Transmit_rate values (Lucent radios), 147

Transmitting data, display annunciators

11XX, 76

17XX, 76

Troubleshooting, 147

TxRate.

See Radio test (802.11)

Type, remote display, CONFIG.DAT option, 191

Type-ahead

CONFIG.DAT option, 196

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211

UCC F1 Value

CONFIG.DAT option, 189

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

UCC/EAN

CONFIG.DAT option, 188

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 207

UDP Plus, 2, 6, 88 radio comm, 124

Underline

6400, 5020, 59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 120

Underline blink

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 5055, 6400,

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 118

700 Series, CK30, CV60, 120

Unit Manager, downloading files, 168

Unit number

CONFIG.DAT option, 178

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

368

Universal Product Code.

See UPC

“Unknown type” message, 176

Unsupported commands, 5

Up and Down arrow keys, 75

UPC, 277, 321

CONFIG.DAT option, 181

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 201

Updating 50DS1000, 161

Upline protocol, 90

Use Color, 5250 options, 108

Use PC char set

CONFIG.DAT option, 190

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 208

Use Wedge Mode, 100

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

User Auth, 124, 192

UserKey locked, 112

“Value out of range” message, 176

Version info, 152

Versions building customized, 233

CONFIG.DAT options, 197 of program name, 6

Return Version extended command, 270

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 211 using CHECKCFG to display, 231 using FLSHCONV to display, 232

Viewport.

See Window/viewport

Volume, beeper setup, 145

VT cursor mode, 115

VT/ANSI options, 106, 110 allow linemode, 116 allow NAWS (negotiate about window size), 115 answerback, 111 application keypad mode, 114

VT cursor mode, 115 auto entr scan, 110 auto tab scan, 111 auto wrap, 116 block (line edit mode), 113 char (character mode), 113

CR to CRLF (carriage return to carriage return/line feed), 110 cursor, VT cursor mode, 115

DEL to BS (delete to backspace), 110 discretebells, 112 do gold key, 116 do utf-8, 116 keypad mode, 114 local echo, 111 lock mode, 113 menu options, 104 native, 117 numeric, keypad mode, 114

PC char set, 115

RS232 baud rate, 112

RS232 data bits, 112

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

RS232 flow, 112

RS232 parity, 112

RS232 setup, 112

RS232 stop bits, 112 screen lock, 111 send XON, 114 telnet, 113 term (terminal setup), 114 terminal ID, 116 terminal mode, 115 transmit BS, 113 userkey locked, 112

VT cursor mode, 115

VT220 mode, 113

VT220, 115

VT220 mode, 113

VT320, 115

WaitFor command, 164

Wand Emulate scanner

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

Wand scanner

CONFIG.DAT option, 179

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 200

WCC data stream command format, 240 definition of, 239

Erase/Write command, 237

PT order, 244

SSCP command, 238

Write command, 239

Window/viewport, 218, 308

Write command, 236, 239

Write Control Character.

See WCC

WTP, 6

WTP settings, 90, 92

XOFF, 256

XON, flow control, 256

XOrigin

CONFIG.DAT option, 195

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

YOrigin

CONFIG.DAT option, 195

TE_SETTINGS.INI option, 210

Index

TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide 369

Index

Files Index

Numbers

1700BIOS.EXE, 233

3270.INI, 213

3270.XLT, 219, 222, 226, 227, 228

50BDXXXX.EXE, 230

50DS1000, 161

AUTOEXEC.BAT, 161 updating 50DS1000, 161

AUTOLOG.SCR, 164, 166, 167, 169, 170

2415, 2425, 2435A, 2455, 2475, 248X, 167

59XX, 17XX, 11XX, 169

6400, 5055, 168

700 Series, CK30, CK31, CV60, 169

CFGLIT.DAT, 73, 169, 176, 199, 212, 232, 233

CFGLIT.TXT, 212

CHECKCFG.EXE, 174, 176, 231

CONFIG.DAT, 73, 83, 85, 86, 89, 125, 159, 163, 174,

176, 229, 230, 232 migrating to TE_SETTINGS.INI, 197

CONFIG.OLD, 73, 163, 174

CONFIG.SYS, 230, 231 updating 50DS1000, 161

FLSHCONV.EXE, 169, 232

FWP110H0, 6

FWP111H0, 6

FWP114H0, 6

FWP116H0, 6

FWP118H0, 6

FWP170H0, 6

FWP170H0.EXE, 233

FWP170H0.HEX, 233

FWP170H3, 6

FWP171H0, 6

FWP171H3, 6

FWP174H0, 6

FWP174H3, 6

FWP176H0, 6

FWP176H3, 6

FWP178H0, 6

FWP178H3, 6

FWP240H0, 6

FWP502H0, 6

FWP591H1, 6

FWP592H0, 6

FWP594H0, 6

FWP596H0, 6

FWP598H0, 6

FWP640H0, 6

FWP640H4, 6

FWP64TH0, 6

FWP64TH4, 6

FWP650H0, 6 terminal emulations, 161

FWP65TH0, 6

FWP700H0, 6

FWPCK3H0, 6

FWPCV6H0, 6

INTERLNK.EXE, 230, 231

INTERSVR.EXE, 231

ITCCOLOR.DAT, 220

KERNEL.EXE, 233

LOADER.EXE, 167, 229

MAGCARD.CAB, 288

MAGCARD.DLL, 288

MAKELIT.EXE, 212

NET.CFG, 92, 147

NEW.HEX, 169

NORAND.FNT, 233

PROGDUX.EXE, 169, 234

REMAP.CFG, 169, 214

T24XCOPY.EXE, 167

TE_SETTINGS.INI, 73, 86, 89, 126, 163, 169, 174 migrating from CONFIG.DAT, 197

TOOLS.EXE, 169, 174

WTPPKT.EXE, 92

370 TE 2000 ™ 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Guide

Corporate Headquarters

6001 36th Avenue West

Everett, Washington 98203

U.S.A.

tel 425.348.2600

fax 425.355.9551

www.intermec.com

TE 2000 t 3270 Terminal Emulation Programmer's Guide - March 2005

*977-055-003J*

P/N 977-055-003 REV J

Olá! Eu sou um chatbot de IA especificamente treinado para ajudá-lo com o Intermec Oracle-Ready CK31 Manual do Programador. Já revisei cuidadosamente o documento e posso ajudá-lo a localizar as informações exatas de que precisa ou explicar o conteúdo de maneira clara e simples. Quer você esteja procurando orientação sobre recursos específicos, etapas de solução de problemas ou uso geral, fique à vontade para fazer suas perguntas. Quanto mais detalhes você fornecer sobre suas preocupações ou necessidades, mais precisamente e eficazmente poderei ajudá-lo!

Assistente digitando

O assistente está fora do teclado. Por favor, tente novamente mais tarde.

Anúncio